Home

MRA4 HighPROTEC

1. Millimeters F inches ee 206 3 n 8 42 d 212 7 182 r 837 7 p 717 g i i 3 Io o de D Io gos L 9 m m Emacs HRS Sj ei ES LH g 49 ES 7 SES H i HIS HS Li Li iT T I t 3D ES S S ry ES is SES Ep E BESTEN a3 Be LEN af Ea LE ES E SES HIE EB E SES S S ser Lisa lel SP ber n d o X102 L xk T PUTS A Pe Iole amp l aHa o JL e e C om Vo 06 o oly 3 Side View B2 Housing A WARNING The housing must be carefully earthed Connect a ground cable 4 to 6 mm AWG 12 10 1 7 Nm 15 Ib in to the housing using the screw which is marked with the ground symbol at the rear side of the device The power supply card needs a separate ground connection 2 5 mm AWG 14 at terminal X1 0 55 Nm 4 9 Ib in He I A a EN MRA4 04 09 Page 23 Installation and Connection Installation Diagram Even when the auxiliary voltage is switched off unsafe voltages might remain at the device connections Millimeters inches EI
2. Reset Trip 13 5 t t char s t n t char s IG 4 IG 4 IG G gt 100 10 l t is 1 5 t char 1 0 5 0 1 0 2 0 1 0 05 0 01 0 01 0 1 l 10 100 x G gt multiples of pickup EN MRA4 04 09 Page 291 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G IEC LINV Notice Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and instantaneous Reset Trip t EM t char s t ER t char s IG a IG 1 IG IG 1x10 100 tls t char n 1 0 Hid 0 5 0 2 0 1 0 05 0 1 0 01 0 1 l 10 100 x G gt multiples of pickup gp uw Sasmw gum m rpa a DB i d TT uuuuus cama EIErIs TIEIaassssrur Wai Page 292 EN MRA4 04 09 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G IEC EINV Notice Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and instantaneous
3. Reset Trip t L t char s t E t char s IG 1 IG 1 IG I Io J 1x10 100 10 t s t char l 0 1 1 5 1 0 005 9 02 0 01 0 01 0 1 l 10 100 x IG gt multiples of pickup pe I AA Hs sas EN MRA4 04 09 Page 293 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G ANSI MINV Notice Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and instantaneous Reset Trip 0 0515 L t char s t 1G 002 0 1140 t char s gt 1 IG 1 x10 100 MM l t s E t char 10 TH 2 l 1 0 5 0 1 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 x G gt multiples of pickup Page 294 EN MRA4 04 09 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G ANSI VINV Notice Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and
4. 1x10 100 LA 5 10 ee 1 0 t s OXIDE E A E r a ea Pe un t char 1 0 05 0 1 0 01 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 x IGnom multiples of the nominal current EN MRA4 04 09 Page 297 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G IT Notice Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and instantaneous Reset Trip a 3 t t char s t LS t char s IG IG IGno na 1x10 100 l t s t char A 5 1 2 0 1 x 1 0 5 0 05 0 01 0 01 0 1 l 10 100 x IGnom multiples of the nominal current Eg s sz uus8 gt gt EOVAVrYa I Page 298 EN MRA4 04 09 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G I2T Notice A Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and instantaneous Reset Trip
5. instantaneous Reset Trip 21 t char s t 0 491 t char s IG 7 ics 1 1x10 100 10 15 1 2 1 0 5 0 1 0 01 0 1 10 100 x G multiples of pickup peu I A A E EN MRA4 04 09 Page 295 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G t s Page 296 ANSI EINV Notice Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and instantaneous Reset Trip t At t char s t 0 1217 t char s i 1 iG 1 1x10 100 10 t char 15 LUI 10 i H 5 2 1 0 1 0 01 0 1 10 100 0 5 x G multiples of pickup EN MRA4 04 09 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G Therm Flat Notice Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and instantaneous Reset Trip 5 1 5 x i et t t char s t TENE t char s IG 9 S iGno IGno t 5 t char s
6. a nnne nnn nna rase sas nasse sae saa sns nana 480 System Mod le Signals sasssa E EST 481 Special Values of the System Module a nnne rna ae nnne anas 482 COMMISSIONING cess cta Focus uuu Dun Sar issu E ede ERU da aN I E DIMMFS Dx RI RUD PI Mer UU RIIEEIE E CLER sets 483 Commissioning Protection Test u uu uuu aaa anakan kakana pa Wa res Vira aa ei Pel p RN un ukkuna 484 Putting out of Operation Plug out the Relay ssssssssssssssseseeeen nennen nnne nnne nnn nnns 485 Oa uuu E E E E E E A EE E E EEE E 486 COJO P PE AEE u BO uu A E E E E EE U 486 SEL OUPERVISION ee E E E E E 487 FI O TUSSSqUESq OUS uuu l uu u EA E EER 488 TECHNICAL DAR 489 Climatic Environmental Conditions nn nnne sese nnn nnns 489 Degree or Protection EN 60529 imi uu u uu is Sd Uno qux sum pua Ud EA Add DU Sow wur CENE UE Ga 489 ROUINO TOS C PL cet ee 489 aec T E s 489 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 9 Plug in Connectors with Integrated Short Circuiter Conventional Current InpulS uu L L LI pM a ntu cux fume ep aaa denuendaniexnanadea EE Ra C Gam mue ui Eu ual 489 WO MAGS UPDI e
7. IL1 N IL2 N IL3 N IG N Page 36 EN MRA4 04 09 Installation and Connection System SC A WARNING Make sure that the tightening torque is 0 55 Nm 4 9 Ib in Terminal markings X104 for device MRA4 Electro mechanical assignment for device MRA4 O HTL uP 6 O HTL uP 14 X104 12 345 This contact closes after the boot phase of the device if the protection is working This contact will open if an internal device error has occurred please refer to chapter Self Supervision EN MRA4 04 09 Page 37 Installation and Connection Communication Interfaces Modbus RTU IEC 60870 5 103 via Terminals A WARNING Make sure that the tightening torque is 0 23 Nm 2 03 Ib in Terminal Marking X103 for the device MRA4 Protective Relay Electro mechanical assignment for device MRA4 Protective Relay 9V R1 560 0 n 42 120 Q N O TI CE The Modbus IEC 60870 5 103 connection cable must be shielded The shielding has to be fixed at the screw which is marked with the ground symbol at the rear side of the device The communication is Halfduplex Page 38 EN MRA4 04 09 Installation and Connection Wiring example Device in the Middle of the BUS Protective Relay Wiring example Device at the End of the BUS using the integrated
8. a a nnn nenne nnn nennen nn renean 337 Signals of the Switch Onto Fault Module Output States r 337 Commissioning Switch Onto Fault ANSI 50HS a nenne nennen 338 CLPU Supervision MopuLE Corp LOAD PlicruP 339 Device planning parameters of the Cold Load Pickup module 342 Global protection parameter of the Cold Load Pickup module 342 Parameter set parameters of the Cold Load Pickup module 343 States of the inputs of the Cold Load Pickup module 344 Signals of the Cold Load Pickup module states of the outputs 344 Commissioning of the Cold Load Pickup Module a rrasrsrsssrssssissssaa 345 IH2 MODUEE INRRUSRu l ll lll ea UI Sea SN SER OI SUI DONI ESI DUS SEIS De aaa Ur sii 3 PR S ROS EE SUE 347 Device Planning Parameters of the Inrush Module
9. 431 Setting Group Parameters of the Start Functions and Fast Trip of the Module Automatic Reclosure 432 Module Automatic Reclosure Fast Trip Signals Output States 435 Setting Group Parameters of the AR Abort Functions a rra nennen nens 436 ARADON FUNCIONS NIORT t 437 Page 8 EN MRA4 04 09 fa dioi mim VR 0 RECETTE E E uuu u u Su a 5 ated 439 Commissioning Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 nnne nens 440 ExP Protection MopuLE EXTERNAL PROTECTION 441 Device Planning Parameters of the Module External Protection 443 Global Protection Parameters of the Module External Protection 443 Setting Group Parameters of the Module External Protection 444 Module External Protection Input States nennen nennen nena nenne nnne nnn nns 445 Module External Protection Signals Output States sssessssssssssssssseee nennen 445 Commissioning External Protection
10. PO a A eee Page 240 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Protection Prot Module Protection Prot Prot The module Protection serves as outer frame for all other protection modules i e they are all enclosed by the module Protection All alarms and tripping commands are combined in module Protection by an OR logic If in module Protection the parameter Function is set on inactive or in case the module is blocked then the complete protective function of the device does not work anymore Protection inactive If the master module Protection was permanently deactivated or if a temporary blockage of this module has occurred and the allocated blocking signal is still active then the complete functionality protection of the device is zero In such a case the protective function is inactive Protection active If the master module Protection was activated and a blockade for this module was not activated respectively the assigned blocking signal is inactive at that moment then the Protection is active Hem ID A r c sa EN MRA4 04 09 Page 241 Prot Protection Module sr 1u uuuBissv u p I ZOIgX43 10Jd sr 1u uuuBissv u I LOIgX3 JO ova 014 L es j oAnoe eAnoeul 24 OlgX3 Old 9A e 10Jgd oAnoe eAnoeul uonoun410Jd MO Senje pau
11. 393 Device planning parameters of the Power Factor module a 396 Global protection parameter of the Power Factor module ener 396 Parameter set parameters of the Power Factor module 397 States of the inputs of the Power Factor module nennen nnne nna nnns 399 Signals of the Power Factor module states of the outputs 399 Commissioning Power Factor ANSI 55 a a a n nn nnne rns sensns 400 F PROTECTION MopuLE FREQUENCY PROTECTION fa E105 T E 402 Device Planning Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module 408 Global Protection Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module 408 Setting Group Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module 409 Frequency Protection Module Input States a a nnne nnns 411 Frequency Protection Module Signals Output States
12. a 411 Commissioning Frequency Protection Overfrequency ANSI 81O 412 Commissioning Frequency Protection Underfrequency ANSI 81U 412 Commissioning Ordine anqas qhuakaiqsasaakasq 413 Colrissioning and SY OI oops uuu uuu uuu 414 Commissioning della piluta u a E EEA 415 AR PRorEcrTioN MopuLE Automatic REcLosuRE ANSI 79 416 Direct Commands of the Automatic Reclosure Module a r rrrrsrsrirsssa 423 Device Planning Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure 423 Global Protection Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure 424 Setting Group Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure 425 Module Automatic Reclosure Input States ccc cccccececeeeeceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeaeeeeeseeeeeaeseeegeeeeegens 429 Module Automatic Reclosure Signals Output States enne 430 Automatic Reclosure Module Values
13. Pa A c eee Page 460 EN MRA4 04 09 CTS Supervision Module Current Transformer Supervision ANSI 60L CTS Supervision Module Current Transformer Supervision ANSI 60L CTS Wire breaks and failures within measuring circuits cause current transformer failures The module CTS can detect a failure of the CT if the calculated earth current does not match the measured one If an adjustable threshold value Difference of measured and calculated earth current is exceeded a CT failure can be assumed This is signaled through a message alarm The precondition is that the conductor currents are measured by the device and the earth current for instance by a ring core type current transformer The measuring principles of the circuit supervision are based on comparing the measured and the calculated residual currents In an ideal case these are IL1 IL2 IL3 KT 1G 23 1 KI 1G 0 Kl represents a correction factor which takes the different transformation ratio of the phase and earth current transformers into account The device automatically calculates this factor from the rated field parameters i e the relation between the rated primary and secondary current values of the phase and earth current transformers For compensating the current proportional ratio error of the measuring circuits the dynamic correction factor Kd can be used As a function of the measured max current this factor is c
14. 225 Se THINS SUIS Tio MER leer 2 acd uu a E 225 Seiing OU Oy MG via Smar VEW MNEMMEMETTT 226 Copying Setting Groups Parameter Sets via Smart VieW ccc cc cece cece cece cece eee m eee eene rennes 22 C OMmoaring Selling SIOUDS via omak E Lar Comparing Parameter Files via Smart view ssssssssssssssssseseseee nennen nennen nnne nnne nnne 228 Converting Parameter Files via Smart view aaa raras rrsrrssssssrssssssssssssssssssaaa 228 FIELD PARAMETERS uuu ul KEa NUNC PUUAdUNIDNESNMINU KEEN UU EEUU E E Ve EAE RU VEU m MN NMMEMUNN 229 BLEOCRINOS u u S es In I aed even euseccqtedvew sete Miete Uie E ces EN PCIe IINE E 234 Permanent BIOCKING uuu ikasia 234 Temporary E10 dine MATE EI m m 234 To Activate or Deactivate the Tripping Command of a Protection Module 238 Activate Deactivate Respectively Block Temporarily Protection Functions 239 MODULE PROTECTION PRoT U u 241 Direct Commands of the Protection Module a ar nnne nnne ns 248 Global Protection Parameters of the Protection Module
15. 500 Measured Values Tolerances 500 Phase ana Ein Coren Vaeqsuiiig u ULU aasan akiwanayakanamaqpashakiasqatpkasaskuoskuwayaatuwkluascpakpanipaqia 500 Phaseto earth and Residual Voltage Mieosuremenl a a a ra e emen 50 FCI TCO SU mei uuu TEE EET 201 Protection Stages Tolerances u LULLU uu skunkuwawsunqunQasaqkiawakupaqasawa aqamqa aqaahuwawaqaus RE GER ERE Sen 502 This manual applies to devices version Version 1 5 a Build 6656 6789 6972 Page 10 EN MRA4 04 09 Comments on the Manual Comments on the Manual This manual explains in general the tasks of device planning parameter setting installation commissioning operation and maintenance of the HighPROTEC devices The manual serves as working basis for Engineers in the protection field commissioning engineers people dealing with setting testing and maintenance of protection and control devices e as well as trained personnel for electrical installations and power stations All functions concerning the type code will be defined Should there be a description of any functions parameters or inputs outputs which do not apply to the device in use please ignore that information All details and references are explained to the best of our knowledge and are based on our experi
16. ExP 4 Alarm l Module input state External Alarm ExP 4 Trip l Module input state External Trip SOTF active Signal active SOTF ExBlo Signal External Blocking SOTF Ex rev Interl Signal External reverse Interlocking SOTF enabled Signal Switch Onto Fault enabled This Signal can be used to modify Overcurrent Protection Settings SOTF AR Blo Signal Blocked by AR SOTF I Signal No Load Current SOTF ExBlot l Module input state External blocking SOTF ExBlo2 Il Module input state External blocking SOTF Ex rev Interl Module input state External reverse interlocking Page 120 EN MRA4 04 09 Assignment List Name Description SOTF Manual ON I Module input state Circuit breaker was switched on manually SOTF Ext SOTF I Module input state External Switch Onto Fault Alarm CLPU active Signal active CLPU ExBlo Signal External Blocking CLPU Ex rev Interl Signal External reverse Interlocking CLPU enabled Signal Cold Load enabled CLPU detected Signal Cold Load detected CLPU AR Blo Module input state AR Blo CLPU I lt Signal No Load Current CLPU ExBlo1 l Module input state External blocking CLPU ExBlo2 Module input state External blocking CLPU Ex rev Interl Module input state External reverse interlocking CBF active Signal active CBF ExBlo Signal
17. a arar aarr nnn ne rne serena nnns 446 CBF SuPERvisioN MopuLE Circuit BREAKER FaiLuRE PRorTEcrTioN ANSI 50BF 447 Device Planning Parameters of the CBF Module nnne nnne nnne nnns 449 Global Protection Parameters of the CBF Module a rra ar nennen nnns 449 Setting Group Parameters of the CBF MOdulle cccccceccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeesseeeeseeseeseeesaeeesaaeeeaeeees 450 CBF Mod le MPU SIBISS UU Sere cts edie lil li aaa TERT 451 CBF Module Signals Output States a a nnne nnne nnne ne ner serre nnne 451 Commissioning Circuit Breaker Failure Protection ANSI 50BF 452 TCS Supervision MopuLE Trip Circuit Supervision ANSI 74TC 453 Device Planning Parameters of the Trip Circuit Supervision Module 456 Global Protection Parameters of the Trip Circuit Supervision Module 457 Setting Group Parameters of the Trip Circuit Supervision Module 458 Trip Circuit Supervision Module Input States cccccccccccesceceeec
18. Name Description Assignment via Start1 l State of the module input Trigger Device Para event start recording if Recorders Fault rec Start2 l State of the module input Trigger Device Para event start recording if Recorders Fault rec Start3 l State of the module input Trigger Device Para event start recording if Recorders Fault rec Start4 l State of the module input Trigger Device Para event start recording if Recorders Fault rec Start5 l State of the module input Trigger Device Para event start recording if Recorders Fault rec Start6 l State of the module input Trigger Device Para event start recording if Recorders Fault rec Start l State of the module input Trigger Device Para event start recording if Recorders Fault rec Start8 State of the module input Trigger Device Para event start recording if Recorders Fault rec Fault Recorder Module Signals Name Description Reset rec Signal Delete record Man Trigger Signal Manual Trigger EN MRA4 04 09 Page 197 Module Event Recorder Module Event Recorder Event rec The event recorder can register up to 300 events and the last minimum 50 saved events are recorded fail safe The following information is provided for any of the events Events are logged as follows Record No Fault No Netfault No Date of Record Module Name State Sequential Number of the A Netfault No
19. fic in gt Te AERC SSS IU J w eur EN MRA4 04 09 Page 59 Navigation Operation 1 LEDs group A Messages inform you about left operational conditions system data or other device particulars They additionally provide you with information regarding failures and functioning of the device as well as other states of the device and the equipment Alarm signals can be freely allocated to LEDs out of the assignment list An overview about all alarm signals available in the device can be obtained from the ASSIGNMENT LisT Which can be found in the appendix LED System Should LED System OK OK flash red during operation contact the Service Dept immediately 3 Display Via the display you can read out operational data and edit parameters LEDs group B Messages inform you about right operational conditions system data or other device particulars They additionally provide you with information regarding failures and functioning of the device as well as other states of the device and the equipment Alarm signals can be freely allocated to LEDs out of the assignment list An overview about all alarm signals available in the device can be obtained from the assignment list which can be found in the appendix Page 60 EN MRA4 04 09 Navigation Operation
20. sssssssssssseseseseen eene nennen nnns 372 States of the inputs of the asymmetry module 373 Signals of the asymmetry module states of the outputs 374 Commissioning Asymmetry Protection seessssesssssssssssesese eese nennen nnne nnne rn nnn nsn nn nnn nna nnns 375 PQS Power Protection Monue ANSI 32 37 1 376 Device planning parameters of the Power Protection module 380 Global protection parameter of the Power Protection module 380 Parameter set parameters of the Power Protection module a r 381 States of the inputs of the Power Protection module a a 383 Signals of the Power Protection module states of the outputs 383 Commissioning Examples for the Power Protection Module 384 PF Protection MopuLE Power Factor ANSI 55
21. jeuy y WO 3uepuedepul 0 seuJooeq jndjno y peuidxe sieuneujl Seuooq senjeA Dojeuy jndino u y eujeu Hues Ag indui eu 0 pee s nhu e JI payes aq IIIA eureu puigdu 14 gO U PIM es nd eu U DIA es nd uunuuiuiuu eDejs owl senjeA enBojeue jo juenonm a lt Josey Y lt JU W JJU Jojunoo poeJoBBiu o65p3 gy IZ ZHI 19414 ssed pueg LHI x LHI awn uues y 1944 ssed pueg Je 0 0 JOS eq IM Nd no y snu ndui eui je Ou Aq s 1 eq IM eDejs euin u L OO S uuo5S q ndino eu 2 indino peyeben peJidxe s lt eweu gt euun 0 9 u JI eDejs eu suejs jndui o mee eu je bu V eDejs OWLL VIL OSO l HO 9AISn 2X3 JO kz LE EN MRA4 04 09 Page 18 IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS pudi l o g 10Jd wjejy euieu uueje eAnoejoo uueje jeeueB eAnoesjes eseud e o peg j m ed A 2IA p y uo Buipuedep gA A SI I einpoui e jo uueje eAnoe es eseud u e43 c uue v eueu uueje eAn29joo uueje je19u9D eAnos es eseud e o peaj j IM 9dA 9IA p y uo Buipuedep JA A 9I I jnpow e jo uueje eAnosjes eseud uoe3 c uue jv eueu uueje eAn29j o2 uueje jeyeueb eAnoejes eseud e o peaj j IM 9dA 9IA 9p y uo Hulpuedep FA A 9 I ejnpoui e jo uueje eAnoejes eseud yoeg uue v euieu uueje eAno9jo92 uueje je3eueD eAnos es eseud e oj peaj iM ed eoi ep ay uo Buipuedep gA A SI
22. r r s 248 Protection Module Input States a r aa aa tea pU EU ADS gue E o evs 250 Page 6 EN MRA4 04 09 Protection Module Signals Output States nnne nnn nni ns 250 FOU CHO Mod le VM CS JJ E 251 MobuLe TRIP CONTROL TRIPCoNTRoL U 252 Direct Commands of the Trip Control Module a a nennen 254 Global Protection Parameters of the Trip Control Module 254 Trip Control Module Input States a a aaa nsns n n senis 258 Trip Control Module Signals Outputs States a mener nnns nnns 259 Trip Control Module Sum of Tripping Currents nnne nnne nnne nnns 259 Trip Control Module A UIN 259 l Protection MopuLe Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 260 Device Planning Parameters of the Module nnne 277 Global Protection
23. Eri sjeuBis Buryoojq eAnoe ou pue pejeAnoeep jou si eDejs ruuey euigu sBuryoojg weibeiq OL Jajay esee d du aweu u l laxa eueu u L axa ExP Protection Module External Protection EN MRA4 04 09 Page 442 ExP Protection Module External Protection Device Planning Parameters of the Module External Protection Parameter Description Options Default Menu path Mode Mode do not use use Device planning use Global Protection Parameters of the Module External Protection CB if the state of the assigned signal is true Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path ExBlo1 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a ExP parameter set and if the state of the EXP 1 assigned signal is true ExBlo2 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a ExP parameter set and if the state of the EXP 1 assigned signal is true ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the Trip Command of the module Global Prot Para stage if blocking is ExP activated allowed within a parameter EXP 1 set and if the state of the assigned signal is true Alarm Assignment for 1 n Assignment List Protection Par
24. Module Modbus Modbus Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Physical Settings Digit 1 Number of bits Digit 2 E even parity O odd parity N no parity Digit 3 Number of stop bits More information on the parity It is possible that the last data bit is followed by a parity bit which is used for recognition of communication errors The parity bit ensures that with even parity EVEN always an even number of bits with valence 1 or with odd parity ODD an odd number of 1 valence bits are transmitted But it is also possible to transmit no parity bits here the setting is Parity None More information on the stop bits The end of a data byte is terminated by the stop bits Only available if Device planning RTU GET 801 8N1 8N2 8E1 Device Para Modbus t call If there is no request telegram sent from Scada to the device after expiry of this time the device concludes a communication failure within the Scada system 1 3600s 10s Device Para Modbus Scada CmdBlo Activating allowing Deactivating disallowing the blocking of the Scada Commands inactive active inactive Device Para Modbus EN MRA4 04 09 Page 207 Module Modbus Modbus Modbus Module Signals Output States Some signals that are for a short time active only have to be acknowledged N O TI CE separately e g Trip signals
25. h G eee Page 446 EN MRA4 04 09 CBF Supervision Module Circuit Breaker Failure Protection ANSI 50BF CBF Supervision Module Circuit Breaker Failure Protection ANSI 50BF CBF The CBF Protection is used to detect those tripping commands that had not been executed by the circuit breaker if defective for example If a trip command was not executed that means that the current does not fall below the set threshold approx zero within a specified time delay a CB failure has occurred this will be signaled by an alarm Via an output relay this alarm can be passed on to a primary CB e g by feeding to the bus bar The CB failure protection will start immediately after a tripping command was issued by the module Prot That means as soon as any of the protection modules has passed its trip decision on to the Prot master module the CBF will be started He I AA HT EN MRA4 04 09 Page 447 CBF Supervision Module Circuit Breaker Failure Protection ANSI 50BF lt Jgo euieu go dujr go go uejfeiq o 1343Y esee d v V wely Ago 0 1 S 490 yoweu sjeuBis Bulyoojg eAnoe ou pue pajeAnoeep jou si apes Z sBurnjoo g weibelq ol Jajay esee gd Buiuunr 4go ddd oweu EN MRA4 04 09 Page 448 CBF Supervision Module Circuit Breaker Failure Protection ANSI 50BF Device Planning Parameters of the CBF Module Paramet
26. 33 Current Measuring Inputs and Ground Current Measuring Input 35 vifu G T 37 Communication Interfaces a aa sisse sisei rase rase sr ase sese sas rei nares 38 Modbus RTU IEC 60870 5 103 via eminas aaa EAEE EEEE EEEn 38 Modous RIU Z IEC 608705 D via DSUB PUG saresti ieser Pe coss pines ASENA EERO NNA ENAT AO x921 1 9 oE HERR 41 Assignment olihe Zero Modem COIS u u uu ots uu EEEE EE EEEE EE E Er TEESE 42 CURRENT TRANSFORMERs C T U U sup RPC ERE u 43 Current Transformer Connection Examples a a r 43 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS U n U U 49 Check of the Voltage Measuring ValUeS cccccseccceseeceseccseeecceueeceeeeeceaeeseuseesaueccsseesseueessaeeesgeessueeesanesass 49 Wiring Examples of the Voltage Transformers a 50 CoNNECTION EXAMPLES VOLTAGE AND CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 56 NAVIGATION OPE
27. Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Latched Defines whether the _ inactive inactive Device Para LED will be ii LED acknowledged ds automatically if the LEDs group A event is gone or whether the LED is ILED 5 to be acknowledged by a signal manually Ack signal Acknowledgment 1 n Assignment List Device Para signal for the LED If ILED latching is set to active the LED can LEDs group A only be acknowledged if LED 5 those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back Only available if Latched active LED active color The LED lights up in green red Device Para this color if the state of the OR red LEDs assignment of the red flash LEDs group A ignals i l LL green flash LED 5 LED inactive color The LED lights up in green Device Para this color if the state of the OR red LEDs assignment of the red flash LEDs group A ignals i Sus green flash LED 5 Assignment 1 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 5 Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para of the assigned signal active LEDs LEDs group A LED 5 Assignment 2 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 5 Page 172 EN MRA4 04 09 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive inactive
28. id 19 VI gt l d 19 el q dmypld 3 l s gt PUY SOd 89 pejqeue euieu I I I I I I a gt fid 1o po1oejep eueu eueu Aejaq aseajay id 19 3dO xny SOd 89 Ae eg dmyild i d19 sjeuBis Bupjoojq aoe ou pue pejeAnoeep jou si eBejs ii N sBuyoolg uue1BeIqd o Jajay esee d C Ndo eujeu CLPU Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup EN MRA4 04 09 CLPU Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup Device planning parameters of the Cold Load Pickup module Parameter Description Options Default Menu path Mode Mode do not use use Device planning use Global protection parameter of the Cold Load Pickup module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Mode Mode CB POS CB POS Protection Para I lt Global Prot Para CB POS Or I lt CLPU CB POS And I lt ExBlo1 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a CLPU parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true ExBlo2 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated GioDal Prot Para allowed within a CLPU parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true Ex rev Interl External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module by external reverse interlocking
29. Name Description Assignment via ExBlo1 l Module input state External Protection Para DOC I Global Prot Para Prot ThR ExBlo2 Module input state External Protection Para DOOR Global Prot Para Prot ThR ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Protection Para Blocking of the Trip Command Global Prot Para Prot ThR Signals of the Thermal Overload Signals Output States Name Description active Signal active ExBlo Signal External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command Alarm Signal Alarm Thermal Overload Trip Signal Trip TripCmd Signal Trip Command Reset Theta Signal Resetting Thermal Replica EN MRA4 04 09 Page 319 ThR Protection Module Thermal Replica ANSI 49 Thermal Overload Module Values Value Description Menu path Theta Measured value Theta Operation Measured values ThR t Theta Measured value Operation calculated measured Remaining Massa qusa time until the thermal overload module will trip ThR Thermal Overload Module Statistics Value Description Menu path Theta max Theta maximum value Operation Statistics ThR Theta avg Theta average value Operation Statistics ThR Theta min Theta minimum value Operation Statistics ThR Page 320 EN MRA4 04 09 ThR Protection Module Thermal Replica ANSI 49 Commissioning Therma
30. pexoojq Jo pejeAnoeep jou pueuuuoo Bulddii 1 sBulyoolq du wesbeiq ol Jajay se d yo esed pI J sjeuBis Buryoojq eAnoe ou pue pejeAnoeep jou si eDejs c sBunjoo g ueJ6elq o 1343Y eseajd ul Ly eweu 1q 3a pue lt 4 10 13 3a pue gt J u V EN MRA4 04 09 EN MRA4 04 09 pexoo q Jo peyeanoeep jou pueuuuoo Burddu sBulyoojg du wepeq o 1343Y se qd np a HEN pese 40019 A I I I i eled pI8t4 i O asi WE usa sss 1 I SL s 0 I NPAPI pone RN apr T puuodu eureu I I ETA I l opp uone nojeo 3p p ZTA I M SH LA 0 apoyyeweu eujeu Bujuuejd ooed du euieu L1q 3a 1p jp du 1 uueu ra v Uuue v eueu L1q 3a 1p jp uuejv eureu sjeuBis Buryoojq eAnoe ou pue pejeArnoeep jou si eBejs AS sBulyoojg weibeig OL 19434 asea d u by oweu p p u L f Protection Module Frequency Protection ANSI 81O U Page 406 f Protection Module Frequency Protection ANSI 81O U Page 407 pexoojq JO payeatjoeap jou pueuuuoo Buiddu 1 sBuryoojq du ueJBeiq O 49J9 BSed d gt A Aq ojg aweu 9018 A LI eed PIO I O SSS SS I H SL wodi euieu eee dacnnd ana eae p ETA onelnoleo iud Yep Iud eyep I ZTA J S ss LIA Iud eyep epoyy eweu Vi du eujeu Buiuue
31. sBulyoojg wesbeiq OL 1943Y se q Iu i sOd eureu u iS Od Page 377 EN MRA4 04 09 PQS Power Protection Module ANSI 32 37 Q P P P Q Q Q P Q sr PE KSHSEII Page 378 EN MRA4 04 09 PQS Power Protection Module ANSI 32 37 Q Pr Q p Qr gt EN MRA4 04 09 Page 379 PQS Power Protection Module ANSI 32 37 Device planning parameters of the Power Protection module Parameter Description Options Default Menu path Mode Mode do not use Pr Device planning Global protection parameter of the Power Protection module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path ExBlo1 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a P Prot parameter set and if the state of the PQS 1 assigned signal is true ExBlo2 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a P Prot parameter set and if the state of the PQS 1 assigned signal is true ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the Trip Command of the module the stage if blocking is activated allowed within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true Global Prot P
32. IG 2 ExBlo TripCmd Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command IG 2 Ex rev Interl Module input state External reverse interlocking IG 2 AdaptSet1 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter1 IG 2 AdaptSet2 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter2 IG 2 AdaptSet3 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter3 IG 2 AdaptSet4 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter4 IG 3 active Signal active IG 3 ExBlo Signal External Blocking IG 3 Ex rev Interl Signal External reverse Interlocking IG 3 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked IG 3 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command IG 3 Alarm Signal Alarm IG IG 3 Trip Signal Trip IG 3 TripCmd Signal Trip Command IG 3 IGH2 Blo Signal blocked by an inrush IG 3 DefaultSet Signal Default Parameter Set IG 3 AdaptSet 1 Signal Adaptive Parameter 1 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 107 Assignment List Name Description IG 3 AdaptSet 2 Signal Adaptive Parameter 2 IG 3 AdaptSet 3 Signal Adaptive Parameter 3 IG 3 AdaptSet 4 Signal Adaptive Parameter 4 IG 3 ExBlo1 l Module input state External blocking1 IG 3 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 IG 3 ExBlo TripCmd Module input state Command External Blocking of the Trip IG 3 Ex rev Interl Module input state External reverse interlocking IG 3 AdaptSe
33. Open a parameter file or load the parameters from a device that should be converted e Make a backup of this file at a fail safe place e Choose Save as from menu File Enter a new file name in order to prevent overwriting the original file e Choose the new file type from drop down menu File Type e Confirm the security check by clicking on yes if and only you are sure that the file conversion should be executed e n tabular form the modifications will be shown as follows Added parameter Deleted parameter be Jr prx H Hao A cR n ai Page 228 EN MRA4 04 09 Field Parameters Field Para Field Parameters Within the field parameters you can set all parameters that are relevant for the primary side and the mains operational method like frequency primary and secondary values and the star point treatment the e n winding of the voltage transformers which is only taken into account in the direct measurement of the residual voltage EVT con measured open delta Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Phase Sequence Phase Sequence direction ABC ABC Field Para ACB f Nominal frequency 50Hz 50Hz Field Para 60Hz VT pri Nominal voltage of the 60 500000V 10000V Field Para Voltage Transformers at the primary side VT sec Nominal voltage of the 60 00 400 00V 100V Field Para Voltage Transformers at
34. Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Debouncing time 3 A change of the state of a digital input will only be no debouncing time 20 ms no debouncing time Device Para Digital Inputs recognized after the 50 ms DI Slot X6 debouncing time has expired become 100 ms Group 1 effective Thus wipers will not be misinterpreted Inverting 4 Inverting the input inactive inactive Device Para Signals active Digital Inputs DI Slot X6 Group 1 Debouncing time 4 A change of the state of a digital input will only be no debouncing time 20 ms no debouncing time Device Para Digital Inputs recognized after the 50 ms DI Slot X6 debouncing time has expired become 100 ms Group 1 effective Thus wipers will not be misinterpreted Inverting 5 Inverting the input inactive inactive Device Para signals active Digital Inputs DI Slot X6 Group 1 Debouncing time 5 A change of the state of a digital input will only be no debouncing time 20 ms no debouncing time Device Para Digital Inputs recognized after the 50 ms DI Slot X6 debouncing time has expired become 100 ms Group 1 effective Thus wipers will not be misinterpreted Inverting 6 Inverting the input inactive inactive Device Para signals E active Digital Inputs DI Slot X6 Group 1 Page 134 EN MRA4 04 09 Modul
35. Value Description Menu path f Measured value Frequency Operation Measured values Standard values VL12 Measured value Phase to phase Operation Vonage Measured values IStandard values VL23 Measured value Phase to phase Operation voltage Measured values Standard values VL31 Measured value Phase to phase Operation voitage Measured values Standard values VL1 Measured value Phase to neutral Operation volage Measured values IStandard values VL2 Measured value Phase to neutral Operation vonage Measured values IStandard values VL3 Measured value Phase to neutral Operation yag Measured values Standard values VE meas Measured value measured VE Operation ME Measured values Standard values VE calc Measured value calculated VE Operation Measured values Standard values VO Measured value calculated Operation oymmetrical components Zero Massa yade voltage IStandard values V1 Measured value calculated Operation Symmetrical components positive mnMeasured valies phase sequence voltage Standard values V2 Measured value calculated Operation oymmetrical components negative phase sequence voltage Measured values Standard values Page 82 EN MRA4 04 09 Measuring Values IL1 Measured value Phase current Operation Cin IMeasured values IStandard values IL2 Measured value Phase current Operation Quq menta Measured v
36. a nennen 348 Global Protection Parameters of the Inrush module nennen nennen 348 Setting Group Parameters of the Inrush Module sessssssssssssessseeeeeenen nennen nnn nnne nnns 349 rush Nioduile a eU ellc i s uu u u u PER 350 Inrush Module Signals Output States essssssseesssssesseseeeese nnne nenne nnne nsus iare senes nasse renis 350 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 7 Gol iii edi Lu EE RR 351 V PnoreEcrioN MopuLE VorracE Protection ANSI 27 59 352 Device Planning Parameters of the Voltage Protection Module 354 Global Protection Parameters of the Voltage Protection Module 354 Setting Group Parameters of the Voltage Protection Module 355 Voltage Protection Module Input States nnne nnn nn nnn nenas 359 Voltage Protection Module Signals Output States enne 359 Commissioning Overvoltage Protection ANSI 59 mnes 360 Commissioning Undervoltage Protection ANSI 27 cccccsccccssecees
37. ss sssi Page 452 EN MRA4 04 09 TCS Supervision Module Trip Circuit Supervision ANSI 74 TC TCS Supervision Module Trip Circuit Supervision ANSI 74TC TCS The trip circuit is monitored by evaluating the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker The CB trip circuits inclusive cable can be monitored by two non grouped digital inputs If a circuit is broken an alarm is issued With this protection module it is assumed that the CB is provided with auxiliary contacts CB open and CB closed allocated to the digital inputs In Slot 1 has 2 digital inputs each of which has a separate root contact N O TI C E separation for the trip circuit supervision In this case the trip circuit supply voltage serves also as supply voltage for the digital inputs and so the supply voltage failure of a trip circuit can be detected directly In order to identify a conductor failure in the trip circuit on the supply line or in the trip coil the off coil has to be looped in to the supervision circuit Via the two digital inputs the auxiliary contacts are checked continuously gt INPur 1 and Input 2 for identity both open or both closed If identity is identified the trip circuit is checked for a possible defect after a set time delay and if necessary the TCS ALarm is issued The time delay is to be set in a way that switching actions cannot cause false trips in this module He I A Yr s E
38. 1 x IN Amplitude error if gt 1 x IN lt 2x IN Amplitude error if 2 x IN Resolution Harmonics Frequency influence Temperature influence Page 500 up to 40 x In phase currents up to 25 x In Earth current standard up to 2 5 x In Earth current sensitive The precision does not depend on the nominal value but is referenced to 100 mA with In 21 A respectively 500 mA with In 5 A 50 Hz 60 Hz 1096 Class 0 5 0 596 of the rated value 0 5 of the measured value 1 0 of the measured value 0 01A up to 20 3rd harmonic 1 up to 20 5th harmonic 1 lt 2 Hz in the range of 5 Hz of the parameterized nominal frequency lt 1 within the range of 0 C up to 55 C EN MRA4 04 09 Tolerances Phase to earth and Residual Voltage Measurement Nominal voltage Vn Max measuring range Frequency range Precision Amplitude error for V Vn Amplitude error for V2 Vn Resolution Harmonics Frequency influence Temperature influence Nominal frequency Precision Voltage dependency EN MRA4 04 09 100 V 110 V 230 V 400 V parameterizable 2 x nominal value Vn 50 Hz or 60 Hz 10 Class 0 5 0 5 of the nominal value 0 5 of the nominal value 0 1V up to 20 3rd harmonic 1 up to 20 5th harmonic 1 lt 2 Hz in the range of 5 Hz of the parameterized nominal frequency lt 1 within the range of 0 C up to 55 C Frequency measurement
39. Assignment List Name Description CB Pos Indeterm Signal Circuit Breaker is in Indeterminate Position CB Pos Disturb Signal Circuit Breaker Disturbed Undefined Circuit Breaker Position The Position Indicators contradict themselves After expiring of a supervision timer the Position Indicators indicate that the circuit breaker is in the ON and OFF Position at the same time CB Acknow Sig l Module input state Acknowledgment Signal only for automatic acknowledgment Module input signal CB Aux ON Position indicator check back signal of the CB 52a CB Aux OFF I Module input state Position indicator check back signal of the CB 52b CB Manual ON I Module input state Circuit breaker was switched on manually CB Manual OFF I Module input state Circuit breaker was switched off manually CB Ready Module input state CB ready I 1 active Signal active I 1 ExBlo Signal External Blocking I 1 Ex rev Interl Signal External reverse Interlocking I 1 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked I 1 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command I 1 1H2 Blo Signal Blocking the trip command by an inrush I 1 Alarm L1 Signal Alarm L1 I 1 Alarm L2 Signal Alarm L2 I 1 Alarm L3 Signal Alarm L3 I 1 Alarm Signal Alarm I 1 Trip L1 Signal General Trip L1 I 1 Trip L2 Signal General Trip L2 I 1 Trip L3
40. Device Parameters TCP IP Settings Within menu Device Para TCP IP the TCP IP settings have to be set The first time setting of the TCP IP Parameters can be done at the panel HMI only ne a connection via TCP IP to the device is only possible if your quipped with an Ethernet Interface RJ45 Contact your IT administrator in order to establish the network connection Set the TCP IP Parameters Call up Device parameter TCP IP at the HMI panel and set the following parameters TCP IP address e Subnetmask e Gateway l EN MRA4 04 09 Page 475 Device Parameters Direct Commands of the System Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Ack LED All acknowledgeable inactive inactive Operation LEDs will be l acknowledged active Acknowledge Ack BO All acknowledgeable inactive inactive Operation iia ones active Acknowledge acknowledged Ack Scada SCADA will be inactive inactive Operation oso active Acknowledge Ack BO LED Scd Reset the binary inactive inactive Operation TCmd output relays LEDs l SCADA and the Trip active Acknowledge Command Reboot Rebooting the no no Service device yes General CAUTION rebooting the device manually will release the Supervision Contact rs r Ho eee Page 476 EN MRA4 04 09 Device Parameters Global Protection Parameters of the System Parameter Description S
41. Name Description DI 1 Signal Digital Input DI 2 Signal Digital Input DI 3 Signal Digital Input DI 4 Signal Digital Input DI 5 Signal Digital Input DI 6 Signal Digital Input DI 7 Signal Digital Input DI 8 Signal Digital Input Page 136 EN MRA4 04 09 Binary Output Relays Binary Output Relays BO Slot X2 BO Slot X5 The conditions of module outputs and signals protective functions such as reverse interlocking can be passed by means of alarm relays The alarm relays are potential free contacts which can be used as opening or closing contact Each alarm relay can be assigned up to 7 functions out of the assignment list Set the following parameters for each of the binary output relays e Up to 7 signals from the assignment list OR connected e Each of the assigned signals can be inverted e The collective state of the binary output relay can be inverted open or closed circuit current principle Latched active or inactive Latched inactive If the latching function is inactive the alarm relay respectively the alarm contact will adopt the state of those alarms that were assigned e Latched active If the latching function is active the state of the alarm relay respectively alarm contact that was set by the alarms will be stored The alarm relay can only be acknowledged after reset of those signals that had initiated setting of the relay and after expiry of the minimu
42. duj je3euoB e oj peaj jim npoui uonoejoJd pezuoujne duy eAnoe ue jo di uoe3 pudi eueu du eeueB e o peaj JIM ejnpouu uonoejoud pezuouine di4 sanoe ue Jo du uoe3 UlJe v ouleu uueje eAng29ejpoo uueje jeJeueB e oj pes JIM 49D Buipnjoui ing s jnpow uoisiajedns wou 1de2xo ejnpouu e jo uueje uoe3 wely SLA SLA weibeiq ol Jajay esedid go durgo ueJBeiq o 1943Y esee gd uonoeuJip pejoefoud ul 3jne 4 aweu yne Yes Uoisioep uonoeiJip ueJBerq o JaJay esee d uonoeJip pejoefoud ul jjne 4 aweu ju9JJn2J9A0 eseud UOISI9 p uol 5 uip ueJBerg OL JaJay asea q S oig cHI ZHI ulejBeiq o sajay asea d 190I8 HI ZHI uleJBeiq o sajay asea d Olg CHI ZHI uleJBeiq OL 1949H asea d L1 0Ig ZHI ZHI ueJBeiq o 1343Y asea d aoe s weu SBUIyoojg webeq oL 1842Y esee d pwdu ojg aweu sBurjoo q du wesbeiq ol 1343Y se q 9Aljoe euieu sbulyoojg wesbeig o Jajay asea d 9 q8 IBA 10J ueJBeiq o 1849Y asedid 1qel Mta jeubls 1ndu euBis yndjno Page 19 EN MRA4 04 09 IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS qunjsi sod go JeBeue N gogo wepeq o 1343Y se d uuejepu soq gO JeBeue yN go go weibeig ol 1343Y se q J40 Sod gO JoBeue N gO go wejbeig o Jajay esee d NO SOoqd HO JeBeue N gO go wejbeig o Jajay esee d Soq go JeBeue N gO go wejbeig o Jajay esee d EN MRA4 04 09 Page 20 Device Device
43. 50 Hz 60 Hz 0 05 of fn within the range of 40 70 Hz frequency acquisition of 5 V 800 V Page 501 Tolerances Protection Stages Tolerances Note The tripping delay relates to the time between alarm and trip The tolerance of the operating time relates to the time between the measured value has exceeded the threshold until the protection stage is alarmed Overcurrent protection stages I x Tolerance MTA 2 at I gt 0 1 x In und V 0 1 x Vn I 11 596 of the setting value resp 1 In resetting ratio 97 or 0 596 x In t DEFT 1 resp 10 ms Operating time Starting from higher than 1 1 x I non directional lt 35ms directional lt 35ms Release time directional and non directional lt 45ms t char 5 IEC NINV IEC VINV IEC LINV IEC EINV ANSI MINV ANSI ANSI VINV ANSI EINV Therm Flat IT I2T 14T t reset 1 resp 10 ms Only available if Characteristic INV Page 502 EN MRA4 04 09 Tolerances Earth current stages IG x Tolerance IG MTA 3 approx close to the star point treatment Star point treatment 5 at IG sin phi gt 20 sin 90 In and VE gt 10 V Star point treatment 5 at IG cos phi gt 20 cos 180 In and VE gt 10 V Star point treatment 5 of the setting value at IE gt 1 0 In SOLI RESI and VE gt 5 Vn IG 1 5 of the setting value resp 196 In resetti
44. Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 Automatic Reclosure Module Values Value Description Default Size Menu path AR Shot No Counter Auto 0 0 6 Operation DEGIOSUTSUSME DES Count and RevData AR Total number Cr Total number of all O 0 65536 Operation executed Automatic Reclosures Attempts Count and RevData AR Cr successfl Total number of 0 0 65536 Operation successfully executed Automatic Count and RevData Reclosures AR Cr failed Total number of 0 0 65536 Operation unsuccessfully executed automatic Count and RevData reclosure attempts AR AR Cr Alarm Remaining numbers 1000 0 1000 Operation of ARs until Maintenance Alarm Count and RevData AR AR Cr Block Remaining numbers 65536 0 65536 Operation of ARs until Maintenanca Count and RevData Blocking AR EN MRA4 04 09 Page 431 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 Setting Group Parameters of the Start Functions and Fast Trip of the Module Automatic Reclosure Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path 1 Startfct Assignment Start fct Protection Para lt n gt AR Start FT 1 FT Fast Trip inactive inactive Protection Para Only available if a ace Pune start function was AR designed Start FT 1 n FT Fast Trip after AR 0 6 0 Protection Para attempt number jens Only available ifa AR er id Start FT 1 t FT Trip delay
45. Disturb rec Start 7 Start recording if the 1 n Assignment List Device Para assigned signal is true Recorders Disturb rec EN MRA4 04 09 Page 189 Module Disturbance Recorder the record Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Start 8 Start recording if the 1 n Assignment List Device Para assigned signal is fue Recorders Disturb rec Auto overwriting If there is no more inactive active Device Para TECH HOD active Recorders capacity left the oldest file will be Disturb rec overwritten Follow up time Follow up time 0 50 20 Device Para Recorders Disturb rec Pre trigger time Pre trigger time 0 5096 20 Device Para Recorders Disturb rec Max file size Maximum duration of 0 1 10 0s 2s Device Para Recorders Disturb rec Page 190 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Disturbance Recorder Disturbance Recorder Module Input States Name Description Assignment via Start1 l State of the module input Trigger Device Para event start recording if Recorders Disturb rec Start2 State of the module input Trigger Device Para event start recording if Recorders Disturb rec Start3 State of the module input Trigger Device Para event start recording if Recorders Disturb rec Start4 State of the module input Trigger Device Para event start
46. In order to read out a failure record call up the main menu call up the submenu Operation Recorders Fault rec select a fault record analyze the corresponding measured values Read Out the Fault Recorder via Smart View In case Smart view is not running please start it If device data has not been loaded yet click Receive Data From The Device in menu Device Double click the Operation icon in the navigation tree Double click the Fault Rec icon within the tree Operation Recorders In the window the fault recordings are shown in tabular form In order to receive more detailed information on a fault click the Plus Sign in front of the fault number prx I Page 194 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Fault Recorder Via the print menu you can export the data into a file Please proceed N O TI CE as loge i P Call up the data as described above Call up the menu File Print Choose Print Actual Working Window within the popup Press the gt Print lt button Press the gt Export to File lt button Enter a file name Choose a location where to save the file Confirm the Save button asss I AA ma EN MRA4 04 09 Page 195 Module Fault Recorder Direct Commands of the Fault Recorder Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Reset all rec Reset all records inactive inactive Operation
47. LED2 2 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 2 LED2 3 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 2 Page 178 EN MRA4 04 09 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs Name Description Assignment via LED2 4 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 2 LED2 5 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 2 Acknow Sig 2 Module input state Acknowledgment Signal only for automatic acknowledgment Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 2 LED3 1 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 3 LED3 2 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 3 LED3 3 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 3 LED3 4 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 3 LED3 5 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 3 Acknow Sig 3 Module input state Acknowledgment Signal only for automatic acknowledgment Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 3 LEDA 1 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 4 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 179 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs Name Description Assignment via LED4 2 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LE
48. Signal Module is blocked by undervoltage f 3 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked f 3 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command f 3 Alarm f Signal Alarm Frequency Protection f 3 Alarm df dt DF DT Alarm instantaneous or average value of the rate of frequency change f 3 Alarm delta phi Signal Alarm Vector Surge f 3 Alarm Signal Alarm Frequency Protection collective signal f 3 Trip f Signal Frequency has exceeded the limit f 3 Trip df dt DF DT Signal Trip df dt or DF DT f 3 Trip delta phi Signal Trip delta phi f 3 Trip Signal Trip Frequency Protection collective signal f 3 TripCmd Signal Trip Command f 3 ExBlo1 1 Module input state External blocking1 f 3 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 f 3 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command f 4 active Signal active f 4 ExBlo Signal External Blocking f 4 Blo by V lt Signal Module is blocked by undervoltage f 4 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked f 4 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command f 4 Alarm f Signal Alarm Frequency Protection 4 Alarm df dt DF DT Alarm instantaneous or average value of the rate of frequency change f 4 Alarm delta phi Signal Alarm Vector Surge f 4 Alarm Signal Alarm Fre
49. The circuit breaker was switched on manually if the state of the assigned signal is true DI Slot X1 DI 1 DI Slot X1 DI 2 DI Slot X1 DI 3 DI Slot X1 DI 4 DI Slot X1 DI 5 DI Slot X1 DI 6 DI Slot X1 DI 7 DI Slot X1 DI 8 DI Slot X6 DI 1 DI Slot X6 DI 2 DI Slot X6 DI 3 DI Slot X6 DI 4 DI Slot X6 DI 5 DI Slot X6 DI 6 DI Slot X6 DI 7 DI Slot X6 DI 8 Protection Para Global Prot Para CB CB Manager Page 256 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Trip Control TripControl Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Manual OFF The circuit breaker was switched off manually if the state of the assigned signal is true DI Slot X1 DI 1 DI Slot X1 DI 2 DI Slot X1 DI 3 DI Slot X1 DI 4 DI Slot X1 DI 5 DI Slot X1 DI 6 DI Slot X1 DI 7 DI Slot X1 DI 8 DI Slot X6 DI 1 DI Slot X6 DI 2 DI Slot X6 DI 3 DI Slot X6 DI 4 DI Slot X6 DI 5 DI Slot X6 DI 6 DI Slot X6 DI 7 DI Slot X6 DI 8 Protection Para Global Prot Para CB CB Manager Ready Circuit breaker is ready for operation if the state of the assigned signal is true DI Slot X1 DI 1 DI Slot X1 DI 2 DI Slot X1 DI 3 DI Slot X1 DI 4 DI Slot X1 DI 5 DI Slot X1 DI 6 DI Slot X1 DI 7 DI Slot X1 DI 8 DI Slot X6 DI 1 DI Slot X6 DI 2 DI Slot X6 DI 3 DI Slot X6 DI 4 DI Slot X6 DI 5 DI Slot X6 DI 6 DI Slot X6 DI 7 DI Slot X6 DI 8 Protection Para Global Pr
50. assignment list OR Logic The fault recorder can register up to 20 faults The last of the recorded faults is stored in a fail safe manner If one of the assigned trigger events becomes true the fault recorder will be started Each fault is saved inclusive module and name fault number mains fault number and record number at that time one of the trigger events becomes true To each of the faults the measuring values at the time when the trigger event became true can be viewed Up to 8 signals to trigger the fault recorder can be selected from the assignment list The trigger events are OR linked The parameter Auto Delete defines how the device shall react if there is no saving place available In case Auto Delete is active the first recorded fault will be overwritten according to the FIFO principle If the parameter is set to inactive recording of the fault events will be stopped until the storage location is released manually Start 1 Trigger Start 2 Trigger Start 3 Trigger Start 4 Trigger Recording Start 5 Trigger Start 6 Trigger Start 7 Trigger Start 8 Trigger Man Trigger Hem I A A H Pe EN MRA4 04 09 Page 193 Module Fault Recorder Read Out the Fault Recorder The measured values at the time of tripping are saved failure safe within the fault recorder If there is no more memory free the oldest record will be overwritten FIFO
51. e norder to establish a temporary blockage of a protection module the parameter ExBlo Fc of the module has to be set to active This gives the permission This module can be blocked e Within the general protection parameters a signal has to be additionally chosen from the assiGNMENT List The blocking only becomes active when the assigned signal is active prx o eee Page 234 EN MRA4 04 09 Blockings To block the tripping command of a protection stage temporarily by an active assignment The tripping command of any of the protection modules can be blocked from external In this case external does not only mean from outside the device but also from outside the module Not only real external signals are permitted to be used as blocking signals as for example the state of a digital input but you can also choose any other signal from the assignment list e norder to establish a temporary blockage of a protection stage the parameter ExBlo TripCmd Fc of the module has to be set to active This gives the permission The tripping command of this stage can be blocked e Within the general protection parameters a signal has to be chosen additionally and assigned to the parameter ExBlo from the assignment list If the selected signal is activated the temporary blockage becomes effective He I A A ae EN MRA4 04 09 Page
52. e Check once more the measuring value of the asymmetrical current I2 in menu Measuring Values The measuring value of the asymmetrical current 2 should be again 33 e Re connect phase L2 but disconnect phase L3 e Check again the measuring value of asymmetrical current 2 in menu Measuring Values The measuring value of the asymmetrical current 2 should still be 33 Testing the threshold values For testing the threshold value a current has to be fed to phase 1 which is three times lower than the adjusted threshold value of 2 Now the current in phase 1 is to be reduced until the relay is activated Heu I A rl EN MRA4 04 09 Page 329 1272 Protection Module Unbalanced Load Protection ANSI 46 Testing the trip delay Impress a symmetrical three phase current system nominal currents Switch off IL1 the threshold value for 2 must be below 33 Measure the tripping time The present asymmetrical load 2 corresponds with 1 3 of the existing phase current displayed Testing the fallback ratio The fallback ratio must not be higher than 0 95 times the threshold value Successful test result The measured trip delays threshold values and fallback ratios are within the permitted deviations tolerances specified under Technical Data prx s Page 330 EN MRA4 04 09 SOTF Protection Module Switch Onto Fault SOTF Protection M
53. e Confirm the chosen storing location by clicking Save e The changed parameter data is now saved in the data file chosen by you Thereafter the changed data is transferred to the device and adopted NOTICE Page 224 Once you have entered the parameter setting password Smart view wont ask you again for the password for at least 10 minutes This time interval will start again each time parameters are transmitted into the device If for more than 10 minutes no parameters are transmitted into the device Smart view will ask you again for the password when you are trying to transmit parameters into the device EN MRA4 04 09 Parameters Protection Parameters It has to be taken into account that by deactivating for instance protective functions you also change the functionality of the device The manufacturer does not accept liability for any personal or material damage as a result of wrong planning A planning parameter setting service is also offered by Woodward SEG The protection parameters include the following protection parameter trees Global Protection Parameters gt Global Prot Para lt Here you can find all protection parameters that are universally valid that means that they are valid independent of the protection parameter sets Setting Group Parameters Set1 4 The protection parameters that you set within a parameter set are only valid if the parameter set where you set them is switc
54. e Double click the Disturb rec Icon e In the window the disturbance records are shown in tabular form e A popup will be appear by a double click onto a disturbance record Choose a folder where the disturbance record is to be saved to e You can analyze the disturbance records by means of the optionally available Data Visualizer by clicking on Yes when you are asked Shall the received disturbance record be opened by the Data Visualizer pem I A A Mns EN MRA4 04 09 Page 187 Module Disturbance Recorder Deleting Disturbance Records Within the Menu Operation Disturb rec you can Delete Disturbance Records Choose via gt SOFTKEY lt up and SOFTKEY down the disturbance record that is to be deleted Call up the detailed view of the disturbance record via gt SOFTKEY lt right Confirm by pressing gt SOFTKEY lt delete Enter your password followed by pressing the key gt OK lt Choose whether only the current of whether all disturbance records should be deleted Confirm by pressing gt SOFTKEY lt gt OK lt Deleting Disturbance Records via Smart view e In case Smart view is not running please start it e f device data has not been loaded yet click Receive Data From The Device in menu Device e Double click the Operation icon in the navigation tree e Double click the Recorders icon in the navigation tree e Doub
55. 212 7 837 197 E 7 76 182 in 747 g E a i x x i o i 4x 4 6 x x EX x 124 160 173 i 4 88 630 6 81 Frontplatte Frontplate mans B2 Housing Door Cut out A WARNING The housing must be carefully earthed Connect a ground cable 4 to 6 mm AWG 12 10 1 7 Nm 15 Ib in to the housing using the screw which is marked with the ground symbol at the rear side of the device The power supply card needs a separate ground connection 2 5 mm AWG 14 at terminal X1 0 55 Nm 4 9 Ib in Be careful Do not overtighten the mountings nuts of the relay M4 metric 4 mm Check the torque by means of a torque wrench 1 7 Nm 15 Ib in Overtightening the mounting nuts could due to personal injury or damage the relay prx H n iua G xi Page 24 EN MRA4 04 09 Installation and Connection Assembly Groups In line with the customer s requirement the devices are combined in a modular way in compliance with the order code In each of the slots an assembly group may be integrated In the following the terminal assignment of the individual assembly groups are shown The exact installation place of the individual modules can be learned from the connection diagram fixed at the top of your device Middle Housing B2 for the following device MRA4 Housing B2 slot1 slot2 slot3 slot4 slot5 slot6 A WAR
56. 213 IEC60870 5 103 Module Values nnnm nnne nnns si nna arn s arr s a nna sna asse ns 214 PARAMETERS u eec mE D nmi IMEEM MITES EIE MEM ESPERE 215 Parameter Pe TNE Sees ists sinner seen sane os acest ace eid naga meen meiosis gd peer 215 Sy Cee ret c NIE A te elena 215 gis l pp O EE EE Rea 215 tes le au Ki E E EEE EET EE E E ETET E E E E 215 De redeo Pam su uu EE r aces ereeestanes 216 Diesel Ge nitet RENTRER 216 S s Ont ONC WAI NN E sss sess 216 S e TITO S NER E RI SI aro I q Ss E c NR EIER 21 Operational Modes access authorization rr a rrrrrrrrasrssssssssssssssssssssaaa 220 OPH aD t lu 220 Operation Mode Parameter Setting and Planning iis 220 o UO C0 e 221 o hhg Au ENTRE sa eaaankte aes cuena tensa E senate 22 PISS NI op u RE 22 POS SON TONG CNS MNT uuu u EE T TREES 22 Changing of Parameters Example a nnn nnne nnne nn nina rase raa nnns 222 Changing of Parameters when using the Smart View Example 223 Protection Parameters l Ul u eas Rus aa aud LEER gal aikana mM VEMM HU AME ERU RM C aaia aana 225 Setn Ce 6h a TP E
57. AR General settings t start Start timer While 0 1 10 00s 1s Protection Para the start timer runs jeu down an AR attempt can be started Only AR if the trip command is given within the General settings start time duration an AR attempt could be started The location and the resistance of the fault have a big influence on the tripping time The start time has an impact on whether an AR attempt should be started when the fault is far away or high resistance EN MRA4 04 09 Page 425 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path t DP1 Dead time between 0 1 200 00s 1s Protection Para trip and reclosure ins attempt for phase faults AR General settings t DP2 Dead time between 0 1 200 00s 1s Protection Para trip and reclosure yen attempt for phase faults AR General settings t DP3 Dead time between 0 1 200 00s 1s Protection Para trip and reclosure jun attempt for phase faults AR General settings t DP4 Dead time between 0 1 200 00s 1s Protection Para trip and reclosure oe attempt for phase i faults AR General settings t DP5 Dead time between 0 1 200 00s 1s Protection Para trip and reclosure fens attempt for phase i faults AR General settings t DP6 Dead time between 0 1 200 00s 1s Protection Para trip and reclosure oe attempt for phase faults AR Gener
58. Acknowledgment Acknowledgment 1 n Assignment List Device Para oignal An Bi Output acknowledgment Mal bos a signal that BO Slot X2 acknowledges the corresponding binary BO 4 output relay can be assigned to each output relay The acknowledgment signal is only effective if the parameter Latched is set to active Only available if Latched active Inverting Inverting of the inactive inactive Device Para Bia O se y active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 Assignment 1 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para Bir assigned active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 Assignment 2 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para hs a Perge active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 147 Binary Output Relays Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Assignment 3 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para x i n active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 Assignment 4 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive inact
59. EN MRA4 04 09 Page 265 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 IEC EINV Notice Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and instantaneous Reset Trip t v t char s t P t char s 1x10 100 10 t s t char 0 1 1 5 1 0 ae 0 05 et 0 2 0 01 0 1 l 10 100 x gt multiples of pickup gp sxs 8e a x sGsa3 Wm U i ia lt a rw sss Page 266 EN MRA4 04 09 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 ANSI MINV Notice A Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and instantaneous Reset Trip t Ftcohar s 90t 4 0 1140 t char s gt 1 1 1x10 100 15 tis HH t char 10 T 5 2 l mm 0 5 0 1 0 01 0 1 l 10 100 x gt multiples of pickup EN MRA4 04 09 Page 267 I Protection Module Overcu
60. Farse is signaled the AR module changes into the gt AR r SuPERv lt state and the supervision timer is started The supervision time is to prevent that the AR will be started by a protection function on a faulty line after a manual CB Switch ON command While the supervision time r is running down no auto reclosure attempt can be started AR ready After expiration of the supervision time the AR module is ready to switch on the CB after a trip by an AR authorized protection module Starting the AR An alarm or trip of an AR authorized protection stage up to 6 start functions sets the AR module in the AR RUNNING State At the same time the start time r is started An reclosure attempt will only be started if the trip command of the AR authorized protection function is given within the set start time duration The location and the resistance of the fault have an direct impact on the tripping delay Inverse characteristics Via the start time you have a influence on whether far remote and high resistance failures should start only inverse characteristics a reclosure attempt or not emp Hl Page 416 EN MRA4 04 09 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 starting the dead time If the Off command is given out to the CB and the device can clearly detect within the start time the OFF position of the CB that means CB Pos Ow false and CB Pos Orr 7 true then the dead time r
61. Microsoft Office 2003 or higher asss I A A o n Paper EN MRA4 04 09 Page 79 Smart View Offline Device Planning via Smart view In order to be able to transmit a parameter file e g offline created into the N o TI CE device the following issues must comply Type Code written on the top of the device type label and Version of the device model can be found in menu Device Parameters Version The Smart view software enables also to parameterize offline The advantage is By using device models you can do planning jobs for a device and set parameters in advance You can also read the parameter file out of the device further process it offline e g from your office and finally re transfer it to the device You can either load an existing parameter file from a device please refer to chapter Loading device data when using Smart view create a new parameter file see below open a locally saved parameter file backup In order to create a new device parameter file by way of a device template offline In order to create a new offline parameter file please choose within the file menu create new parameter file A working window pops up Please make sure that you select the right device type with the correct version and configuration Finally click on Apply In order to save the device configuration select gt Save lt out of
62. Reset Wqr Reset Cr Wqr Reset Counter inactive inactive Operation active Reset Wq Reset Cr Waq Reset Counter inactive inactive Operation active Reset Res all Energy Cr Reset of all Energy inactive inactive Operation Counters active Reset EN MRA4 04 09 Page 85 Energy Counter Signals of the Energy Counter Module States of the Outputs Name Description Cr Overflow Wp Signal Counter Overflow Wp Cr Overflow Wp Signal Counter Overflow Wp Cr Overflow Wqt Signal Counter Overflow Wq Cr Overflow Wq Signal Counter Overflow Wq Wp Reset Cr Signal Wp Reset Counter Wp Reset Cr Signal Wp Reset Counter Wqr Reset Cr Signal Wq Reset Counter Wq Reset Cr Signal Wq Reset Counter Res all Energy Cr Signal Reset of all Energy Counters prac sS sssi Page 86 EN MRA4 04 09 Statistics Statistics otatistics In menu Operation Statistics the min max and mean values of the measured and calculated measured quantities can be found The statistics are ordered by Standard values and special values depending on the type of device and the device planning In menu Device Parameter Statistics you can either set a fixed synchronization time and a calculation interval or start and stop the statistics via a function e g digital input Read out Statistics e Call up the main menu e Call up the subme
63. The acknowledgment signal is only effective if the parameter Latched is set to active Only available if Latched active Inverting Inverting of the inactive inactive Device Para SIQUIS active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 151 Binary Output Relays Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Assignment 1 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para x i n active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 Assignment 2 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para ls oe active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 Assignment 3 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para 7 mu c He active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 Assignment 4 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para E h E USES active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 Assignment 5 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para 2 b cn active Bin
64. by the Communication System Name Description Transmission Signal SCADA active Scada Cmd 1 Scada Command Scada Cmd 2 Scada Command Scada Cmd 3 Scada Command Scada Cmd 4 Scada Command Scada Cmd 5 Scada Command Scada Cmd 6 Scada Command Scada Cmd 7 Scada Command Scada Cmd 8 Scada Command Scada Cmd 9 Scada Command Scada Cmd 10 Scada Command Scada Cmd 11 Scada Command Scada Cmd 12 Scada Command Scada Cmd 13 Scada Command Scada Cmd 14 Scada Command Scada Cmd 15 Scada Command Scada Cmd 16 Scada Command Egg c srAasss Page 208 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Modbus Modbus Modbus Module Values Value Description Default Size Menu path NoOfRequests Total Total number of requests Includes 0 0 9999999999 Operation requests for other slaves ICount and RevData IModbus NoOfRequestsForMe Total Number of requests for this slave 0 0 9999999999 Operation Count and RevData IModbus NoOfRespons Total number of requests 0 0 9999999999 Operation Count and RevData Only available if Device planning TCP Modbus NoOfResponsTimeOverr Total number of requests with exceeded 0 0 9999999999 Operation uns response time Physically corrupted ICount and RevData Frame IModbus Only available if Device planning RTU NoOfOverrunErros Total Number of Overrun Failures 0 0 9999999999 Operation Physically corrupted Fr
65. n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 3 Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para M s r active LEDs LEDs group A LED 3 Assignment 4 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 3 Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para B geste active LEDs LEDs group A LED 3 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 169 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Assignment 5 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 3 Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para of the assigned signal active LEDs LEDs group A LED 3 Latched Defines whether the inactive inactive Device Para LED will be l acknowledged active LEDs automatically if the LEDs group A event is gone or whether the LED is ILED 4 to be acknowledged by a signal manually Ack signal Acknowledgment 1 n Assignment List Device Para signal for the LED If latching is set to LEDs active the LED can LEDs group A only be acknowledged if LED 4 those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back Only available if Latched active LED active color The LED lights up in green red Device Para S CE ij the state d LEDs assignment of the red flash LEDs group A ignals i l su green flash LED 4 LED inactive color The LED lights up in g
66. parameterised AR attempts achieved ou Nledng r Hv pulo NO 89 HV pe p y yy Buluuns yy AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 EN MRA4 04 09 EN MRA4 04 09 pe er dv nisseoons dy e Oo Buluun uv pwd NO 89 HV peep rsv du ill yels uuv Ill lt Nledng4 gt Aledns Y HY pees uv NO Xnv uv 3dO xnv uv Oro rO eg O 0 0 0 o o0o 82 du1 g5 NO lenue y Buiuuni si sow Buryoojq uoisiajedns JIUA gd ey uo Burgos jenuew Jaye Yy eu JO u8 S ON AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 Page 420 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 pales dv njsseoons yy Buiuunr yv x Ye pesp Hv du p Ji e s gu Y lt Madng gt Aledns d Hv Apeay yy NO Xny uv 3dO Xnv uv ous 1s eunso oes ony njsseoong o s e Or OF rT Oro TO rO 0 0 0 O Page 421 EN MRA4 04 09 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 pees YY nISseoons yy Buluun sv 0 L 7 0 dui i lt Je s gt yels4 T7 o0 P P we Hl 0 L 0 L 0 L 0 L N lt Nedng4 gt lt Niedng4 AlednS YY Vf pees sv V y vos W y y 440 xnvuv hJsseoonsun pesojo98J ojne 99IM EN MRA4 04 09 Page 422 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 Direct
67. u jueuiuBisse ou Jsr1 jueuiuBissy uL k lu uuuBisse ou lt ulgu gt Symbols sr1 1u uuuBissv uy lt oWeu gt O noe SAI eut peuoie T go ET bu seujooeq jeuBbis jndjno Buipuods uo5 y u HUI y speeoxe jeubis enBojeue au j uoisuieduioo 9t Jo 3jnsoJ e se senjeA Ayeulq jueJeyip eoeJuy Ose sen eA 3ndjno yw 39s OU YIM senjeA enBojeue seJedujo senj eA jndui enBojeue 14 YM Buuojuoui enjeA jur no uoAIb 9q IIIA JeuBis 9Anoe ue nNUJ9 o Jes SI JojeuJeJed eu j Jeynuepr eujeus ndu eu 0 peubisse eq IIIA JSII eu WO 3ndjno u uy senjeA jeloeds UA ndul npol e Jo 19jeureJed p 59 s eq UBD enj eA peuyep 1d e JO SI y WO jndjno jeubis u uy uwogqdoiugnsriuonosjes e UM ndu npoN Jo J9jeueJeg eJnjnj eu ui pesi eaJ eq oj seunjeeyjuondo XOq Ae4D suonounj xe duJoo uj sjueulo 3 0 OAnoeul SI nd no eu pue nn si z jndjno OU SAL 0 JOS SI 0 3A Ye 3 olg l O A enjeA Bumes eu Jl eAnoeuli si z nd jno 1e du apuou D pue oAnoe sl nd no y 9Anoeul 0 8S SI 0 3A Je 20 g 9 9njeA Bumes eu j uonduosep jeuonounJ 9Anoe Al 9EUI Sen EBA paJnseel N V1 UJ jul eureus oDesseui EuJ9jul DAJ JIp 104d euis weu NN Bunusd ooyeq lt eweu gt enjeA Buas Page 17 EN MRA4 04 09 IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS I Joyesedwoo senjeA enBojeu lJeuBis 3ndui
68. ulJe v euieu a uue v euieu s ji cN CN gt c1 uuJe v euleu VP amp q wey aweu O euleu Ig ZHI u L weu EN MRA4 04 09 Page 276 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 Device Planning Parameters of the Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu path Mode Mode do not use non directional forward reverse non directional Device planning Global Protection Parameters of the Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path ExBlo1 External blocking of the module if blocking is activated allowed within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true 1 n Assignment List Protection Para Global Prot Para Prot I 1 ExBlo2 External blocking of the module if blocking is activated allowed within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true 1 n Assignment List Protection Para Global Prot Para Prot ALA ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module the stage if blocking is activated allowed within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true 1 n Assignment List Protection Para Global Prot Para Prot ALA Ex rev Interl External blocking of the module by external reverse interlo
69. will be started Dead time AR t dead The AR module waits for the dead time to finish When this time has elapsed it is checked if the CB is still in OFF position and if the CB is ready for reclosing e g Function CB ready Additionally it is checked whether another trip exists and if the synchronization signal is active option before the reclosing command is actually issued If the result of the check is negative this puts the AR in the An r SuPERv state the AR is being blocked for this time For phase and earth faults or for a start from external trips individual dead times can be parameterized When trips are caused by phase fault or external trips via digital inputs the dead time t DPn is always used the letter n stands for the number of the present AR shot When trips are caused by faults in the grounding system the dead time t DEn is always used the letter n stands for the number of the present AR shot Dead time is expired issuing the CB on command If the dead time has expired the CB on command is issued to the circuit breaker if No active blocking The circuit breaker is ready for operation There is no pending trip command of an AR authorized protection function The CB is clearly in the OFF position that means CB Pos Ow false and CB Pos Orr true If a synchronous check is parameterized the device must recognize the Sync Signal during t sync is running If all the pre
70. 1 The Status Display of the device shows the signal CLPU I lt 1 Testing the tripping delay and the resetting ratio Switch the circuit breaker manually ON and start the timer simultaneously After the the t Release Delay timer has expired the signal CPLU EFFEcrivE 0 has to become untrue Write down the measured time Switch OFF the Circuit Breaker manually and start the timer simultaneously After the t Pickup Delay timer has expired the signal CPLU Errective 1 has to become true Write down the measured time msc Uro s EN MRA4 04 09 Page 345 CLPU Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup Successful test result The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays threshold values and fallback ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list Permissible deviations tolerances can be found under Tech nical Data prx A Pam sss Page 346 EN MRA4 04 09 IH2 Module Inrush IH2 Module Inrush IH2 The inrush module can prevent false trips caused by switching actions of saturated inductive loads The ratio of the 2 harmonic to the 1 harmonic is taken into account IH2 Blo L1 IH2 Blo L2 IH2 Blo IG IH2 3 ph Blo IH2 Blo L3 7 o o E x E amp D 2 i Inrush IH2 IH1 IGH2 GH1 Mu m Please Refer To Diagram Blockings Inrush active IH2 p
71. 1 n Assignment List Protection Para Global Prot Para f Prot If 1 Page 408 EN MRA4 04 09 f Protection Module Frequency Protection ANSI 810 U Setting Group Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module underfrequency Only available if Device planning f Mode f lt Or f lt and df dt Or f and DF DT Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Function Permanent activation or inactive f 1 active Protection Para deactivation of module stage acie f 2 active jon f 3 inactive f Prot f 4 inactive If 1 f 5 inactive f 6 inactive ExBlo Fc Activate allow or inactivate inactive inactive Protection Para disallow blocking of the ii jane module stage This nds i parameter is only effective if f Prot a signal is assigned to the f corresponding global Ll protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo Fc active Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the inactive inactive Protection Para Trip Command of the ii june module stage SIME f Prot ATA ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate allow or inactivate inactive inactive Protection Para disallow blocking of the t je module stage This pipe parameter is only effective if f Prot a signal is assigned to the Ifl corresponding global Ll protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked tha
72. 1104d uue v 1oud eouenbes eseuq j04d UOonoejep uomoeiJlp eJnjiej eseud zold EN MRA4 04 09 Page 274 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 ejaissod jou SSOd U JIP 10Jgd eAjoe aanoeul O A 1e dul Jpuou aweu pJeMJol IPuono uip uou epo N euieu Duiuuejd eoi eq os1e oJ 91 JIp Old pueAuoi PM JIp 104d 6 7 uono ulp pejoefoud ui ne oweu u iL euieu jueuno1eA0 eseud uoisioep uono uip Page 275 EN MRA4 04 09 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 pexooiq Jo peyenoeep jou puewwos Burddu sBunjoo q du wesbeiq oL 1343Y esee d Ke eee Kb Jr sa cemere er n aa xwu x a 1 e l l eoi ep au Aq pejejnojeo eq I Sepouu jesaJ pue sew Buddi S I I I sjoyouleJed eAoqe uo p seg l SV pl ee f gll pwdu tueu O 4 mart eee eil I a 0 Y NEN O LSU ANI L450 L lt oom 1082H N ZHI wesbeiq o 1 1343Y eseeld i I e j L1091I8 HI ZHI ureJ8eiq o 13494 esed d SBAHOeU olg zH weu uonoeJip p lo oid ui yne u euueu jueuunoJeAo eseud uoisioep uonoaulp ueJ6elq o 1342Y esee d 6 sjeuBis Buryoojq eAnoe ou pue pajeAnoeep jou s a6e s SBuyoolg ueJBeiq ol 13434 esee d F JesoJ y euieu Jeuo yeujeu Jeu euieu 8L du j eujeu z L li c 1duj euieu L1 du eujeu
73. 2 Assignment 4 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para ao active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 Assignment 5 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para i pom active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 143 Binary Output Relays Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Assignment 6 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 Inverting 6 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para x i n active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 Assignment 7 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 Inverting 7 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para ls oe active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 t hold To clearly identify the 0 00 300 00s 0 03s Device Para das transition of a Binary Outputs inary output relay the new state is BO Slot X2 n 203 the hold time Latched Defines whether the _ inactive inactive Device Para n Ci y active Binary Outputs acknowledged BO Slot X2 automatically if the IBO 3 event is gone or whether the Binary Output Relay is to be acknowledged by a signal manually Page 14
74. 2 Qn Feed rated voltage and rated current with 90 degree phase shift between voltage and current pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay The measured values for the active power Q must show a negative algebraic sign Set the tripping threshold e g 0 2 Qn In order to test the tripping thresholds feed 0 1 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay Increase the current with an abrupt change to 0 3 In Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant Compare the tripping value to the parameterized Successlul test result The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays threshold values and fallback ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list Permissible deviations tolerances can be found under Technical Data EN MRA4 04 09 PQS Power Protection Module ANSI 32 37 NOTICE Z EN MRA4 04 09 Testing the threshold values Feed 80 of the S gt threshold to the measuring inputs of the relay Increase the fed power slowly until the relay picks up Compare the measured value at the time of tripping to the parameterized setting Testing the tripping delay Feed 80 of the S gt threshold to the measuring inputs of the relay Increase the fed power with an abrupt change to 120 of the S gt threshold Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay Successful test result The measured total trippi
75. 4 sn4 XASLA LA 1184 88504 X3 S 1A LA l ed 8804 X3 S IA EN MRA4 04 09 Page 468 VTS Supervision Module Voltage Transformer Supervision ANSI 60FL Device Planning Parameters of the Voltage Transformer Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu path Mode Mode do not use use Device planning use Global Protection Parameters of the Voltage Transformer Supervision the module if blocking is activated allowed within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true Global Prot Para Supervision NTS Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path ExBlo1 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a Supervision parameter set and if the state of the NTS assigned signal is true ExBlo2 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para Ex Fuse Fail VT Fuse failure of voltage transformers 1 n Assignment List Protection Para Global Prot Para Supervision NTS Ex Fuse Fail EVT Fuse failure earth voltage transformer if the state of the assigned signal is true 1 n Assignment List Protection Para Global Prot Para Supervision NTS EN MRA4 04 09 Page 469 VTS Supervision Module Voltage Transformer Supervision ANSI 60FL Setting Group Parameters of the Voltage
76. Command PQS 2 ExBlot I Module input state External blocking PQS 2 ExBlo2 Module input state External blocking PQS 2 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command PQS 3 active Signal active PQS 3 ExBlo Signal External Blocking PQS 3 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked PQS 3 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command PQS 3 Alarm Signal Alarm Power Protection Page 116 EN MRA4 04 09 Assignment List Name Description PQS 3 Trip Signal Trip Power Protection PQS 3 TripCmd Signal Trip Command PQS 3 ExBlot I Module input state External blocking PQS 3 ExBIo2 I Module input state External blocking PQS 3 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command PQS 4 active Signal active PQS 4 ExBlo Signal External Blocking PQS 4 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked PQS 4 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command PQS 4 Alarm Signal Alarm Power Protection PQS 4 Trip Signal Trip Power Protection PQS 4 TripCmd Signal Trip Command PQS 4 ExBlo1 I Module input state External blocking PQS 4 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking PQS 4 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Tri
77. Device Para 7 an E active LEDs LEDs group A LED 5 Assignment 3 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 5 Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para M s r active LEDs LEDs group A LED 5 Assignment 4 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 5 Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para s on M Sese active LEDs LEDs group A LED 5 Assignment 5 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 5 Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para a M res active LEDs LEDs group A LED 5 Latched Defines whether the inactive inactive Device Para LED will be acknowledged active LEDs automatically if the LEDs group A inte oa LEDS to be acknowledged by a signal manually EN MRA4 04 09 Page 173 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Ack signal Acknowledgment 1 n Assignment List Device Para vini LEDs active the LED can LEDs group A eo edad if LED 6 those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back Only available if Latched active LED active color The LED lights up in green red Device Para Hd ij the state red LEDs assignment of the red flash LEDs group A SIBI Ms green flash LED 6 LED inactive color The LED lights upin gre
78. EN MRA4 04 09 Module Digital Inputs Dis Optional Digital Inputs DI Slot X6 Global Protection Parameters of the Optional Digital Inputs Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Nom voltage Nominal voltage of 24 V DC 24 V DC Device Para Sese u 48 V DC Digital Inputs 60 V DC DI Slot X6 110 V DC Group 1 230 V DC 110 V AC 230 V AC Inverting 1 Inverting the input inactive inactive Device Para signas active Digital Inputs DI Slot X6 Group 1 Debouncing time 1 A change of the state of a digital input will only be no debouncing time 20 ms no debouncing time Device Para Digital Inputs recognized after the 50 ms DI Slot X6 debouncing time has expired become 100 ms Group 1 effective Thus wipers will not be misinterpreted Inverting 2 Inverting the input inactive inactive Device Para signals active Digital Inputs DI Slot X6 Group 1 Debouncing time 2 A change of the state of a digital input will only be no debouncing time 20 ms no debouncing time Device Para Digital Inputs recognized after the 50 ms DI Slot X6 debouncing time has expired become 100 ms Group 1 effective Thus wipers will not be misinterpreted Inverting 3 Inverting the input inactive inactive Device Para signals active Digital Inputs DI Slot X6 Group 1 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 133 Module Digital Inputs DIs
79. External Blocking CBF running Signal CBF Module started CBF Alarm Signal Circuit Breaker Failure CBF ExBlo1 l Module input state External blocking1 CBF ExBlo2 Module input state External blocking2 TCS active Signal active TCS ExBlo Signal External Blocking TCS Alarm Signal Alarm Trip Circuit Supervision TCS ExBlo1 l Module input state External blocking TCS ExBlo2 l Module input state External blocking2 CTS active Signal active CTS ExBlo Signal External Blocking CTS Alarm Signal Alarm Current Transformer Measuring Circuit Supervision CTS ExBlo1 l Module input state External blocking CTS ExBlo2 l Module input state External blocking2 VTS active Signal active VTS ExBlo Signal External Blocking VTS Alarm AV Signal Alarm AV Voltage Transformer Measuring Circuit Supervision VTS Alarm Signal Alarm Voltage Transformer Measuring Circuit Supervision VTS Ex FF VT Signal Alarm Fuse Failure Voltage Transformers VTS Ex FF EVT Signal Alarm Fuse Failure Earth Voltage Transformers VTS Ex Fuse Fail VT I Module input state External fuse failure voltage transformers VTS Ex Fuse Fail EVT I Module input state External fuse failure earth voltage transformer EN MRA4 04 09 Page 121 Assignment List Name Description VTS ExBlo1 l Module input state External blocking1 VTS ExBlo2 Module input state External blocking2 DI Slot X1 DI 1 Signal Dig
80. General Trip L3 I 5 Trip Signal Trip I 5 TripCmd Signal Trip Command I 5 DefaultSet Signal Default Parameter Set I 5 AdaptSet 1 Signal Adaptive Parameter 1 I 5 AdaptSet 2 Signal Adaptive Parameter 2 I 5 AdaptSet 3 Signal Adaptive Parameter 3 I 5 AdaptSet 4 Signal Adaptive Parameter 4 I 5 ExBlo1 1 Module input state External blocking1 I 5 ExBlo2 Module input state External blocking2 I 5 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command 5 Ex rev Interl Module input state External reverse interlocking I 5 AdaptSet1 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter1 I 5 AdaptSet2 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter2 I 5 AdaptSet3 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter3 I 5 AdaptSet4 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter4 I 6 active Signal active I 6 ExBlo Signal External Blocking I 6 Ex rev Interl Signal External reverse Interlocking I 6 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked I 6 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command EN MRA4 04 09 Page 105 Assignment List Name Description 1 6 1H2 Blo Signal Blocking the trip command by an inrush I 6 Alarm L1 Signal Alarm L1 I 6 Alarm L2 Signal Alarm L2 I 6 Alarm L3 Signal Alarm L3 I 6 Alarm Signal Alarm 6 Trip L1 Signal General Trip L1 I 6 Trip L2 Signal Gene
81. Global Prot Para SOTF Ext SOTF I Module input state External Switch Protection Para SEO D Global Prot Para SOTF Signals of the Switch Onto Fault Module Output States Name Description active Signal active ExBlo Signal External Blocking Ex rev Interl Signal External reverse Interlocking enabled Signal Switch Onto Fault enabled This Signal can be used to modify Overcurrent Protection Settings AR Blo Signal Blocked by AR I lt Signal No Load Current EN MRA4 04 09 Page 337 SOTF Protection Module Switch Onto Fault Commissioning Switch Onto Fault ANSI 50HS Object to be tested Testing the module Switch Onto Fault according to the parameterized operating mode I lt No current LS POS Circuit Breaker Position I lt No current and CB POS Position of the Circuit Breaker CB manual ON Necessary means e Three phase current source If the Enable Mode depends on current e Maybe ampere meters If the Enable Mode depends on current e Timer Test Example for Mode CB manual ON NOTICE Mode I In order to test the effectiveness Initially don t feed any current Start the timer and feed with an abrupt change current that is distinct greater than the I threshold to the measuring inputs of the relay Mode I lt and CB POS Simultaneous switch on the CB manually and feed with an abrupt change current that is distinct greater than the
82. Homepage http www woodward seg com Documentation http doc seg pp com Sales Phone 49 0 21 52 145 635 Telefax 49 0 21 52 145 354 e mail kemp electronics woodward com Service Phone 49 0 21 52 145 614 Fax 49 0 21 52 145 455 e mail kemp pd Qwoodward com ERES A W ri M Page 510 EN MRA4 04 09
83. I threshold Mode CB POS The circuit breaker has to be in the OFF Position The signal SOTF ErrscrivE 70 is untrue If the Circuit Breaker is switched on the signal 9OTF ErrsecrivE 21 becomes true as long as the timer t effective is running The Circuit Breaker has to be in the OFF Position There must be no load current The Status Display of the device shows the signal SOTF ErFFEcrTivE 1 Testing Switch the Circuit Breaker manually ON and start the timer at the same time After the hold time t effective is expired the state of the signal has to change to SOTF ErFFEcrTivE 0 Write down the measured time Successlul test result The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays threshold values and fallback ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list Permissible deviations tolerances can be found under Tech nical Data empta se asa Page 338 EN MRA4 04 09 CLPU Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup CLPU Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup Available stages CLPU This Supervision Module enables protection against faulty tripping of the Overcurrent Protection that might be alarmed by the increased currents caused by the re energizing after outages During normal operation the thermostatically load refridgerators heatings residental air conditions is diversified After an extended outage all these devices are switched on at the sam
84. I eijnpoui e jo uueje eAnos es eseud uoe43 UlJe v euieu uueje eAno9joo uueje je19u9D eAnoes es eseud e o peaj j IM 9dA eoai ep au uo Buipuedep FA A 9I I ejnpoui e jo uueje eAnoejes eseud uoe3 c uue v eueu uueje eAn29j02 uueje je1eueB eAnoe es eseud e 0 peaj jIM 9dA 9IA p y uo Buipuedep gA A SI I ejnpoui e jo uueje eAnosjes eseud u e43 Z uue vy eueu uueje eAnoejoo uueje jeJeueB eAnosjes eseud e o peaj j IM 9dA 9IA p au uo Buipuedep FA A 9 I ejnpoui e jo uueje eAnoejes eseud uoe3 uue v euieu uueje 8An29j02 uueje je1eueB eAnoe es eseud e o peaj jm 9dA eai ep y uo Buipuedep gA A 9J I ejnpoui e jo uueje eAnoes es eseud u e43 du eueu du e3eueB e oj peaj JIM npoui uonoejoJd pezuoujne dui eAnoe ue Jo du uoe3 c du eueu duj je3eueB e o peaj IM einpoul uonooejoud pezuoujne du eAgnoe ue Jo du yoeg zq duj eueu di e49u9 e o pea jw npoui uonoajoJd pezuoujne dui eAnoe ue Jo du uoe3 1 du jeueu duj e1 u B e oj peaj jim npoui uonoejoJd pezuoujne diy eAnoe ue Jo di uoe3 pul9du euieu di e49u9 e o pea jw npoui uonoejoJd pezuoujne dui eAnoe ue Jo du uoe3 c7 du euieu duj je3eueB e o peaj IM npoui uonoejoJd pezuoujne duy eAnoe ue jo di uoe3 Z did a weu dij ej u B e o peaj ji npoui uonoajoJd pezuoujne dui eAnoe ue Jo di uoe3 1 du jeueu 2 2 885 R89434585889 59
85. I Module input state External fuse Protection Para failure voltage transformers Global Prot Para Supervision NTS Ex Fuse Fail EVT I Module input state External fuse Protection Para failure earth voltage transformer Global Prot Para Supervision NTS ExBlo1 l Module input state External Protection Para piockmgi Global Prot Para Supervision VTS ExBlo2 l Module input state External Protection Para Pange Global Prot Para Supervision NTS Voltage Transformer Module Signals Output States Name Description active Signal active ExBlo Signal External Blocking Alarm AV Signal Alarm AV Voltage Transformer Measuring Circuit Supervision Alarm Signal Alarm Voltage Transformer Measuring Circuit Supervision Ex FF VT Signal Alarm Fuse Failure Voltage Transformers Ex FF EVT Signal Alarm Fuse Failure Earth Voltage Transformers U Ml EN MRA4 04 09 Page 471 VTS Supervision Module Voltage Transformer Supervision ANSI 60FL Commissioning Voltage Transformer Supervision via DI ANSI 60FL Object to be tested Check if the auto fuse failure is correctly identified by the device Procedure Disconnect the automatic circuit breaker of the VTs all poles to be dead Successful test result e The state of the respective digital input changes e Ifa LED is allocated to the auto fuse failure this is indicated accordingly rm A
86. MRA4 04 09 Page 321 1272 Protection Module Unbalanced Load Protection ANSI 46 12 gt Protection Module Unbalanced Load Protection ANSI 46 Available stages I2 gt 1 122 2 Asymmetrical loading of an electrical machine produces a negative sequence field which heavily affects the rotor heavy in thermal respect or even can destroy it The unbalanced load protection mainly prevents that the rotor warms up to an inadmissible degree The unbalanced load protection can also detect phase failures and transformer wiring errors Both elements i e 22 1 and 2 gt 2 are identically structured NOTICE d Rating value I2 is the permitted continuous unbalanced load current of the machines generator engine to be protected referring to the rated current of the device not to the rated current of the machine This parameter for the individual step used as machine protection against overheating caused by unbalanced load current should be adjusted according to the permitted continuous unbalanced load current stated by the manufacturer of the generator engine For both steps trip characteristics are provided namely a definite time characteristic DEFT and an inverse characteristic INV The characteristic of the inverse curve is as follows t lt 2 I2 Legend t Tripping delay K Indicates the thermal load capability of the engine while running with 10096 unbalanced load current I2 If the pick up value
87. Max switching voltage Switching capacity Contact type Terminals Continuous current Max Switch on current Max breaking current Contact type Terminals EN MRA4 04 09 Binary Output Relays 5 A AC DC 25 A AC 25 A dc upt to 30 V for4 s 30 A 230 Vac according to ANSI IEEE Std C37 90 2005 30 A 250 Vdc according to ANSI IEEE Std C37 90 2005 5 A AC up to 125 V AC 5 A DC up to 30 V resistive 0 3 A DC at 300 V 250 V AC 250 V DC 1250 VA 1 changeover contact Screw type terminals Supervision Contact SC 5 A at 120 240 V AC or 30 V DC 15 A at 120 240 V AC or 30 V DC max 4s 5 A at 120 240 Vac or 30 Vdc 0 4 Aat 125 V DC 1 changeover contact Screw type terminals Page 493 Technical Data Time Synchronization IRIG Nominal input voltage 5 V Connection Screw type terminals twisted pair Front Interface RS232 Baud rates 115200 Baud Handshake RTS and CTS Connection 9 pole D Sub plug RS485 Master Slave Slave Connection 9 pole D Sub socket external terminating resistors in D Sub or 6 screw clamping terminals RM 3 5 mm 138 MIL terminating resistors internal or fiber optic connection ST plug In case that the RS485 interface is realized via terminals the communication cable has to be shielded The shielding has to be fixed at the screw that is marked with the ground symbol rear side of the device Boot phase After switching on the power supply the protection
88. Module External Protection Input States Name Description Assignment via ExBlo1 l Module input state External Protection Para DOC I Global Prot Para ExP ExP 1 ExBlo2 Module input state External Protection Para DOOR Global Prot Para ExP ExP 1 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Protection Para Blocking of the Trip Command Global Prot Para ExP ExP 1 Alarm l Module input state External Alarm Protection Para Global Prot Para ExP ExP 1 Trip l Module input state External Trip Protection Para Global Prot Para ExP ExP 1 Module External Protection Signals Output States Name Description active Signal active ExBlo Signal External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command Alarm Signal External Alarm Trip Signal External Trip TripCmd Signal External Trip Command EN MRA4 04 09 Page 445 ExP Protection Module External Protection Commissioning External Protection Object to be tested Test of the module External Protection Necessary means e Depending on the application Procedure Simulate the functionality of the External Protection Alarm Trip Blockings by de energizing of the digital inputs Successful test result All external alarms external trips and external blockings are correctly recognized and processed by the device prx
89. Only available if ADI Characteristic DEFT OrCharacteristi c INV Char Characteristic DEFT DEFT Protection Para IEC NINV lt n gt IEC VINV l Prot IEC EINV A 1 IEC LINV ANSI MINV ANSI VINV ANSI EINV Therm Flat IT I2T l4T t Tripping delay 0 00 300 00s 1 00s Protection Para lt n gt Prot I 1 Page 280 EN MRA4 04 09 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path t char Time 0 05 20 00 1 Protection Para multiplier tripping characteristic factor lt n gt Prot Only available if Characteristic A 1 INVOrCharacteristic Therm FlatOrCharacteristic TOrCharacteristic I2T OrCharacteristic 4T Reset Mode Reset Mode instantaneous instantaneous Protection Para Only available if t delay ae Characteristic calculated Prot INVOrCharacteristic Therm A 1 FlatOrCharacteristic TOrCharacteristic I2TOrCharacteristic 4T t reset Reset time for 0 00 60 00s Os Protection Para intermittent phase a failures INV characteristics only Prot Available if Reset ADI Mode t delay IH2 Blo Blocking the trip inactive inactive Protection Para command if an t june inrush is detected oe Prot Il EN MRA4 04 09 Page 281 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 Parameter Description Setting range Defa
90. Panel Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path t max Edit If no other key s is 20 3600s 180s Device Para pressed at the panel HMI after expiration of this time all cached changed parameters are cancelled Menu language Selection of the English English Device Para anguage German HMI EN MRA4 04 09 Page 183 Module Disturbance Recorder Module Disturbance Recorder Disturb rec The disturbance recorder works with 32 samples per cycle The disturbance recorder can be started by one of eight start events selection from the assignment list OR Logic The disturbance record contains the measuring values inclusively pre trigger time By means of Smart view Datavisualizer option the oscillographic curves of the analogue current voltage and digital channels traces can be shown and evaluated in a graphical form The disturbance recorder has a storage capacity of 120s The disturbance recorder is able to record up to 10 s adjustable per record The amount of records depends on the file size of each record The disturbance recorder can be parameterized in the menu Device Parameter Recorder Disturb rec Determine the max recording time to register a disturbance event The max total length of a recording is 10s inclusive pre trigger and post trigger time To trigger the disturbance recorder up to 8 signals can be selected from the assignment list The trigger events are OR linked If a
91. Para Global Prot Para AR EN MRA4 04 09 Page 429 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 Module Automatic Reclosure Signals Output States Name Description active Signal active ExBlo Signal External Blocking CB ON Cmd Signal CB switch ON Command Abort Blo Signal AR The AR was aborted or blocked by an active function of the menu Abort running Signal Auto Reclosing running t Superv Signal AR Supervision blocking time Service Alarm Signal AR Alarm too many switching operations Service Blo Signal AR Service blocking too many switching operations successful Signal Auto Reclosing successful failed Signal Auto Reclosing failure t dead Signal Dead time between trip and reclosure attempt Res Statistics Cr Signal Reset all statistic AR counters Total number of AR successful and unsuccessful no of AR Res Service Cr Signal Reset the Service Counters for Alarm and Blocking AR Shot No 0 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No AR Shot No 1 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No AR Shot No 2 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No AR Shot No 3 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No AR Shot No 4 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No AR Shot No 5 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No AR Shot No 6 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No in Preparation in Preparation Page 430 EN MRA4 04 09 AR Protection Module
92. Protection non directional ANSI 50N G 51N G 312 Commissioning Ground Fault Protection directional ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G 312 THR Protection MopuLE THERMAL REPLICA ANSI 49 313 Direct Commands of the Thermal Overload Module a a rr rsrsssssisass 315 Device Planning Parameters of the Thermal Overload Module 315 Global Protection Parameters of the Thermal Overload Module 316 Setting Group Parameters of the Thermal Overload Module 317 Thermal Overload Module Input States a nnne nnne nnns 319 Signals of the Thermal Overload Signals Output States a 319 Thermal Overload Module Values nnne nenne nnne nnne sena nina esa sana ri sene nnns 320 Thermal Overload Module Statistics a nnne nenne nennen nnns 320 Commissioning Thermal Replica ANSI 49 cccccccccececeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeee
93. Scada Command Modbus Scada Cmd 12 Scada Command Modbus Scada Cmd 13 Scada Command Modbus Scada Cmd 14 Scada Command Modbus Scada Cmd 15 Scada Command Modbus Scada Cmd 16 Scada Command IEC 103 Scada Cmd 1 Scada Command IEC 103 Scada Cmd 2 Scada Command IEC 103 Scada Cmd 3 Scada Command IEC 103 Scada Cmd 4 Scada Command IEC 103 Scada Cmd 5 Scada Command IEC 103 Scada Cmd 6 Scada Command IEC 103 Scada Cmd 7 Scada Command IEC 103 Scada Cmd 8 Scada Command IEC 103 Scada Cmd 9 Scada Command IEC 103 Scada Cmd 10 Scada Command IEC 103 Transmission Signal SCADA active IEC 103 Fail phy Interf Failure in the physical interface IEC 103 Failure Event lost Failure event lost Statistics Reset Signal Reset of statistics Statistics StartFct Module input state Start statistics Module input signal Statistics ResetFct Module input state Reset statistics Module input signal Sys PS 1 Signal Parameter Set 1 Sys PS 2 Signal Parameter Set 2 Sys PS 3 Signal Parameter Set 3 Sys PS 4 Signal Parameter Set 4 Sys PSS manual Signal Manual Switch over of a Parameter Set Sys PSS via Scada Signal Parameter Set Switch via Scada Sys PSS via Inp fct Signal Parameter Set Switch via input function Sys min 1 param changed Signal At least one parameter has
94. Scada HMI Signal Acknowledge Scada HMI Ack TripCmd HMI Signal Reset Trip Command HMI Ack LED Sca Signal LEDs acknowledgment SCADA Ack BO Sca Signal Acknowledgment of the Binary Outputs SCADA Ack Counter Sca Signal Reset of all Counters SCADA Ack Scada Sca signal Acknowledge Scada SCADA Ack TripCmd Sca Signal Reset Trip Command SCADA EN MRA4 04 09 Page 481 Device Parameters Special Values of the System Module Value Description Menu path Build Build Device Para Version Version Version Device Para Version Operating hours Cr Operating hours counter Operation Count and RevData Sys Page 482 EN MRA4 04 09 Commissioning Commissioning Before starting work on an opened switchboard it is imperative that the complete switchboard is dead and the following 5 safety regulations are always met Safety precautions A DAN e ER Disconnect from the power supply e Secure against reconnection e Verify if the equipment is dead Connect to ground and short circuit all phases Cover or safeguard all live adjacent parts A DANGER The secondary circuit of a current transformer must never be opened during operation The prevailing high voltages are dangerous to life Even when the auxiliary voltage is switched off it is likely that there are still hazardous voltages at the component connections All locally applicable national and internationa
95. Serial Scada Interface Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Optical rest position Optical rest position Light off Light on Device Para Light on X103 Page 202 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Modbus Modbus Module Modbus Modbus Modbus Modbus Protocol Configuration The time controlled Modbus protocol is based on the Master Slave working principle This means that the substation control and protection system sends an enquiry or instruction to a certain device slave address which will then be answered or carried out accordingly If the enquiry instruction cannot be answered carried out e g because of an invalid slave address a failure message is returned to the master The Master substation control and protection system can query information from the device such as Type of unit version Measuring values Statistical measured values Switch operating position in preparation otate of device Time and date State of the device s digital inputs Protection State alarms The Master control system can give commands instructions to the device such as Control of switchgear where applicable i e each acc to the applied device version Change over of parameter set Reset and acknowledgement of alarms signals Adjustment of date and time Control of alarm relays For detailed information on data point lists and error handling please refer to the Modbus documentation To allo
96. Signal External Blocking V 012 6 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked V 012 6 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command V 012 6 Alarm Signal Alarm voltage asymmetry V 012 6 Trip Signal Trip V 012 6 TripCmd Signal Trip Command V 012 6 ExBlo1 I Module input state External blocking1 V 012 6 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 V 012 6 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command PQS 1 active Signal active PQS 1 ExBlo Signal External Blocking PQS 1 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked PQS 1 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command PQS 1 Alarm Signal Alarm Power Protection PQS 1 Trip Signal Trip Power Protection PQS 1 TripCmd Signal Trip Command PQS 1 ExBlot I Module input state External blocking PQS 1 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking PQS 1 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command PQS 2 active Signal active PQS 2 ExBlo Signal External Blocking PQS 2 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked PQS 2 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command PQS 2 Alarm Signal Alarm Power Protection PQS 2 Trip Signal Trip Power Protection PQS 2 TripCmd Signal Trip
97. States of the Outputs 86 STATS ir S unum ui mutua aasan au das ease Nice E CEP Isi Ese spese Lan c Sospc susan yaaa Zhu 87 FS AC OU S I r DENIS unamasa iya RN 87 Statistics to be Read Out via Smart view rnanan ns eas s ses rase nis 8Z iret ceca Gohiiguralio iu u uuu uuu uuu llasa um 88 Statistics Configuration Via Smart view U uuu uuu uasskasssa asss ashasashia asptassanqhiwasaysapaqaqhspakakasawakaqusukash 88 USCS IANS tg Sg es seth ve ce ete peepee tate E O amen em eee A 89 wirzigerzIroeiziuemTd c 89 Global Protection Parameters of the Statistics Module 94 States of the Inputs of the Statistics Module nennen nennen nnns 95 Signals er the Statistics Module uu uuu uuu uuu im iexenismedatansddaddsntecivendssedadouvadastaessdumendonbdewsenesedacedeasnadieaes 95 Counters OF the Module SAIS CS oe uU ie voco a Doo uunc SUD Puri AbincIsecE Ss uenis Rp CUR ie vonbEds 95 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS ese nn enhn hun nhm haha sh ausa su INR IRR SR RR DRE SRR RR RR Regu uu Regu su Regu sa Dueh esa uu sue sa sa seu sau uus 96 Manual Acknowledgment a raras nene nnnhnnnne nane nase ases assa sess s
98. Statistics Global Protection Parameters of the Statistics Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Start via Start statistics by Duration Duration Device Para StartFct Statistics StartFct Update the displayed 1 n Assignment List Device Para statistics and start new measuring interval if the assigned signal becomes true rising edge Statistics Only available if Start via StartFct ResetF ct Reset of statistics if 1 n Assignment List Device Para the assigned signal becomes true Statistics slope Duration Recording time 15 s 15s Device Para 30 s Statistics Only available if Start via Duration 1 min 10 min 30 min 1 h 2 h 6 h 12 h 1 d 2 d 5 d 7d 10 d 30 d Page 94 EN MRA4 04 09 Statistics States of the Inputs of the Statistics Module Name Description Assignment via StartFct l Module input state Start statistics Device Para Module input signal Statistics ResetFct l Module input state Reset statistics Device Para Module input signal Statistics Signals of the Statistics Module Name Description Reset Signal Reset of statistics Counters of the Module Statistics Value Description Menu path MeasPointNo Each measuring point that istaken Operation over by the statistics increments this counter By means of this counter the User
99. Transformer Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module stage inactive active inactive Protection Para lt n gt Supervision VTS ExBlo Fc Activate allow or inactivate disallow blocking of the module stage This parameter is only effective if a signal is assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo Fc active inactive active inactive Protection Para lt n gt Supervision VTS AV In order to prevent faulty tripping of phase selective protection functions that use the voltage as tripping criterion If the difference of the residual voltage and the calculated value VO is higher than the pick up value AV an alarm event effected after the excitation time In such a case the existence of a fuse failure a broken wire or a faulty measuring circuit can be assumed 0 20 1 00Vn 0 50Vn Protection Para lt n gt Supervision IVTS Alarm delay Alarm delay 0 1 9999 0s 1 0s Protection Para lt n gt Supervision INTS Page 470 EN MRA4 04 09 VTS Supervision Module Voltage Transformer Supervision ANSI 60FL Voltage Transformer Supervision Module Input States Name Description Assignment via Ex Fuse Fail VT
100. Trip Signal Trip Power Protection TripCmd Signal Trip Command EN MRA4 04 09 Page 383 PQS Power Protection Module ANSI 32 37 Commissioning Examples for the Power Protection Module Object to be tested e Testing the projected Power Protection Modules P P Pr Q Q Qr S S lt Necessary means e 3 phase AC voltage source e 3 phase AC current source e Timer Procedure Testing the wiring e Feed rated voltage and rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay e Adjust the current pointers 30 lagging to the voltage pointers e The following measuring values have to be shown P 0 86 Pn Q 0 5 Qn S 1 Sn NOTICE NOTICE Page 384 Ifthe measured values are shown with a negative algebraic sign check the wiring The examples shown within this chapter have to be carried out with the tripping values and tripping delays that apply to your switchboard If you are testing greater than thresholds e g P gt start by 80 of the tripping value and increase the object to be tested until the relay picks up In case that you are testing less than thresholds e g P lt start by 120 of the tripping value and reduce the object to be tested until the relay picks up If you are testing tripping delays of greater than modules e g P start a timer simultaneously with an abrupt change of the object to be tested from 80 of the tripping value to 120 of the tripping val
101. active Reset Man Trigger Manual Trigger Untrue Untrue Operation True Recorders Man Trigger Global Protection Parameters of the Fault Recorder Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Start 1 Start recording if the 1 n Assignment List Trip Device Para assigned signal is true Recorders Fault rec Start 2 Start recording if the 1 n Assignment List Device Para assigned signal is true Jeder Fault rec Start 3 Start recording if the 1 n Assignment List Device Para assigned signal is true IRecorders Fault rec Start 4 Start recording if the 1 n Assignment List Device Para assigned signal is true IRecorders Fault rec Start 5 otart recording if the 1 n Assignment List Device Para assigned signal is true Recorda Fault rec Start 6 Start recording if the 1 n Assignment List Device Para assigned signal is true Recorders Fault rec Start 7 Start recording if the 1 n Assignment List Device Para assigned signal is true Recorders Fault rec Start 8 otart recording if the 1 n Assignment List Device Para assigned signal is true IRecorders Fault rec Auto overwriting If there is no more free inactive active Device Para memory capacit act Recorder overwritten Fault rec Page 196 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Fault Recorder Fault Recorder Module Input States
102. and the time stage will be reset t sync AR Synchronizing time 0 01 100 00s 0 01s Protection Para for synchronized AR jan start AR Only available if Ex ae eva General settings EN MRA4 04 09 Page 427 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 reclosure attempts If the parameterized number of AR cycles is reached an alarm will be given out Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Service Alarm As soon as the AR 1 65535 1000 Protection Para Counter exceeds this lt n gt number of reclosure attempts an alarm IAR will be given out overhauling of the General settings CB Service Blo Too many auto 1 65535 65535 Protection Para lt n gt AR General settings Page 428 EN MRA4 04 09 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 Module Automatic Reclosure Input States Name Description Assignment via ExBlo1 l Module input state External Protection Para DOC 1 Global Prot Para IAR ExBlo2 Module input state External Protection Para blocking2 Global Prot Para AR Ex Sync running l Module input state External synchronism signal Protection Para Global Prot Para AR CB Pos Detect Module input state Criterion by which the Circuit Breaker Switch Position is to be detected Protection Para Global Prot Para AR Ready l Module input state CB ready Protection
103. can Time stamp What has Changed Number ongoing fault have several Fault changed Value No This counter will be incremented This counter will be by each General incremented by each Alarm General Alarm Coa Exception AR this applies only to devices that offer auto reclosing There are three different classes of events Alternation of binary states are shown as 0 gt 1 if the signal changes physically from 0 to 1 1 gt 0 if the signal changes physically from 1 to 0 Counters increment is shown as Old Counter state gt New Counter state e g 3 gt 4 Alternation of multiple states are shown as Old state gt New state e g 0 gt 2 ENS se sss Page 198 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Event Recorder Read Out the Event Recorder e Call up the main menu e Call up the submenu Operation Recorders Event rec e Select an event Read Out the Event Recorder via Smart View e n case Smart view is not running please start it e f device data has not been loaded yet click Receive Data From The Device in menu Device e Double click the Operation icon in the navigation tree Double click the Event Rec icon within the OPERATION RECORDERS menu e n the window the events are shown in tabular form N O TI C E To have the event recorder up dated in a cyclic manner select Automatic Up
104. continuously checks the measured data by comparing received data with data from a second channel sampled in parallel Monitoring of the auxiliary voltage is done by reset IC s If the voltage of one of the different supply circuits falls below a certain threshold a restart of the device is initiated There are three major supply groups 24 V 3 3 V and 1 6 V each of them being monitored separately and forcing the processor to reset stop of the device until the voltage again reaches nominal value If the voltage staggers around the threshold the device also starts again after 5 s Independent of these separate monitoring functions the intermediate voltage circuit is buffered for 100 ms until all important and relevant operational and fault data have been saved and the device initiates a restart He I A A r 1 e url EN MRA4 04 09 Page 487 Self Supervision Error messages codes After a reboot of the device the reason for rebooting will be displayed under Operation Status Display Sys Reset For more information about the reboot reason please follow this chapter The reboot will also be logged within the event recorder Rebooting causes an event named Sys reboot Numerical reboot codes Error messages codes 1 Reboot after clean switching off of the device normal reboot after clean shut down of the device 2 Reboot by user command user initiated rebo
105. disturbance record is written a new disturbance record cannot be triggered until all trigger signals which have triggered the previous disturbance record are gone Recording is only done for the time the assigned event exists event controlled plus the time for the pre and post trigger but not longer than 10s The time for forward run and tracking of the disturbance recorder is shown in percent of the total recording length Example The disturbance recorder is started by the general activation facility After the fault has been cancelled follow up time the recording process is stopped but after 10s at the latest The parameter Auto Delete defines how the device shall react if there is no saving place available In case Auto Delete is active the first recorded disturbance will be overwritten according to the FIFO principle If the parameter is set to inactive recording of the disturbance events will be stopped until the storage location is released manually Start 1 Trigger Start 2 Trigger Start 3 Trigger Start 4 Trigger Recording Start 5 Trigger Start 6 Trigger Start 7 Trigger Start 8 Trigger Man Trigger esc o oem mms me s il Page 184 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Disturbance Recorder Example Disturbance Recorder Timing Chart I Start 1 Prot Trip Start 2 Start 3 Start 4 Start 5 Start 6 Start 7 S
106. dt mode absolute df dt absolute df dt Protection Para Only available if Device positive di at Me planning f Mode df dt Or negative df dt f Prot f lt and df dt Or f gt and df dt t Only available if Device ATTI planning f Mode df dt Or f and df dt Or f and df dt Only available if Device planning f Mode df dt delta phi Measured value calculated 1 30 10 Protection Para Vector surge Only available if Device planning f Mode delta phi lt n gt f Prot If 1 Page 410 EN MRA4 04 09 f Protection Module Frequency Protection ANSI 810 U Frequency Protection Module Input States Name Description Assignment via ExBlo1 l Module input state External Protection Para DOC I Global Prot Para f Prot If 1 ExBlo2 Module input state External Protection Para DOOR Global Prot Para f Prot f 1 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Protection Para Blocking of the Trip Command IGlobal Prot Para f Prot If 1 Frequency Protection Module Signals Output States Name Description active Signal active ExBlo Signal External Blocking Blo by V Signal Module is blocked by undervoltage Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command Alarm f Signal Alarm Frequency Protection Alarm df dt DF DT Alarm instantaneous or average value of the rate of freque
107. euueu uue v JoJd EN MRA4 04 09 Prot Protection Module puoeupiur3A ez GU 10Jd du u 9 6 L IZ 6 dit TLIO 7 dui U A 44 e7 GUL TA Z 1 Al 10Jd 1dul lull 9L L lt 7 dul TH 8L 1 du p u A LZ amp N e i Z E gt 71 0u10Jd L Z1dul lu BEN w L lt 27 dul Thi Lb L1 dui ula oz EEE LT du LELIA oz L1 du Lyd ye L1 dus u I 9 L BEN L lt rm dui Ti 9L di je1eue b eAnos es oseud e o peg jIM ed eor ep y uo Buipuedep 3A A 9J ejnpoul pezuoujne du e jo du eAnoeJes eseud u e3 diJ 30Jd EN MRA4 04 09 Page 246 Page 247 wiely UJaA Ve uue v u 5 Le wel LOI LZ We Od 1uue v u A os 7 wey L A Oe eq uuelv u i 92 EEE 1uuelvli I 92 I c uue v u A 6c EEE I zluue v L A 6c c UJe V1oJd c1uuel v u i SCZ L lt 1 welyd sz zq wuejy p i Pn L1 wey uA 8c by wely ThA 8c L1 wey u i ve L1 uuetv L vz wee Al 9 o2 uueje eLOUBH eAnoe es eseud e oj peg IM 9dA BOIASP eu uo Buipuedep 3A A 9I I jnpow e jo uueje eAnosjes eseud u e3 1 Wely old wJejy old Module Protection Prot EN MRA4 04 09 Module Protection Prot Direct Commands of the Protection Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Res Fault a Mains Resetting of fault inactive inactive Operation NO number and mains l auta
108. fail Signal Clear failure in memory Disturb rec Reset all records Signal All records deleted Disturb rec Reset rec Signal Delete record Disturb rec Man Trigger Signal Manual Trigger Disturb rec Start1 l State of the module input Trigger event start recording if Page 122 EN MRA4 04 09 Assignment List Name Description Disturb rec Start2 l State of the module input recording if Trigger event start recording if Disturb rec Start3 l State of the module input Trigger event start recording if Disturb rec Start4 l State of the module input Trigger event start Disturb rec Start5 I State of the module input recording if Trigger event start Disturb rec Start6 l State of the module input recording if Trigger event start recording if Disturb rec Start7 l State of the module input Trigger event start recording if Disturb rec Start8 l State of the module input Trigger event start Fault rec Reset rec Signal Delete record Fault rec Man Trigger Signal Manual Trigger Fault rec Start1 l State of the module input recording if Trigger event start recording if Fault rec Start2 l State of the module input Trigger event start recording if Fault rec Start3 l State of the module input Trigger event start recording if Fault rec Start4 l State of the module input Tri
109. for Fast 0 10 00s 0s Protection Para Trip jens Only available ifa AR a m Start FT 2 Startfct Assignment Start fct Protection Para lt n gt AR Start FT 2 FT Fast Trip inactive inactive Protection Para Only available if a Bee Ine start function was AR La Start FT 2 n FT Fast Trip after AR 0 6 0 Protection Para attempt number jens Only available ifa AR ac m Start FT 2 t FT Trip delay for Fast 0 10 00s 0s Protection Para Trip jens Only available if a AR ce us Start FT Page 432 EN MRA4 04 09 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 3 Startfct Assignment Start fct Protection Para lt n gt AR Start FT 3 FT Fast Trip inactive inactive Protection Para Only available if a active pe start function was AR SADEN Start FT 3 n FT Fast Trip after AR 0 6 0 Protection Para attempt number jens Only available ifa AR e e Start FT 3 t FT Trip delay for Fast 0 10 00s 0s Protection Para Trip ieu Only available ifa AR oa es Start FT 4 Startfct Assignment Start fct Protection Para lt n gt AR Start FT 4 FT Fast Trip inactive inactive Protection Para Only available if a active ish start function was AR L Start FT 4 n FT Fast Trip after AR 0 6 0 Protection Para attempt number je Only available ifa AR ae Mio Start FT 4 t FT Trip delay for Fast 0 10 00s 0s Protection Para Trip jen Only
110. from the technical data specified in the relevant documentation provided by the CB manufacturer Necessary means e Synchronizable current and voltage sources May be ampere meters e Timer Procedure Synchronize the 3 phase current and voltage sources with each other Then simulate the tripping directions to be tested by the angle between current and voltage Testing the threshold values 3 x single phase and 1 x three phase Each time feed a current which is about 3 5 above the threshold value for activation tripping Check then the threshold values Testing the total tripping delay recommendation Measure the total tripping times at the auxiliary contacts of the CB CB tripping Testing the trip delay measured at the relay output Measure the tripping times at the relay output Testing the fallback ratio Reduce the current to 97 below the trip value and check the fallback ratio Successful test result The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays threshold values and fallback ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list Permissible deviations tolerances can be found under Technical Data p o nme s lil Page 286 EN MRA4 04 09 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G Available stages IG 1 IG 2 IG 3 IG 4 If you are using inrush blocki
111. if blocking is activated allowed within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true Global Prot Para CLPU CB Pos Detect Criterion by which the Circuit Breaker Switch Position is to be detected Only available if CLPU Mode I lt CB Pos Protection Para Global Prot Para CLPU Page 342 EN MRA4 04 09 CLPU Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup Parameter set parameters of the Cold Load Pickup module the measured current is less than this parameter Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Function Permanent activation or inactive inactive Protection Para deactivation of module stage l active lt n gt CLPU ExBlo Fc Activate allow or inactivate inactive inactive Protection Para disallow blocking of the module stage This parameter is active lt n gt only effective if a signal is CLPU assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo Fc active Ex rev Interl Fc Activate allow or inactivate inactive inactive Protection Para disallow blocking of the ii as module stage This parameter is ane only effective if a signal is CLPU assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized Ex rev Interl F
112. input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 BO4 5 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 BO4 6 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 BO4 7 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 Ack signal BO 4 Module input state Acknowledgment signal for the binary output relay If latching is set to active the binary output relay can only be acknowledged if those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back and the hold time is expired Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 BOS 1 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 BO5 2 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 BO5 3 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 BOS 4 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 157 Binary Output Relays Name Description Assignment via BO5 5 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 BO5 6 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 BOS 7 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 A
113. minimal aux voltage communication is permitted to be interrupted Max permissible making current 18 A peak value for 0 25 ms 12 A peak value for 1 ms The voltage supply must be protected by a fuse of 2 5 A time lag miniature fuse 5x20 mm approx 1 5 x 0 8 according to IEC 60127 3 5 A time lag miniature fuse 6 3x32 mm approx 1 4 x 1 1 4 according to UL 248 14 Power Consumption Power supply range Power consumption Max power consumption in idle mode 19 300 V DC 7W 13 W 40 250 V AC 7VA 13 VA for frequencies of 40 70 Hz Real Time Clock Running reserve of the real time clock 1 year min Display Display type LCD with LED background illumination Resolution graphics display 128 x 64 pixel LED Type Two colored red green Number of LEDs Housing B2 15 fms AO Q eee Page 490 EN MRA4 04 09 Technical Data Max input voltage Input current Reaction time Fallback time Safe state of the digital inputs 4 Switching thresholds Un 24 V DC Switching threshold 1 ON Switching threshold 1 OFF Un 48 V 60V DC Switching threshold 2 ON Switching threshold 2 OFF Un 110 V AC DC Switching threshold 3 ON Switching threshold 3 OFF Un 230 V AC DC Switching threshold 4 ON Switching threshold 4 OFF Terminals EN MRA4 04 09 Digital Inputs 300 V DC 270 V AC 4 mA 20 ms 30 ms Un 24 V DC 48 V DC 60 V DC 1
114. p 222 t a t char s t t char s IG 40 IG fenem TEE 1x10 100 l t s t char l 10 NN 9 0 1 EN A 1 0 N 0 05 0 5 0 01 0 01 0 1 10 100 x IGnom multiples of the nominal current He I A P ss EN MRA4 04 09 Page 299 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G l4T Notice A Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and instantaneous Reset Trip 2 4 t ee t char s t t char s IGno Gnom 1x10 100 10 t s t char j 0 1 0 01 0 01 0 1 l 10 100 x IGnom multiples of the nominal current emEm AR r Hao D Gn 0 Page 300 EN MRA4 04 09 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G 9SJ9 9J pemo lqissod jou SSOG U lID 9 10Jd IS3t l lOS es19 01 Jip 81 JO piewuoj pyewuoj p 4 p 9 l 1O1 d 9SJ9A9J H H pileo es19 01 06 uis 109 ejfBuy LA3 10d VIN 9l10Jd uue V 10Jd Page 301 uonoejep uonoeurp jnej uJe3 10Jd EN MRA4 04 09 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G ejgissod zou ssod u Jip 9 3
115. r Global Prot Para Prot 1 AdaptSet4 Module input state Adaptive Protection Para Parameter4 Global Prot Para Prot AT EN MRA4 04 09 Page 283 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 I Module Signals Output States Name Description active Signal active ExBlo Signal External Blocking Ex rev Interl Signal External reverse Interlocking Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command IH2 Blo Signal Blocking the trip command by an inrush Alarm L1 Signal Alarm L1 Alarm L2 Signal Alarm L2 Alarm L3 Signal Alarm L3 Alarm Signal Alarm Trip L1 Signal General Trip L1 Trip L2 Signal General Trip L2 Trip L3 Signal General Trip L3 Trip Signal Trip TripCmd Signal Trip Command Active AdaptSet Active Adaptive Parameter DefaultSet Signal Default Parameter Set AdaptSet 1 Signal Adaptive Parameter 1 AdaptSet 2 Signal Adaptive Parameter 2 AdaptSet 3 Signal Adaptive Parameter 3 AdaptSet 4 Signal Adaptive Parameter 4 Page 284 EN MRA4 04 09 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 Commissioning Overcurrent Protection non directional ANSI 50 51 Object to be tested e Signals to be measured for each current protection element 1 6 the threshold values total tripping time recommended or
116. r i Global Prot Para Prot AG 1 AdaptSet2 Module input state Adaptive Protection Para r Global Prot Para Prot AG 1 AdaptSet3 Module input state Adaptive Protection Para k us Global Prot Para Prot AG 1 AdaptSet4 Module input state Adaptive Protection Para Parameter4 Global Prot Para Prot IG 1 Page 310 EN MRA4 04 09 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G Ground Fault Protection Signals Output States Name Description active Signal active ExBlo Signal External Blocking Ex rev Interl Signal External reverse Interlocking Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command Alarm Signal Alarm IG Trip Signal Trip TripCmd Signal Trip Command IGH2 Blo Signal blocked by an inrush Active AdaptSet Active Adaptive Parameter DefaultSet Signal Default Parameter Set AdaptSet 1 Signal Adaptive Parameter 1 AdaptSet 2 Signal Adaptive Parameter 2 AdaptSet 3 Signal Adaptive Parameter 3 AdaptSet 4 Signal Adaptive Parameter 4 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 311 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G Commissioning Ground Fault Protection non directional ANSI 50N G 51N G Please test the non directional earth overcurrent analog to the non directional phase overcurrent protection Commissioning Ground Fault Protect
117. seule Volete Standard values Q Measured value calculated Operation Reactive power Q Fed Reactive M redeas Power Q Consumpted Reactive D Power Standard values cos phi Measured value calculated Power Operation factor Measured values IStandard values Wp Positive Active Power Fed Energy Operation Measured values IStandard values Wp Negative Active Power is consumed Operation OS Lu Measured values Standard values Wq Positive Reactive Power Fed Operation Energy Measured values Standard values Wq Negative Reactive Power is Operation consumed reactive energy Measured values Standard values Page 84 EN MRA4 04 09 Energy Counter Energy Counter arent Power shown in the Display or within the PC Software will be displayed as zero if the absolute value of the corresponding Power falls below this Cutoff Level This parameter has no impact on recorders PowerCr Global Parameters of the Energy Counter Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path S P Q Cutoff Level The 0 0 0 100Sn 0 005Sn Device Para Active Reactive App Measurem Display Direct Commands of the Energy Counter Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Wp Reset Cr Wp Reset Counter inactive inactive Operation active Reset Wp Reset Cr Wp Reset Counter inactive inactive Operation active
118. state External Blocking of the Trip Command V 2 active Signal active V 2 ExBlo Signal External Blocking V 2 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked V 2 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command V 2 Alarm L1 Signal Alarm L1 V 2 Alarm L2 Signal Alarm L2 V 2 Alarm L3 Signal Alarm L3 V 2 Alarm Signal Alarm voltage stage V 2 Trip L1 Signal General Trip L1 V 2 Trip L2 Signal General Trip L2 V 2 Trip L3 Signal General Trip L3 V 2 Trip Signal Trip VI 2 TripCmd Signal Trip Command V 2 ExBlo1 l Module input state External blocking1 V 2 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 V 2 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command V 3 active Signal active V 3 ExBlo Signal External Blocking V 3 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked V 3 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command V 3 Alarm L1 Signal Alarm L1 V 3 Alarm L2 Signal Alarm L2 V 3 Alarm L3 Signal Alarm L3 V 3 Alarm Signal Alarm voltage stage V 3 Trip L1 Signal General Trip L1 V 3 Trip L2 Signal General Trip L2 V 3 Trip L3 Signal General Trip L3 Page 110 EN MRA4 04 09 Assignment List Name Description V 3 Trip Signal Trip V 3 TripCmd Signal Trip Command V 3 ExBlo1 l M
119. the secondary side VT con This parameter has to be set Phase to Earth Phase to Earth Field Para in order to ensure the correct Ph t assignment of the voltage Ph Rad measurement channels in the aoe device EVT pri Primary nominal voltage of the 60 500000V 10000V Field Para e n winding of the voltage transformers which is only taken into account in the direct measurement of the residual voltage EVT con measured open delta EVT sec Secondary nominal voltage of 35 00 400 00V 100V Field Para EN MRA4 04 09 Page 229 Field Parameters EVT con Method how the residual voltage is to be detected Calculation is only possible if the device is connected to phase to earth voltages Calculated that means that the residual voltage is calculated from the geometrical sum of the phase to neutral voltages WARNING For V connections no calculation of the residual voltage is possible Measured The e n windings are connected to the measuring inputs for the residual voltage open delta The primary and secondary rated data EVT pri and EVT sec of the voltage transformers have to be taken into account Calculation of the residual voltage is only possible if VT con Phase to Earth measured calculated measured Field Para V Block f Threshold for the release of the frequency stages 0 15 1 00Vn 0 5Vn Field Para MTA Maximum Torque Angle Angle between phase current
120. the state of all signals assigned to this LED An arrow symbol points to the LED whose assignments are currently displayed Via the SOFTKEYs up and down you can call up the next previous LED In order to leave the LED menu press the SOFTKEY left multiple times Page 62 EN MRA4 04 09 Navigation Operation 7 C Key To abort changes and to ac knowledge messages In order to reset please press the Softkey wrench and enter the password The reset menu can be left by pressing the Softkey Arrow left 8 RS232 Connection to software Smart MNA Interface view is done via the RS232 PRENS Smart view interface Connection 9 OK Key When using the OK key parameter changes are temporarily stored If the OK key is pressed again those changes are stored definitely EN MRA4 04 09 Page 63 Navigation Operation Basic Menu Control The graphic user interface is equivalent to a hierarchical structured menu tree For access to the individual submenus the SOFTKEYS Navigation Keys are used The function of the SOFTKEYS can be found as symbol in the footer of the display Description e Via SOFTKEY up you will come to the prior menu point one parameter up by scrolling upwards e Via SOFTKEY left you will go one step back e Via SOFTKEY down you will change to the next menu point one pa
121. the voltage measuring inputs has to be set e phase to neutral star e phase to phase Delta respectively V Connection A WARNING Make sure that the tightening torque is 1 Nm 8 85 Ib in The rotating field of your power supply system has to be taken in to account Make sure that the transformer is wired correctly For the V connection the parameter VT con has to be set to phase to phase Please refer to the Technical Data EN MRA4 04 09 Page 33 Installation and Connection MRA4 Terminal Marking gt X4 MRUA Terminal Marking gt X3 Electro mechanical assignment O HTL TU x VL1 1 VL1 2 VL2 1 VL2 2 VL3 1 VL3 2 VE1 1 VE1 2 Page 34 EN MRA4 04 09 Installation and Connection Current Measuring Inputs and Ground Current Measuring Input The device is provided with 4 current measuring inputs three for measuring the phase currents and one for measuring of the earth current Each of the current measuring inputs has a measuring input for 1 A and 5 A The input for earth current measuring either can be connected to a cable type current transformer or alternatively it is possible to connect the summation current path of the phase current transformer to this input Holmgreen connection Current transformers have to be earthed on their secondary side A DANGER y Interrupt
122. to be parameterized Wrong switching thresholds can result in malfunctions wrong signal transfer times The digital inputs are provided with different switching thresholds can be parameterized two AC and five DC input ranges For the six grouped connected to common potential inputs and the two non grouped inputs the following switching levels can be defined 24V DC 48V DC 60V DC 110 V AC DC 230 V AC DC If a voltage gt 80 of the set switching threshold is applied at the digital input the state change is recognized physically 1 If the voltage is below 40 of the set switching threshold the device detects physically 0 The ground terminal has to be connected to the pole when using DC supply Use of the 24 V DC Output is prohibited This output is exclusively for factory testing and commissioning He I A A H s Pena EN MRA4 04 09 Page 27 Installation and Connection MRAA MRU4 MRI4 Terminal Marking gt X1 PE L Power Supply 24 V DC OUT1 COM OUT1 Electro mechanical assignment O HTL NT 1 m i Power Supply 24 V DC OUT1 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 COM OUT1 Page 28 EN MRA4 04 09 Installation and Connection Binary Output Relays The number of the binar
123. to the corresponding global NEMI protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo TripCmd Fc active VE If the pick up value is 0 01 2 00Vn 1Vn Protection Para exceeded the module stage ins will be started V Prot VE 1 t Tripping delay 0 00 300 00s 0 00s Protection Para lt n gt V Prot VE 1 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 365 VE Protection Module Residual Voltage ANSI 59N Residual Voltage Supervision Module Input States Name Description Assignment via ExBlo1 l Module input state External Protection Para RIDGE Global Prot Para V Prot VE 1 ExBlo2 Module input state External Protection Para oo ng Global Prot Para V Prot VE 1 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Protection Para Blocking of the Trip Command Global Prot Para V Prot VE 1 Residual Voltage Supervision Module Signals Output States Name Description active Signal active ExBlo Signal External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command Alarm Signal Alarm Residual Voltage Supervision stage Trip Signal Trip TripCmd Signal Trip Command Page 366 EN MRA4 04 09 VE Protection Module Residual Voltage ANSI 59N Commissioning Residual Voltage Protection Measured ANSI 59N Object to be tested Residual voltage prot
124. too many switching operations AR Service Blo Signal AR Service blocking too many switching operations AR successful Signal Auto Reclosing successful AR failed Signal Auto Reclosing failure AR t dead Signal Dead time between trip and reclosure attempt AR Res Statistics Cr Signal Reset all statistic AR counters Total number of AR successful and unsuccessful no of AR AR Res Service Cr Signal Reset the Service Counters for Alarm and Blocking AR AR Shot No 0 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No AR AR Shot No 1 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No AR AR Shot No 2 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No Page 118 EN MRA4 04 09 Assignment List Name Description AR AR Shot No 3 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No AR AR Shot No 4 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No AR AR Shot No 5 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No AR AR Shot No 6 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No AR in Preparation in Preparation AR ExBlo1 l Module input state External blocking1 AR ExBlo2 l Module input state External blocking2 AR Ex Sync running l Module input state External synchronism signal AR Ready l Module input state CB ready AR 1 FT Signal Fast Trip AR 1 FT Cmd Signal Trip Command for Fast Tripping AR 2 FT Signal Fast Trip AR 2 FT Cmd Signal Trip Command for Fast Tripping AR 3 FT Signal Fast Trip AR 3 FT Cmd Signal Trip Comma
125. will be ii LED acknowledged ds automatically if the LEDs group A event is gone or whether the LED is ILED 1 to be acknowledged by a signal manually Ack signal Acknowledgment 1 n Assignment List Device Para signal for the LED If latching is set to active the LED can only be acknowledged if those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back Dependency Only available if Latched active LEDs LEDs group A LED 1 LED active color The LED lights up in green LEDs group A green Device Para ET Miete red LEDs group B red LEDs assignment of the red flash LEDs group A ignals is true aa green flash LED 1 LED inactive color The LED lights up in green Device Para this color if the state of the OR red LEDs assignment of the red flash LEDs group A ignals i egies Suns green flash LED 1 Assignment 1 Assignment 1 n Assignment List LEDs group A active LEDs group B Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 1 Inverting 1 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal inactive active inactive Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 1 Assignment 2 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 1 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 165 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive
126. will not be misinterpreted Inverting 4 Inverting the input inactive inactive Device Para elie active Digital Inputs DI Slot X1 Group 3 Debouncing time 4 A change of the state of a digital input will only be recognized after the debouncing time has expired become effective Thus wipers will not be misinterpreted no debouncing time 20 ms 50 ms 100 ms no debouncing time Device Para Digital Inputs DI Slot X1 Group 3 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 129 Module Digital Inputs DIs Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Inverting 5 Inverting the input inactive inactive Device Para signa active Digital Inputs DI Slot X1 Group 3 Debouncing time 5 A change of the state of a digital input will only be no debouncing time 20 ms no debouncing time Device Para Digital Inputs recognized after the 50 ms DI Slot X1 debouncing time has expired become 100 ms Group 3 effective Thus wipers will not be misinterpreted Inverting 6 Inverting the input inactive inactive Device Para agnas active Digital Inputs DI Slot X1 Group 3 Debouncing time 6 A change of the state of a digital input will only be no debouncing time 20 ms no debouncing time Device Para Digital Inputs recognized after the 50 ms DI Slot X1 debouncing time has expired become 100 ms Group 3 effective Thus wipers will no
127. with an abrupt change to 0 2 In Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay Successful test result The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays threshold values and fallback ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list Permissible deviations tolerances can be found under Technical Data U I A A r r 45 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 387 PQS Power Protection Module ANSI 32 37 Q N O TI C E Testing the threshold values Example Threshold 0 3 Qn Feed rated voltage and 0 9 times rated current 90 phase shift to the measuring inputs of the relay PF 0 The measured values for the active power Q must show a positive algebraic sign Set the tripping threshold e g 0 3 Qn In order to test the tripping thresholds feed 0 5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay Reduce the current slowly until the relay picks up Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant Compare the tripping value to the parameterized Testing the tripping delay Example Threshold 0 3 Qn Feed rated voltage and 0 9 times rated current 90 phase shift to the measuring inputs of the relay PF 0 The measured values for the active power Q must show a positive algebraic sign Set the tripping threshold e g 0 3 Qn In order to test th
128. with the readings of the measuring instruments The deviation must be according to the technical data N O TI CE When r m s value measuring instruments are used higher deviations can arise if the fed voltage has a very high harmonic content Since the device is provided with a filter for the harmonics only the fundamental oscillation is evaluated exception thermal protection functions If however a r m s value forming measuring instrument is used the harmonics are also measured He I A A r ai EN MRA4 04 09 Page 49 Voltage Transformers Wiring Examples of the Voltage Transformers Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field MRA MCA gt terminal marking X4 MRN4 MRU4 MRF4 gt terminal marking X3 Three phase voltage measurement wiring of the measurement inputs star connection Notice Calculation of the residual voltage VE is possible esc sa sss Page 50 EN MRA4 04 09 Voltage Transformers Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field MRA MCA gt terminal marking X4 MRN4 MRU4 MRF4 gt terminal marking X3 e e L1 1 5 z dm V12 L2 0 le s MER at VL1I VI2 VL3 Three phase voltage measurement wiring of the measurement inputs star connection Measurement of the residual voltage VE via auxilliary windings e n open delta He I A
129. 0 10 00s 0 15s Protection Para Only available if Device alle planning V Mode V t V Prot NT V t 4 Pick up value 0 01 2 00Vn V 1 0 70Vn Protection Para Only available if Device we oe eis planning V Mode V t V 3 0 70Vn V Prot V 4 0 30Vn NT t4 Tripping delay 0 00 10 00s V 1 0 70s Protection Para Only available if Device MISI Una xa planning V Mode V t V 3 0 70s V Prot V 4 0 6s NT V t 5 Pick up value 0 01 2 00Vn 0 90Vn Protection Para Only available if Device Ww planning V Mode V t lt V Prot IN1 t5 Tripping delay 0 00 10 00s 1 50s Protection Para Only available if Device Phe planning V Mode V t V Prot V 1 V t lt 6 Pick up value 0 01 2 00Vn 0 90Vn Protection Para Only available if Device lie planning V Mode V t V Prot V 1 t6 Tripping delay 0 00 10 00s 3 00s Protection Para Only available if Device iss planning V Mode V t V Prot N1 V t 7 Pick up value 0 01 2 00Vn 0 90Vn Protection Para Only available if Device sti planning V Mode V t V Prot V 1 t7 Tripping delay 0 00 10 00s 3 00s Protection Para Only available if Device ole planning V Mode V t V Prot NT EN MRA4 04 09 Page 357 V Protection Module Voltage Protection ANSI 27 59 Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path V t 8 Pick up value 0 01 2 00Vn 0 90Vn Protection Para Only available if D
130. 00 V symmetrically feeded S lt 3 of the setting value resp 0 1 of Sn resetting ratio 103 of setting values or 0 2 W t 1 of the setting value resp 10 ms Operating time lt 5 ms resetting time lt 5 ms PQS Tolerance at 0 8 Vn Vn 100 V symmetrically feeded Pr PF gt 0 5 3 of the setting value resp 0 1 of Sn resetting ratio 97 of Setting values gt 0 07 Sn up to 58 of setting values lt 0 07 Sn t 1 of the setting value resp 10 ms Operating time lt 5 ms resetting time lt 5 ms PQS Tolerance at 0 8 Vn Vn 100 V symmetrically feeded Qr PF gt 0 5 3 of the setting value resp 0 1 of Sn resetting ratio 97 of Setting values gt 0 07 Sn up to 58 of setting values lt 0 07 Sn resp PF gt 0 9 or reset at 1 at PF 20 99 t 1 of the setting value resp 10 ms Operating time lt 5 ms resetting time lt 5 ms EN MRA4 04 09 Page 509 Tolerances We appreciate your comments about the content of our publications Please send comments to kemp doc woodward com Please include the manual number from the front cover of this publication M5 WOODWARD Woodward SEG GmbH amp Co KG Krefelder Weg 47 D 47906 Kempen Germany Postfach 10 07 55 P O Box D 47884 Kempen Germany Phone 49 0 21 52 145 1 Internet
131. 09 Standards Mechanical Tests Test Fc Vibration response test IEC 60068 2 6 IEC 60255 21 1 class 1 10 Hz 59 Hz Displacement 59Hz 150Hz Acceleration Number of cycles in each axis Test Fc Vibration endurance test IEC 60068 2 6 IEC 60255 21 1 class 1 Test Ea Shock tests IEC 60068 2 27 IEC 60255 21 2 class 1 10 Hz 150 Hz Acceleration Number of cycles in each axis Shock response test Shock resistance test Test Eb Shockendurance test IEC 60068 2 29 IEC 60255 21 2 class 1 Test Fe Earthquake test IEC 60068 3 3 KTA 3503 IEC 60255 21 3 class 2 EN MRA4 04 09 Shock endurance test single axis earthquake vibration test 0 035 mm 0 5 gn 1 0 gn 20 5 gn 11 ms 3 impulses in each direction 15 gn 11 ms 3 impulses in each direction 10 gn 16 ms 1000 impulses in each direction 3 7Hz Horizontal 10 mm 1 cycle each axis 935Hz Horizontal 2 gn 1 cycle each axis Page 499 Tolerances Tolerances It has to be observed that the set pickup and release values hysteresis including tolerances are always within the permissible measuring range Real Time Clock Tolerances Resolution Tolerance 1 ms 1 minute month 20 C lt 1ms if synchronized via IRIG B Measured Values Tolerances Phase and Earth Current Measuring Max measuring range Please note Frequency range Accuracy Amplitude error if
132. 10 V AC DC 230 V AC DC min 19 2 V DC max 9 6 V DC Min 42 6 V DC max 21 3 V DC min 88 0 V DC 88 0 V AC max 44 0 V DC 44 0 V AC min 184 V DC 184 V AC max 92 V DC 92 V AC Screw type terminals Page 491 Technical Data Current and Earth Current Measurement Nominal currents 1A 5A Max measuring range up to 40 x In phase currents up to 25 x In earth current standard up to 2 5 x In earth current sensitive Continuous loading capacity 4 x In continuously Overcurrent proof 30 x In 10 s 100 x In 1 s 250 x In 10 ms 1 half wave Power consumption Phase current inputs atIn 1A 20 15 mVA atin 25A 20 15 mVA Earth current input atln 1A 20 35 mVA atIn 5A 20 35 mVA Frequency range 50 Hz 60 Hz 10 Terminals Screw type terminals with integrated short circuiters contacts Voltage and Residual Voltage Measurement Nominal voltages 100 V 110 V 230 V 400 V can be parameterized Max measuring range 2 x nominal voltage Continuous loading capacity 2 x nominal voltage 800V AC Power consumption at Vn 100V S 0 1 mVA at Vn 110 V S 0 1 mVA at Vn 280 V S 0 4 mVA at Vn 400 V S 1 0 mVA Frequency range 50 Hz or 60 Hz 10 Terminals Screw type terminals Frequency Measurement Nominal frequencies 50 Hz 60 Hz prx eH ai Page 492 EN MRA4 04 09 Technical Data Continuous current Max Switch on current Max breaking current
133. 10Jd aayoe 9AInjoeul 0 3A 1 dij Jipuou eueu Jip 91 S 10Jd 0 L PM ID l 101d Y uonoauJip pejoeloJd ui ney aweu lt Jeuonoeuip uou apoyyaweu Buiuuejd eoi eq lu Ei eweu ewww ewww eee cece ec ooo Po ooo Poo cee ewe cece Po oo oo Po wee cece Poo ooo ooo ooo Po P ooo Po Poo Poo ooo Po oo ooo Poo PP oo Poo oo oo oo Poo ooo eee ee eee cere reece weer ewe eee ec ee Poo o eee ee eee cece cee o Poo Poo cece eee tee PP ooo oo ooo ooo ooo o ooo o ooo o o e yne yey uolsio p uono uip EN MRA4 04 09 Page 302 UL SV puigdu euieu du eueu CAD uuejveueu olg cH euieu IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G SiA p eu Aq peijejnojeo eq IM Sepouu jese pue s uun Buiddu siejeuleJed e oqe uo peseg ANI L450 0 pexoo q JO p yenoesp zou puewwod Buiddu s6uyoojq du weibeiq o 1 1849Y se q g euieu Ano O9AIOEUI o g 3A eureu 9I oig ZHI 83 ZHI ueiBeig OL 12494 eseal d Axnoe SAOeU olg ZHI tueu uonoeuJip pejoefoud ui nej tuueu jneJ yes uoisioep uono uip wes6eig o 1842Y esee d 0 L sjeuBis Burjoo q eAnoe ou pue pejeAreep jou s eBeis y S SDunypoojg ueJBeig OL 1942Y esee d r u L ol eureu u L 5I Page 303 EN MRA4 04 09 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G Device Pl
134. 193 Read Out the Fault R Gord er uu u uuu u entis Dome sebum decree neha qhu quqa Qarwi du emi api BauHa wak aa aaa E 194 Read Out the Fault Recorder via Smart View r a 194 Direct Commands of the Fault Recorder Module a nnne nnne nenas 196 Global Protection Parameters of the Fault Recorder Module 196 Fault Recorder Module Input States a a a arse a sese n s 197 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 5 Fault Recorder Module Signals sain uuu aun ua aun waata uc Nest ene Paeae deua deu mr O E QR de D Co pa E pad USE EAR dace 197 MopuLE EVENT RECORDER U I eus S deskxR dea e EE FECI INN Never obGN IS a ceteciessceersseceaeen cuca MENU NEUE 198 Read Out the Event Recorder a a rase ars sa serena ses sa sse as 199 Read Out the Event Recorder via Smart View e e eme e em mee ee e ese rn ran raran 199 Direct Commands of the Event Recorder Module ccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeseees 201 Event Recorder Module Signals a a arrsa inna se satanas rsen ns 201 MopulE SCADA LO 20
135. 2 I 3 Trip L3 Signal General Trip L3 I 3 Trip Signal Trip I 3 TripCmd Signal Trip Command I 3 DefaultSet Signal Default Parameter Set I 3 AdaptSet 1 Signal Adaptive Parameter 1 I 3 AdaptSet 2 Signal Adaptive Parameter 2 I 3 AdaptSet 3 Signal Adaptive Parameter 3 I 3 AdaptSet 4 Signal Adaptive Parameter 4 I 3 ExBlo1 l Module input state External blocking1 I 3 ExBlo2 l Module input state External blocking2 I 3 ExBlo TripCmd I Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command I 3 Ex rev Interl Module input state External reverse interlocking I 3 AdaptSet1 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter1 I 3 AdaptSet2 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter2 I 3 AdaptSet3 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter3 I 3 AdaptSet4 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter4 I 4 active Signal active I 4 ExBlo Signal External Blocking I 4 Ex rev Interl Signal External reverse Interlocking I 4 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked I 4 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command I 4 1H2 Blo Signal Blocking the trip command by an inrush I 4 Alarm L1 Signal Alarm L1 I 4 Alarm L2 Signal Alarm L2 I 4 Alarm L3 Signal Alarm L3 I 4 Alarm Signal Alarm I 4 Trip L1 Signal General Trip L1 I 4 Trip L2 Signal General Trip L2 I 4 Trip L3 Signal General Trip L3 I 4 Trip Signa
136. 2 Trip L3 Signal General Trip L3 I 2 Trip Signal Trip I 2 TripCmd Signal Trip Command I 2 DefaultSet Signal Default Parameter Set I 2 AdaptSet 1 Signal Adaptive Parameter 1 I 2 AdaptSet 2 Signal Adaptive Parameter 2 I 2 AdaptSet 3 Signal Adaptive Parameter 3 I 2 AdaptSet 4 Signal Adaptive Parameter 4 I 2 ExBlo1 I Module input state External blocking1 2 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 I 2 ExBlo TripCmd I Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command 2 Ex rev Interl Module input state External reverse interlocking I 2 AdaptSet1 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter1 I 2 AdaptSet2 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter2 I 2 AdaptSet3 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter3 I 2 AdaptSet4 I Module input state Adaptive Parameter4 I 3 active Signal active I 3 ExBlo Signal External Blocking I 3 Ex rev Interl Signal External reverse Interlocking I 3 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked I 3 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command I 3 1H2 Blo Signal Blocking the trip command by an inrush I 3 Alarm L1 Signal Alarm L1 I 3 Alarm L2 Signal Alarm L2 I 3 Alarm L3 Signal Alarm L3 I 3 Alarm Signal Alarm I 3 Trip L1 Signal General Trip L1 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 103 Assignment List Name Description I 3 Trip L2 Signal General Trip L
137. 2 Device Planning Parameters of the Serial Scada Interface a 202 Global Protection Parameters of the Serial Scada Interface 202 MopuLE Mopgus Lio ioi rs eR RN n0 nnan 203 Modbus Protocol Configuration r raras nennen nnn nnne sese rennen nnn ns 203 22099154415 E 204 ioco ML EEEE E NEEE TE EINE ATE 205 Direct Commands of the ModbusQ ssssssssssssssssssseseen enne nnne nnne nnne nnne nnne rsen nsns nnne nnn nnn ns 206 Global Protection Parameters of the Modbuse a rra rrrrrrsssrsssssissssaa 206 Modbus Module Signals Output States a r rarrsrssssssrssssssissisasssa 208 Modbus ore D SR ValigS u uuu wag 209 MopuLE zs Auc m 210 IEC60870 5 103 Protocol Configuration nennen nnne nennen nnne nennen 210 Global Protection Parameters of the IEC60870 5 103 212 IEC60870 5 103 Module Signals Output States a a
138. 235 Blockings Bupioo q KjueJoduis Buryoo q Bupioo q Bupioo q Bupioo q Kjue1oduio llue1oduu llue1oduu Ajlsesodw9 Bulyoo q llue1oduu 5 pui9du og Ddi uolsio p oig zHr x 34 H vulA 4x3a xX I uonound x i 24 olglx3 o1d uonound30Jd d uo1 2 11 p x Buruuejd 91 q 24 ol gx3 x i pwdu orgxarIx i Tripping criterion fulfilled for l How could the trip command be blocked EN MRA4 04 09 Page 236 Blockings Dupioolq Dupioolq KjueJoduJe jueJoduuos Dupioolq KjueJoduJa AASA uonoun d x A uonoun 4 30Jd 94 _ puodul og IXIA 93 oigxar x A 94 olgx3 oid pwodiy ojaxar x A Tripping criterion fulfilled for V How could the trip command be blocked Page 237 EN MRA4 04 09 Blockings To Activate or Deactivate the Tripping Command of a Protection Module Il pu2duj ojgxq aueu puoduio gxq eueu CO puodiuj o g eueu I pu2di 0 8X3 101d g puodul olgx3 101d pu odul o g 101d P js 11ueuuDissy u puodij o gx3 eueu 9Al 2e 9A 2 Ul 94 pwd ojgxgeweu js JUawuBissy u Du Odi 1 ogx3 0Jg 8N 98 eAnoe 9Al 2 eul puoduj ojg eueu 9A 9e 9AIl 2 P Ul pu Odi 1 o g 01d e qeyoo q eje Jeu s jnpow e eueu sbuiyoo q dii EN MRA4 04 09 Page 238 Blockings Activate Deactivate Respectively Block Temporarily Protection Functions sr1 1u uuuBissv u Zojgxy eui
139. 4 EN MRA4 04 09 Binary Output Relays Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Acknowledgment Acknowledgment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Signal An l acknowledgment Binary Outputs signal that BO Slot X2 acknowledges the corresponding binary BO 3 output relay can be assigned to each output relay The acknowledgment signal is only effective if the parameter Latched is set to active Only available if Latched active Inverting Inverting of the inactive inactive Device Para pat SUPUERE AN active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 Assignment 1 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para of the assigned I signal active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 Assignment 2 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para 2 on EOS active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 Assignment 3 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para of the assigned l signal active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 145 Binary Output Relays Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu p
140. 4 gt terminal marking X3 L1 L2 L3 Two phase voltage measurement wiring of the measuring inputs V connection Notice Calculation of the residual voltage VE is not possible EN MRA4 04 09 Page 55 Connection Examples Voltage and Current Transformers Connection Examples Voltage and Current Transformers Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field L3 L2 SES zl 1 oo l L1 L3 No T V23 VL1 VI2 VI3 va Ee yp n VLI VL2 VL3 r a r N lll o 4 NON I II2 e lt 1 a L3 _ gt lt 3 2 i u Three phase current measurement In secondary 1 A Earth current measuring via Holmgreen connection IGnom secondary 1 A Three phase voltage measurement wiring of the measurement inputs star connection Measurement of the residual voltage VE via auxilliary windings e n open delta Notice Measuring of VE and IG is possible Notice Not recommended for isolated and compensated networks racc 0 0 Page 56 EN MRA4 04 09 Connection Examples Voltage and Current Transformers Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field L3 L2 Lo IL2 2 lL2 gt Ring Core Type Current Transformer Measures the ground current Sum of the S three phase currents Can NI be used for measuring the SS n earth current in is
141. 4 04 09 1272 Protection Module Unbalanced Load Protection ANSI 46 Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Char Characteristic DEFT DEFT Protection Para INV lt n gt Prot 2 gt 1 t Tripping delay 0 00 300 00s 0 00s Protection Para Only available if oie Characteristic Prot DEFT i2 1 K Indicates the thermal 1 0 200 0 10 0 Protection Para load capability of the I lt n gt engine while running with 100 Prot unbalanced load current A22 1 Only available if Characteristic INV T cool If the unbalanced 0 0 60000 0 0 0 Protection Para load current falls below the pick up value the cooling off time is taken into account If the unbalanced load exceeds the pick up value again than the saved heat within the electrical equipment Will lead to an accelerated trip Only available if Characteristic INV lt n gt l Prot 122 1 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 327 1272 Protection Module Unbalanced Load Protection ANSI 46 Unbalanced Load Module Input States Name Description Assignment via ExBlo1 l Module input state External Protection Para RIDGE Global Prot Para Prot I2 2 1 ExBlo2 Module input state External Protection Para oo ng Global Prot Para Prot I22 1 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Protection Para Blocking of the Trip Command Global
142. 4 09 Page 325 1272 Protection Module Unbalanced Load Protection ANSI 46 Setting Group Parameters of the Unbalanced Load Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Function Permanent activation inactive inactive Protection Para or deactivation of ii ieis module stage eue Prot 12 gt 1 ExBlo Fc Activate allow or inactive inactive Protection Para inactivate disallow active lt n gt blocking of the module stage This Prot parameter is only effective if a signal is I22 1 assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo Fc active Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking _ inactive inactive Protection Para of the Trip Command of the module stage Prot 2 gt 1 active lt n gt ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate allow or inactive inactive Protection Para inactivate disallow blocking of the module stage This Prot parameter is only effective if a signal is I22 1 assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo TripCmd Fc active active lt n gt I2 If the pick up value is 0 01 4 00In 0 01In Protection Para exceeded the module stage will be started Prot 2 gt 1 lt n gt Ee ee ee Page 326 EN MRA
143. 5 3 t t char s t I 2 s r In 1x10 10 10 t s t char 1 10 5 0 1 n 1 0 on 0 05 95 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 x In multiples of the nominal current sz usa zz zz u as lt snrs III sss Page 272 EN MRA4 04 09 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 l4T Notice A Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and instantaneous Reset Trip x t 5 O t char s t M t char s r L 1x10 10 10 t s t char l 10 0 1 9 2 m 1 0 0 5 0 05 0 01 0 01 0 1 l 10 100 x In multiples of the nominal current U I A A U s EN MRA4 04 09 Page 273 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 9SJ9 9J ejqissod jou ssod u JIP 104d os19 01 94 JIP 10Jd pueMu0J PM JIp 04d arso iouigui eBeyoA 0 V LIN I
144. 5 Softkeys The function of the mE EN mE MN SOFTKEYS are contextual On the bottom line of the display the present function is displayed symbolized Possible functions are Navigation e Parameter decrement increment Scrolling up down a menu page e Moving to a digit e Change into the parameter setting mode wrench symbol EN MRA4 04 09 Page 61 Navigation Operation INFO Key Looking through the present ino ges select key can be actuated at Signals Messa LED assignment The direct any time If the INFO key is actuated once the Lert LED sicNALs are inserted if the INFO key is actuated again the rRicht LED SIGNALS are inserted If the INFO key is actuated again you will leave the LED menu Here only the first assignments of the LEDs will be shown Every three seconds the SOFTKEYs will be shown flashing Displaying the multiple Assignments If the INFO Button is pressed only the first assignments of any LED is shown Every three seconds the SOFTKEYs will be shown flashing If there is more than one signal assigned to a LED indicated by three dots you can check the state of the multiple assignments if you proceed as follows In order to show all multiple assignments select a LED by means of the SOFTKEYs up and down Via the Softkey right call up a Submenu of this LED that gives you detailed information on
145. 50ms Release time 40 50Hz lt 85ms 50 0Hz lt 75ms V Block f 1 5 of the setting value resp 1 Un resetting ratio 103 or 0 5 x Un Rate of Change of Frequency df dt Tolerance df dt 100 mHz per Second t 1 bzw 10 ms Kommandozeit lt 40 ms Anregezeit Ruckfallzeit lt 40 ms Vector surge delta phi Tolerance delta phi 0 5 1 30 at Vn and fn Operating time lt 40 ms Circuit Breaker Failure Protection CBF Tolerance I CBF gt 1 5 of the setting value resp 1 In resetting ratio t CBF 1 resp 10 ms Operating time lt 40 ms Starting from higher than 1 3 x CBF gt Release time lt 40 ms Page 506 EN MRA4 04 09 Tolerances Trip Circuit Supervision TCS Tolerance t TCS 1 resp 10 ms Current Transformer Supervision CTS Tolerance Al 2 of the setting value resp 1 5 In resetting ratio 94 t 1 resp 10 ms Voltage Transformer Supervision VTS Tolerance AV 2 of the setting value resp 1 5 Vn resetting ratio 94 t 1 resp 10 ms Asymmetry VO12 x Tolerance V1 2 of the setting value resp 1 5 Vn resetting ratio Vi lt resetting ratio V2 resetting ratio 97 or 0 5 x Vn 2 of the setting value resp 1 5 Vn 103 or 0 5 x Vn 2 of the
146. 9796 below the trip value and check the fallback ratio Successful test result The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays threshold values and fallback ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list Permissible deviations tolerances can be found under Technical Data HEC I ED I A aaa EN MRA4 04 09 Page 285 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 Commissioning Overcurrent Protection directional ANSI 67 Object to be tested For each directional overcurrent element 1 6 are to be measured the total tripping time recommendation or alternatively tripping delays and the fallback ratios each time 3 x single phase and 1 x three phase N O TI CE Especially in Holmgreen connections wiring errors can happen easily and these are then detected safely By measuring the total tripping time it can be ensured that the secondary wiring is o k from the terminal on up to the trip coil of the CB N O TI CE It is recommended to measure the total tripping time instead of the tripping time The tripping delay should be specified by the customer The total tripping time is measured at the position signaling contacts of the CBs not at the relay output Total tripping time 7 tripping delay please refer to the tolerances of the protection stages CB operating time about 50 ms Please take the CB switching times
147. Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para E h E USES active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 Assignment 6 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 Inverting 6 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para 2 b cn active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 Page 150 EN MRA4 04 09 Binary Output Relays Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Assignment 7 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 Inverting 7 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para M M asse active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 t hold To clearly identify the 0 00 300 00s 0 03s Device Para state transition of a Binarv Outputs binary output relay M dais s the new state is BO Slot X2 being hold at least for the duration of BO 6 the hold time Latched Defines whether the inactive inactive Device Para peta cubic active Binary Outputs acknowledged BO Slot X2 automatically if the event is gone or BO 6 whether the Binary Output Relay is to be acknowledged by a signal manually Acknowledgment Acknowledgment 1 n Assignment List Device Para oignal An Bi Output acknowledgment r cci dum signal that BO Slot X2 acknowledges the corresponding binary BO 6 output relay can be assigned to each output relay
148. Command PF 1 Alarm Signal Alarm Power Factor PF 1 Trip Signal Trip Power Factor PF 1 TripCmd Signal Trip Command PF 1 Compensator Signal Compensation Signal PF 1 Impossible Signal Alarm Power Factor Impossible PF 1 ExBlo1 I Module input state External blocking PF 1 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking PF 1 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command PF 2 active Signal active PF 2 ExBlo Signal External Blocking PF 2 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked PF 2 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command PF 2 Alarm Signal Alarm Power Factor PF 2 Trip Signal Trip Power Factor PF 2 TripCmd Signal Trip Command PF 2 Compensator Signal Compensation Signal PF 2 Impossible Signal Alarm Power Factor Impossible PF 2 ExBlo1 I Module input state External blocking PF 2 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking PF 2 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command AR active Signal active AR ExBlo Signal External Blocking AR CB ON Cmd Signal CB switch ON Command AR Abort Blo Signal AR The AR was aborted or blocked by an active function of the menu Abort AR running Signal Auto Reclosing running AR t Superv Signal AR Supervision blocking time AR Service Alarm Signal AR Alarm
149. Command for Fast Tripping 3 FT Signal Fast Trip 3 FT Cmd Signal Trip Command for Fast Tripping 4 FT Signal Fast Trip 4 FT Cmd Signal Trip Command for Fast Tripping o FT Signal Fast Trip 5 FT Cmd Signal Trip Command for Fast Tripping 6 FT Signal Fast Trip 6 FT Cmd Signal Trip Command for Fast Tripping EN MRA4 04 09 Page 435 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 Setting Group Parameters of the AR Abort Functions the state of the assigned signal is true If the state of this function is true the AR will be aborted Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path abort 1 Abort the AR cycle if AbortFct Protection Para the state of the I lt n gt assigned signal is true If the state of AR this function is true the AR will be AbortF ct aborted abort 2 Abort the AR cycle if AbortFct Protection Para the state of the I lt n gt assigned signal is true If the state of AR this function is true the AR will be AbortF ct aborted abort 3 Abort the AR cycle if AbortFct Protection Para the state of the I lt n gt assigned signal is true If the state of AR this function is true the AR will be AbortF ct aborted abort 4 Abort the AR cycle if AbortFct Protection Para the state of the n assigned signal is true If the state of AR this function is true the AR will be AbortF ct aborted abort 5 Abort
150. Commands of the Automatic Reclosure Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Res TotNo suc Reset all statistic AR inactive inactive Operation unsuc counters Total number of AR active Reset successful and unsuccessful no of AR Res Service Cr Reset the Service inactive inactive Operation Counters l active Reset in Preparation in Preparation inactive inactive Operation active Reset Device Planning Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure Parameter Description Options Default Menu path Mode Mode do not use use Device planning use EN MRA4 04 09 Page 423 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 Global Protection Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure synchronism Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path ExBlo1 External blocking of the 1 n Assignment List Protection Para module if blocking is activated allowed within a Global Prot Para parameter set and if the IAR state of the assigned signal is true ExBlo2 External blocking of the 1 n Assignment List Protection Para module if blocking is activated allowed within a Global Prot Para parameter set and if the IAR state of the assigned signal is true Ex Sync Signal that indicates the 1 n Assignment List Protection Para Global Prot Para AR CB Pos Detect Criterion by which the Circuit Breaker Sw
151. D 4 LED4 3 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 4 LED4 4 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 4 LED4 5 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 4 Acknow Sig 4 Module input state Acknowledgment Signal only for automatic acknowledgment Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 4 LEDS Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 5 LED5 2 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 5 LED5 3 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 5 LED5 4 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 5 LED5 5 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 5 Page 180 EN MRA4 04 09 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs Name Description Assignment via Acknow Sig 5 Module input state Acknowledgment Signal only for automatic acknowledgment Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 5 LED6 1 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 6 LED6 2 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 6 LED6 3 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 6 LED6 4 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 6 LED6 5 M
152. Date in menu View Smart view is able to record more events than the device itself if the window of the event recorder is opened and Automatic Up Date is set to active He I A TSF EN MRA4 04 09 Page 199 Module Event Recorder Via the print menu you can export the data into a file Please proceed as N O TI CE Hin i Call up the data as described above Call up the menu File Print Choose Print Actual Working Window within the popup Press the gt Print lt button Press the gt Export to File lt button Enter a file name Choose a location where to save the file Confirm the Save button p A r s M M Page 200 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Event Recorder Direct Commands of the Event Recorder Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Reset all rec Reset all records inactive inactive Operation active Reset Event Recorder Module Signals Name Description Reset all records Signal All records deleted EN MRA4 04 09 Page 201 Module SCADA Module SCADA X103 Device Planning Parameters of the Serial Scada Interface Parameter Description Options Default Menu path Protocol Caution Changing Modbus Device planning the protocol will Modb cause a restart of nee the device IEC 103 Global Protection Parameters of the
153. Device Para acknowledged if the state of the assigned signal becomes true Ex Acknowledge Page 478 EN MRA4 04 09 Device Parameters secondary or per unit values Primary values Secondary values Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Scaling Display of the measured Per unit values Per unit Device Para values as primary values Measurem Display EN MRA4 04 09 Page 479 Device Parameters System Module Input States Name Description Assignment via Ack LED I Module input state LEDs Device Para acknowledgment by digital input Ex Acknowledge Ack BO Module input state Device Para Acknowledgment of the binary ey acknowledge Ack Scada l Module input state Acknowledge Device Para SCADA Ea e Ex Acknowledge device is to be reset PS1 l State of the module input Protection Para especialy fine signal hal PSe Switch Setting Group PS2 l State of the module input Protection Para especialy ine signal that JPSet Switch Setting Group PS3 l State of the module input Protection Para especialy fine signa thet IPSetSwtoh Setting Group PS4 State of the module input Protection Para respectively of the signal that should activate this Parameter Setting Group PSet Switch Page 480 EN MRA4 04 09 Device Parameters System Module Signals Name Descr
154. Earth current protection Stage IG 2 Earth current protection Stage IG 3 Earth current protection Stage IG 4 Earth current protection Stage I22 1 Unbalanced Load Stage 127 2 Unbalanced Load Stage ExP 1 External Protection Module ExP 2 External Protection Module ExP 3 External Protection Module ExP 4 External Protection Module He I A ss EN MRA4 04 09 Page 439 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 Commissioning Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 Object to be tested AR function of a current protective function Necessary means e Current source or if the protection is directional current and voltage source e Timer Procedure Supervision time gt start time gt longest tripping time of an AR current protective function Supervision time and start time are parameterized via the AR function The tripping time is parameterized via the protective function e Switch the CB on e Wait until the blocking time t Superv has expired The supervision time ensures that the AR wont be started after a manual switch on of the CB Feed trip causing currents e As soon as the trip occurs switch the current off immediately e After expiry of the dead time the CB should reclose N O TI C E Only tripping commands that are given within the active time of the AR will activate the function reclosure attempts Therefore make sure that the tripping ti
155. G 1 AdaptSet 3 Signal Adaptive Parameter 3 IG 1 AdaptSet 4 Signal Adaptive Parameter 4 IG 1 ExBlo1 I Module input state External blocking1 IG 1 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 Page 106 EN MRA4 04 09 Assignment List Name Description IG 1 ExBlo TripCmd Module input state Command External Blocking of the Trip IG 1 Ex rev Interl l Module input state External reverse interlocking IG 1 AdaptSet1 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter1 IG 1 AdaptSet2 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter2 IG 1 AdaptSet3 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter3 IG 1 AdaptSet4 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter4 IG 2 active Signal active IG 2 ExBlo Signal External Blocking IG 2 Ex rev Interl Signal External reverse Interlocking IG 2 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked IG 2 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command IG 2 Alarm Signal Alarm IG IG 2 Trip Signal Trip IG 2 TripCmd Signal Trip Command IG 2 GH2 Blo Signal blocked by an inrush IG 2 DefaultSet Signal Default Parameter Set IG 2 AdaptSet 1 Signal Adaptive Parameter 1 IG 2 AdaptSet 2 Signal Adaptive Parameter 2 IG 2 AdaptSet 3 Signal Adaptive Parameter 3 IG 2 AdaptSet 4 Signal Adaptive Parameter 4 IG 2 ExBlo1 I Module input state External blocking1 IG 2 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2
156. L go dur do L lt LI puiodu1 3 g9 puuodu euieu a L F uu puuodu euieu ar di3 je19u6D e o peal IM ejnpouJ uono loid pezuoujne di eAnoe ue Jo di yoeg eureu ao dua Page 253 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Trip Control TripControl Direct Commands of the Trip Control Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Ack TripCmd Acknow TripCmd inactive inactive Operation active Acknowledge Res TripCmd Cr Resetting of the inactive inactive Operation Counter total t Reset number of trip nds commands Res Sum trip Reset summation of inactive inactive Operation the tripping currents OPUS Reset Global Protection Parameters of the Trip Control Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path t TripCmd Minimum hold time 0 1 10 0s 0 2s Protection Para of the OFF command circuit Global Prot Para breaker load break CB itch d ICB TripLogic Latched Defines whether the inactive inactive Protection Para cdd k La active Global Prot Para acknowledged CB automatically if the event is gone or CB TripLogic whether the Binary Output Relay is to be acknowledged by a signal manually Ack TripCmd Acknow TripCmd 1 n Assignment List Protection Para Global Prot Para CB CB TripLogic tmax OFF Within this time the 0 00 10 00s 0 10s Protection Para OFF command has to be carried out by the CB Within this
157. MMENTS ON THE MARNURL 2 523355 22d PabrRcuu EO cisusPa chc DusFrbriuUksa Dres uiRarcx D acabra faa Se UN Ra RR Dazu SP sprDR RN N e DUG PR RR RATMES 11 Information Concerning Liability and Warranty ssssesssssssssesesseeen ener nnn nna nn nnns 11 IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS U u u u 12 Scope of Delivery c 16 site c 16 I poli IIE ONIN Olun uuu u u E E E EE E E E EE EEEE E E mmm 16 OVD OS ee E E S EE E A AS E A E E E E EA 17 DEVICE aia ents av av ng ev tsi ei A E OE E E E E E A 21 Bedam 21 Device Planning Parameters of the Device a rra nnn nnne n nnne sra snas 22 INSTAL CATION AND CONNECTION U Ex INFO 23 ri e6e SIirje yViSWu uuu 23 lol o Di i uu secrete meant uuu u EE Qua a na aa ss 24 ASSemDIY GOUD S uu lll a 25 SAIN Of NETTE uu 26 Power Supply and Digital Inputs TEM 27 Pi YO L P T uushapa u 29 Bere Ba i u UM 31 VONAGE Measuring INPUTS ERR
158. MRA4 Device Planning Planning of a device means to reduce the functional range to a degree that suits the protection task to be fulfilled i e the device shows only those functions you really need If you for example deactivate the voltage protection function all parameter branches related to this function do not appear in the parameter tree any more All corresponding events signals etc will be deactivated too By this the parameter trees become very transparent Planning also involves adjustment of all basic system data frequency etc A WARNING But it has to be taken into account that by deactivating for instance protective functions you also change the functionality of the device If you cancel the directional feature of the overcurrent protections then the device no longer trips in a directional way but merely in a non directional way The manufacturer does not accept liability for any personal or material damage as a result of wrong planning A planning service is also offered by Woodward SEG Beware of inadvertent deactivating protective functions modules If you are deactivating modules within the device planning all parameters of those modules will be set on default If you are activating one of these modules again all parameters of those reactivated modules will be set on default Page 21 EN MRA4 04 09 Device Device Planning Parameters of the Device Parameter Description Options Default Menu p
159. MS WOODWARD M5 wooDWARD i K a E E 5 MRA4 HighPROTEC Feeder Protection Device Manual DOK HB MRA4E MRA4 Functional Overview MRA4 Measured and calculated values V VE V012 I IG f q L delta phi theta IH2 IGH2 1012 P Q S PF cos phi W SOTF W CLPU I 1 Fault recorder 4 Disturbance recorder o option standard Emp P Vsa Page 2 EN MRA4 04 09 Order Code Directional Feeder Protection MRA4 yt gt gt Be C5 o 5 og eg 2 oO Of Bot I 35 8 y B2 A 16 13 B D Hardware variant 2 Standard 0 Housing and mounting Door mounting Door mounting 19 flush mounting Communication protocol Protocol without protocol RS485 terminals Modbus RTU IEC60870 5 103 IEC61850 prepared Hardware interface Ethernet 100 MB RJ45 connector Optic fiber Modbus RTU IEC60870 5 103 RS485 D SUB Modbus RTU IEC60870 5 103 Pre setting from available menu languages Standard English German r gt ANSI 30 91 67 SON S ITIN 67 N 40 49 27 59 SON 8llU O OOFL 7e 85 SOBF AIC 81R 78 T Additional cost for the software update tool IEC 1850 per device The devices can be updated via device front interface R5232 and PC locally Expected availability 01 01 2010 He I A A Muni EN MRA4 04 09 Page 3 CO
160. Module input state External blocking1 f 5 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 f 5 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command f 6 active Signal active 6 ExBlo Signal External Blocking f 6 Blo by V lt Signal Module is blocked by undervoltage f 6 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked f 6 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command f 6 Alarm f Signal Alarm Frequency Protection f 6 Alarm df dt DF DT Alarm instantaneous or average value of the rate of frequency change f 6 Alarm delta phi Signal Alarm Vector Surge f 6 Alarm Signal Alarm Frequency Protection collective signal f 6 Trip f Signal Frequency has exceeded the limit f 6 Trip df dt DF DT Signal Trip df dt or DF DT f 6 Trip delta phi Signal Trip delta phi f 6 Trip Signal Trip Frequency Protection collective signal f 6 TripCmd Signal Trip Command f 6 ExBlo1 l Module input state External blocking1 f 6 ExBlo2 Module input state External blocking2 f 6 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command V 012 1 active Signal active V 012 1 ExBlo Signal External Blocking V 012 1 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked V 012 1 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command V 012 1 Alar
161. N the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo Fc active Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the inactive inactive Protection Para Trip Command of the ii jk module stage SV i V Prot NT ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate allow or inactive inactive Protection Para inactivate disallow ii jue blocking of the Eier module stage This V Prot parameter is only effective Vl Meas Mode Measuring Supervision Phase to Earth Phase to Earth Protection Para Mode Determines if the phase to phase or phase Phase to Phase Psp to earth voltages are to be V Prot supervisioned MAT Alarm Mode Alarm criterion for the 1 ph Trip 1 ph Trip Protection Para voltage protection stage 3 ph Trip you IN Prot 1 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 355 V Protection Module Voltage Protection ANSI 27 59 Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path V Pick up value 0 01 2 00Vn V 1 1 1Vn Protection Para Only available if Device wie Ie We planning V Mode V gt V 3 1 20Vn V Prot V 4 1 20Vn NT V Pick up value 0 01 2 00Vn V 1 0 80Vn Protection Para Only available if Device Men pale planning V Mode V lt V 3 0 80Vn V Prot Only available if Device f planning V Mode V t lt VI4 0 80Vn NTN VTS Blo Blocking if a voltage inactive inactive Protection Para transformer failu
162. N G 67N G Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path AdaptSet 1 Assignment AdaptSet Protection Para Adaptive Parameter Global Prot Para Prot AG 1 AdaptSet 2 Assignment AdaptSet Protection Para Saale Parameter Global Prot Para Prot AG 1 AdaptSet 3 Assignment AdaptSet Protection Para oe Parameter IGlobal Prot Para Prot AG 1 AdaptSet 4 Assignment AdaptSet Protection Para Adaptive Parameter 4 Global Prot Para Prot G 1 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 305 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G Setting Group Parameters of the Ground Fault Protection Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Function Permanent activation inactive inactive Protection Para or deactivation of ii ieis module stage eue Prot IG 1 ExBlo Fc Activate allow or inactive inactive Protection Para inactivate disallow active lt n gt blocking of the module stage This Prot parameter is only effective if a signal is AG assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo Fc active Ex rev Interl Fc Activate allow or inactive inactive Protection Para inactivate disallow blocking of the module stage This Prot parameter is onl effective if a Sandi S AG 1 assigned to the corresponding globa
163. N MRA4 04 09 Page 453 TCS Supervision Module Trip Circuit Supervision ANSI 74TC Connection example Trip circuit supervision with two CB auxiliary contacts O LU O oO an C D I L x to Uo 2 o O 0 S E 9 c E o Qc lt Ze D m 2 i 2 i o UO c o E O c o Et ut o i o I I I I L TCS em mus s up nv ss ia svsnuBa a lsusiwiiisr mw aI r sw ri Page 454 EN MRA4 04 09 TCS Supervision Module Trip Circuit Supervision ANSI 74 TC Sog ueBDeuelv go 9 8d Sod go uJev SOL sjeuBis Burjoo g eAnoe ou pue pejeAnoeep jou s eDejsS sBunpolg ueJBeig oL 1943Y Seld Page 455 EN MRA4 04 09 TCS Supervision Module Trip Circuit Supervision ANSI 74 TC Device Planning Parameters of the Trip Circuit Supervision Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu path Mode Mode do not use use Device planning use Page 456 EN MRA4 04 09 TCS Supervision Module Trip Circuit Supervision ANSI 74 TC Global Protection Parameters of the Trip Circuit Supervision Module the module if blocking is activated allowed within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path ExBlo1 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Globa
164. NING The housing must be carefully grounded Connect a ground cable 4 to 6 mm AWG 12 10 1 7 Nm 15 Ib in to the housing using the screw which is marked with the ground symbol at the rear side of the device The power supply card needs a separate ground connection 2 5 mm AWG 14 at terminal X1 0 55 Nm 4 9 Ib in pem I A A J SnmH EN MRA4 04 09 Page 25 Installation and Connection Grounding A WARNING The housing must be carefully grounded Connect a ground cable 4 to 6 mm AWG 12 10 1 7 Nm 15 Ib in to the housing using the screw which is marked with the ground symbol at the rear side of the device The power supply card needs a separate ground connection 2 5 mm AWG 14 at terminal X1 0 55 Nm 4 9 Ib in CAUTION The devices are very sensitive to electro static discharges Page 26 EN MRA4 04 09 Installation and Connection Power Supply and Digital Inputs A WARNING Make sure that the tightening torque is 0 55 Nm 4 9 Ib in This assembly group comprises a wide range power supply unit 6 digital inputs grouped 2 digital inputs non grouped 24V DC for options with Woodward SEG Devices only Auxiliary voltage supply e he aux voltage inputs wide range power supply unit are non polarized The device could be provided with AC or DC voltage Digital inputs For each digital input group the related voltage input range has
165. OTICE 1 Measurement of all three phase currents are applied to the measuring inputs of the device 2 The earth current is detected via a cable type transformer not in Holmgreen connection Object to be tested Check of the CT supervision by comparing the calculated with the measured earth current Necessary means e hree phase current source Procedure part 1 e Set the limiting value of the CTS to delta 0 1 In e Feed a three phase symmetrical current system approx nominal current to the secondary side e Disconnect the current of one phase from one of the measuring inputs the symmetrical feeding at secondary side has to be maintained e Make sure that the signal CTS ALarm is generated now Successful test result part 1 The signal CTS ALarm is generated Procedure part 2 e Feed a three phase symmetrical current system approx nominal current to the secondary side e Feed a current that is higher than the threshold value for the measuring circuit supervision to the earth current measuring input e Ascertain that the signal CTS Atarm is generated now Successful test result part 2 The signal CTS ALarm is generated prx ESSE e Page 466 EN MRA4 04 09 VTS Supervision Module Voltage Transformer Supervision ANSI 60FL VTS Supervision Module Voltage Transformer Supervision ANSI 60FL Available stages VTS Supervision of the voltage transformers VTs by a digital input The mod
166. Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 BO3 2 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 155 Binary Output Relays Name Description Assignment via BO3 3 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 BO3 4 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 BO3 5 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 BO3 6 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 BO3 7 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 Ack signal BO 3 Module input state Acknowledgment signal for the binary output relay If latching is set to active the binary output relay can only be acknowledged if those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back and the hold time is expired Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 BO4 1 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 BO4 2 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 BO4 3 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 Page 156 EN MRA4 04 09 Binary Output Relays Name Description Assignment via BO4 4 Module
167. P e Gs i Page 472 EN MRA4 04 09 VTS Supervision Module Voltage Transformer Supervision ANSI 60FL Commissioning Voltage Transformer Failure ANSI 60FL N O T CE Precondition 1 The residual voltage is measured via the residual voltage measuring input 2 Phase voltages are applied to the voltage measuring inputs no line to line voltages N O TI CE Calculation of the residual voltage is only possible if phase voltages star were applied to the voltage measuring inputs and VT con phase to neutral and EVT con calculated were set in the field parameters Object to be tested Check of the VT supervision by comparing the calculated residual voltage with the measured one It is to be tested whether VE23xVO Necessary means 4 channel voltage source 3 1 Procedure part 1 Set the limiting value of the VT supervision to AV O 1 Vn e Feed a three phase symmetrical voltage system nominal voltage in to the secondary side e Disconnect the voltage of one phase at one of the measuring inputs symmetrical feeding at the secondary side has to be maintained e Make sure that the signal VTS ALarm is generated now Successful test result part 1 The signal VTS Atarm is generated Procedure part 2 e Feed a three phase symmetrical voltage system to the secondary side nominal current e Feed a voltage of about 20 Un in to the measuring input of the residual voltage e Make sure that t
168. Parameters of the Module a rasara rsrsrsrsrsssrsssssssasa 277 Setting Group Parameters of the Module a aaarasrrrsrsrsssssssssssssisssaaa 279 IMG ii L ei NIENTE 283 Module Signals Output States nnne a aaa arar rsrsssssssssssssssssa 284 Commissioning Overcurrent Protection non directional ANSI 50 51 285 Commissioning Overcurrent Protection directional ANSI 67 286 IG PRorEcrioN MopuLE GRousNp Faurr ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G 287 Device Planning Parameters of the Ground Fault Protection 304 Global Protection Parameters of the Ground Fault Protection 304 Setting Group Parameters of the Ground Fault Protection enne 306 Ground Fault Protection Input States an e dein ese aan oa tet edad ese zaddssauuiana 310 Ground Fault Protection Signals Output States seessssssssssessssseee ener nennen 311 Commissioning Ground Fault
169. Prot Para l Prot I22 1 Unbalanced Load Module Signals Output States Name Description active Signal active ExBlo Signal External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command Alarm Signal Alarm Negative Sequence Trip Signal Trip TripCmd Signal Trip Command Page 328 EN MRA4 04 09 1272 Protection Module Unbalanced Load Protection ANSI 46 Commissioning Unbalanced Load Protection ANSI 46 Object to be tested Test of the unbalanced load protection function Necessary means e Three phase current source e Timer Procedure Check of the rotating field direction Ensure that the rotating field direction corresponds with the direction set in the field parameters e Feed in a 3 phase nominal current e Change to menu Measuring Values e Check the measuring value for the unbalanced current 2 The measuring value displayed for 2 should be zero within the physical measuring accuracy NOTICE If despite a feeding symmetrical nominal current the displayed value for 2 is gt zero 33 than a left rotating field is falsely being fed Correct the direction of the rotating field Now disconnect phase L1 Check again the measuring value of the unbalanced current 2 in menu Measuring Values The measuring value of the asymmetrical current 2 should now be 33 e Re connect phase L1 but disconnect phase L2
170. RATION caunas uu EePxNU NIENTE KENNEN 59 zi euaieo itM E 64 Smart view Keyboard Commands a nnne nnne nnne nnns na nsus ise rris reser nnne s 65 SMART N ll CT X 66 Installation OF Smart VieW uu uuu uuu uuu asss m 66 ili ire eo aq t PRENNE 67 Switching the Language of the Graphical User Interface 67 Setting up the Connection PC Device a nnn isa sra sa sai arae s 68 Setup a Connection via Ethernet TCP IP 000 Hee e n me enne e nns 68 Setup a Connection via Serial Interface under Windows 2OO0O cece eee ees 69 Set up a Connection via Serial Interface under Windows XP Z Set up a Connection via Serial Interface under Windows Vislo a r rr rsssrrsssrsssrrs 72 Connected to the Device and Calling up Websites at the same Time 74 Establishing ine Connection yi a UUSD 7R5252 eroe EE EE EE TTE 74 Smart view Troubleshooting 0000 LE n nnn ne en eran JS Smart view persistent connection problems degauenkaonaendutwbabotasadeaedbanticueteheatactwahinenhiesinsiadic ta Loading of Device Data when using Smart view ssss
171. Signal General Trip L3 I 1 Trip Signal Trip I 1 TripCmd Signal Trip Command I 1 DefaultSet Signal Default Parameter Set I 1 AdaptSet 1 Signal Adaptive Parameter 1 I 1 AdaptSet 2 Signal Adaptive Parameter 2 I 1 AdaptSet 3 Signal Adaptive Parameter 3 I 1 AdaptSet 4 Signal Adaptive Parameter 4 I 1 ExBlo1 I Module input state External blocking1 I 1 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 I 1 ExBlo TripCmd I Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command I 1 Ex rev Interl Module input state External reverse interlocking I 1 AdaptSet1 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter1 I 1 AdaptSet2 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter2 I 1 AdaptSet3 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter3 Page 102 EN MRA4 04 09 Assignment List Name Description I 1 AdaptSet4 Module input state Adaptive Parameter4 I 2 active Signal active I 2 ExBlo Signal External Blocking I 2 Ex rev Interl Signal External reverse Interlocking I 2 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked I 2 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command I 2 1H2 Blo Signal Blocking the trip command by an inrush I 2 Alarm L1 Signal Alarm L1 I 2 Alarm L2 Signal Alarm L2 I 2 Alarm L3 Signal Alarm L3 I 2 Alarm Signal Alarm I 2 Trip L1 Signal General Trip L1 I 2 Trip L2 Signal General Trip L2 I
172. Slot X2 acknowledges the corresponding binary BO 5 output relay can be assigned to each output relay The acknowledgment signal is only effective if the parameter Latched is set to active Only available if Latched active Inverting Inverting of the inactive inactive Device Para BICIS eee active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 Assignment 1 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para ae Beside active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 149 Binary Output Relays Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Assignment 2 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para x i n active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 Assignment 3 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para ls one active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 Assignment 4 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para 7 mu c Hm active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 5 Assignment 5 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para
173. Terminal Resistor Protective Relay 9V R125600 GND g4R2 120 0 py asss IDA A niran EN MRA4 04 09 Page 39 Installation and Connection Modbus RTU IEC 60870 5 103 via D SUB plug Terminal marking X103 for the device MRA4 60 o o o 499000 Electro mechanical assignment for device MRA4 D SUB assignment bushing 1 Earthing shielding 3 RxD TxD P High Level 4 RTS signal 5 DGND Ground neg Potential of aux voltage supply 6 VP pos Potential of the aux voltage supply 8 RxD TxD N Low Level N O T CE The Modbus IEC 60870 5 103 connection cable must be shielded The shielding has to be fixed at the screw which is marked with the ground symbol at the back side of the device Page 40 EN MRA4 04 09 Installation and Connection PC Interface X120 9 pole D Sub at all device fronts B1 B2 und B3 Housing RS232 PC Interface for Parameter Setting and Evaluation Software X120 housing shielded EN MRA4 04 09 Page 41 Installation and Connection Assignment of the Zero Modem Cable Assignment of the fully wired zero modem cable Dsub 9 female sub 9 female RD 4 DSR DCD RxD a GND Ground Ring signal Q o F NO O The connection cable must be shielded NOTICE prx u a 2 eee Page 42 EN MRA4 04 09 Cur
174. ThR ExBlo Signal External Blocking ThR Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked ThR ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command ThR Alarm Signal Alarm Thermal Overload TAR Trip Signal Trip Page 108 EN MRA4 04 09 Assignment List Name Description ThR TripCmd Signal Trip Command ThR Reset Theta Signal Resetting Thermal Replica ThR ExBlof1 l Module input state External blocking1 ThR ExBlo2 Il Module input state External blocking2 ThR ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command I22 1 active Signal active I2 1 ExBlo Signal External Blocking I2 1 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked I22 1 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command 122 1 Alarm Signal Alarm Negative Sequence I2 gt 1 Trip Signal Trip I2 gt 1 TripCmd Signal Trip Command 12 gt 1 ExBlo1 I Module input state External blocking I2 1 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 I2 1 ExBlo TripCmd Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command 122 2 active Signal active I2 2 ExBlo Signal External Blocking I2 2 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked 122 2 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command 122 2 Alarm Signal Alarm Negative Sequence I2 gt 2 Trip Signal Trip 2 gt 2 TripCmd Sign
175. U v P uan EN MRA4 04 09 Page 51 Voltage Transformers Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field MRA MCA gt terminal marking X4 MRN4 MRU4 MRF4 gt terminal marking X3 Three phase voltage measurement wiring of the measurement inputs delta connection Notice Calculation of the residual voltage VE is not possible ERE Tsawsa lt a OETImma massa Page 52 EN MRA4 04 09 Voltage Transformers Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field MRA MCA gt terminal marking X4 MRN4 MRU4 MRF4 gt terminal marking X3 L1 L2 L3 v3 1 v12 L2 a m NE VE n Three phase voltage measurement wiring of the measurement inputs delta connection Measurement of the residual voltage VE via auxilliary windings e n open delta Hem I A A ds uer EN MRA4 04 09 Page 53 Voltage Transformers Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field MRA MCA gt terminal marking X4 MRN4 MRU4 MRF4 gt terminal marking X3 Three phase voltage measurement wiring of the measurement inputs delta connection Measurement of the residual voltage VE via auxilliary windings e n open delta a o eS Page 54 EN MRA4 04 09 Voltage Transformers Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field MRA MCA gt terminal marking X4 MRN4 MRU4 MRF
176. a EXHI aly Global Prot Para ExP ExP 1 Trip External trip of the 1 n Assignment List Protection Para Global Prot Para ExP ExP 1 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 443 ExP Protection Module External Protection Setting Group Parameters of the Module External Protection Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Function Permanent activation inactive inactive Protection Para or deactivation of ii kis module stage eue ExP ExP 1 ExBlo Fc Activate allow or inactive inactive Protection Para inactivate disallow ii R blocking of the ld i module stage This JEXP parameter is only effective if a signal is ExP 1 assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo Fc active Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking inactive inactive Protection Para of the Trip t jas Command of the ome module stage ExP ExP 1 ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate allow or inactive inactive Protection Para inactivate disallow t jos blocking of the dis module stage This IEXP parameter is only ExP 1 effective if a signal is assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo TripCmd Fc active Page 444 EN MRA4 04 09 ExP Protection Module External Protection
177. a ber active Reset Global Protection Parameters of the Protection Module Command of the entire Protection Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Function Permanent activation inactive active Protection Para or deactivation of module stage active Global Prot Para Prot ExBlo Fc Activate allow the inactive inactive Protection Para external blocking of the global protection active Global Prot Para functionality of the Prot device ExBlo1 If external blocking 1 n Assignment List Protection Para of this module is activated allowed Sopa TORE dla the global protection Prot functionality of the device will be blocked if the state of the assigned signal becomes true ExBlo2 If external blocking 1 n Assignment List Protection Para of this module is activated allowed Global Prot Para the global protection Prot functionality of the device will be blocked if the state of the assigned signal becomes true Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking inactive inactive Protection Para of the Trip U active Global Prot Para Prot Page 248 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Protection Prot the trip command of the entire device Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate allow the inactive inactive Protection Para external blocking of active Global Prot Para Prot ExBlo TripCmd If
178. active BO Slot X2 active Device Para ata Ci y active BO Slot X5 inactive Binary Outputs acknowledged BO Slot X2 automatically if the event is gone or BO 1 whether the Binary Output Relay is to be acknowledged by a signal manually Acknowledgment Acknowledgment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Signal An Bi Output acknowledgment sn s signal that BO Slot X2 acknowledges the corresponding binary BO 1 output relay can be assigned to each output relay The acknowledgment signal is only effective if the parameter Latched is set to active Only available if Latched active Inverting Inverting of the inactive inactive Device Para iyo p ro y active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 Assignment 1 Assignment 1 n Assignment List BO Slot X2 TripCmd Device Para BO Slot X5 Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para x i assidue active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 Page 140 EN MRA4 04 09 Binary Output Relays Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Assignment 2 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para M posses active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 Assignment 3 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 Inverti
179. ailable for devices with current protection modules Name Description No assignment V 1 Alarm Signal Alarm voltage stage V 2 Alarm Signal Alarm voltage stage V 3 Alarm Signal Alarm voltage stage V 4 Alarm Signal Alarm voltage stage VE 1 Alarm Signal Alarm Residual Voltage Supervision stage VE 2 Alarm Signal Alarm Residual Voltage Supervision stage V 012 1 Alarm Signal Alarm voltage asymmetry V 012 2 Alarm Signal Alarm voltage asymmetry V 012 3 Alarm Signal Alarm voltage asymmetry V 012 4 Alarm Signal Alarm voltage asymmetry V 012 5 Alarm Signal Alarm voltage asymmetry V 012 6 Alarm Signal Alarm voltage asymmetry AR running Signal Auto Reclosing running AR AR Shot No 0 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No AR AR Shot No 1 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No AR AR Shot No 2 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No AR AR Shot No 3 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No AR AR Shot No 4 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No AR AR Shot No 5 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No AR AR Shot No 6 Signal Auto Reclosure Attempt No SOTF enabled Signal Switch Onto Fault enabled This Signal can be used to modify Overcurrent Protection Settings CLPU enabled Signal Cold Load enabled eme Page 218 EN MRA4 04 09 Parameters Name Description DI Slo
180. aken from the Technical Data Hem I A A r sss EN MRA4 04 09 Page 413 f Protection Module Frequency Protection ANSI 81O U Commissioning f and df dt Object to be tested All frequency protection stages that are projected as f lt and df dt Necessary means e hree phase voltage source e Frequency generator that can generate and measure a linear defined rate of change of frequency Procedure Testing the threshold values e Feed nominal voltage and nominal frequency to the device Decrease the frequency below the f threshold e Apply a rate of change of frequency step change that is below the setting value Example apply 1 Hz per second if the setting value is 0 8 Hz per second After the tripping delay is expired the relay has to trip Successful test result Permissible deviations tolerances and fallback ratios can be taken from the Technical Data ERIS REIA E sssr sssi Page 414 EN MRA4 04 09 f Protection Module Frequency Protection ANSI 810 U Commissioning delta phi Object to be tested All frequency protection stages that are projected as delta phi Vector Surge Necessary means e hree phase voltage source that can generate a definite step sudden change of the voltage pointers phase shift Procedure Testing the threshold values e Apply a vector surge sudden change that is 1 5 times the setting value Example if the se
181. al Trip Command 2 gt 2 ExBlo1 I Module input state External blocking 2 gt 2 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 2 gt 2 ExBlo TripCmd Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command IH2 active Signal active IH2 ExBlo Signal External Blocking IH2 Blo L1 Signal Blocked L1 IH2 Blo L2 Signal Blocked L2 IH2 Blo L3 Signal Blocked L3 IH2 Blo IG Signal Blocking of the earth protection module IH2 3 ph Blo Signal Inrush was detected in at least one phase trip command blocked IH2 ExBlo1 l Module input state External blocking1 IH2 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 V 1 active Signal active V 1 ExBlo Signal External Blocking V 1 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked V 1 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command EN MRA4 04 09 Page 109 Assignment List Name Description V 1 Alarm L1 Signal Alarm L1 V 1 Alarm L2 Signal Alarm L2 V 1 Alarm L3 Signal Alarm L3 V 1 Alarm Signal Alarm voltage stage V 1 Trip L1 Signal General Trip L1 V 1 Trip L2 Signal General Trip L2 V 1 Trip L3 Signal General Trip L3 V 1 Trip Signal Trip V 1 TripCmd Signal Trip Command V 1 ExBlo1 l Module input state External blocking1 V 1 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 V 1 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input
182. al from the Single LED Binary Output Relay Pending Trip Command assignment list e g a me Where digital Input a single Within the module can be acknowledged Where Where Trin Cobtrol Within the configuration Within the configuration s menu of this single LED menu of this single Binary Output Relay As long as you are within the parameter setting mode you cannot N o TI CE acknowledge N O T C E In case of a fault during parameter setting via the operating panel you must first leave the parameter mode by pressing either push button C or OK before you may access to menu Acknowledgments via push button Hem I A J n EN MRA4 04 09 Page 97 Acknowledgments Manual Acknowledgment Press the C Button at the panel Select the item to be acknowledged via the Softkeys Binary output relays LEDs SCADA a pending trip command or all above mentioned items at once Press the Softkey with the Wrench Symbol Enter your password Manual Acknowledgment via Smart view e In case Smart view is not running please start it e If the device data were not yet loaded select Receive Data From The Device from menu Device e Double click on icon Operation in the navigation tree Double click on icon Acknowledgment within the operation menu Double click the entry within the popup that is to be acknowledged Press
183. al settings t DE1 Dead time between 0 1 200 00s 1s Protection Para trip and reclosure jens attempt for earth H faults AR General settings t DE2 Dead time between 0 1 200 00s 1s Protection Para trip and reclosure as attempt for earth i faults AR General settings t DE3 Dead time between 0 1 200 00s 1s Protection Para trip and reclosure en attempt for earth faults AR General settings Page 426 EN MRA4 04 09 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path t DE4 Dead time between 0 1 200 00s 1s Protection Para trip and reclosure iene attempt for earth i faults AR General settings t DE5 Dead time between 0 1 200 00s 1s Protection Para trip and reclosure jun attempt for earth faults AR General settings t DE6 Dead time between 0 1 200 00s 1s Protection Para trip and reclosure jens attempt for earth faults AR General settings t Superv Supervision time 1 300 00s 10s Protection Para lt n gt AR General settings t CB on Cmd By this parameter 0 1 300 00s 0 2s Protection Para the maximum jen duration of the CB On control command AR will be set The CB l On control command General settings is given out as long as the CB is in the on position and the position indicator signal is being detected If the CB is in the ON Position the Control command will be cancelled stopped
184. alternatively tripping delays and the fallback ratios each time 3 x single phase and 1 x three phase N O TI CE Especially in Holmgreen connections wiring errors can easily happen and these are then detected safely Measuring the total tripping time can ensure that the secondary wiring is o k from the terminal on up to the trip coil of the CB N O TI C E It is recommended to measure the total tripping time instead of the tripping delay The tripping delay should be specified by the customer The total tripping time is measured at the position signalling contact of the CB not at the relay output Total tripping time tripping delay please refer to the tolerances of the protection stages CB operating time about 50 ms Please take the CB operating times from the technical data specified in the relevant documentation provided by the CB manufacturer Necessary means e Current source May be ampere meters Timer Procedure Testing the threshold values 3 x single phase and 1 x three phase Each time feed a current which is about 3 5 above the threshold value for activation tripping Then check the threshold values Testing the total tripping delay recommendation Measure the total tripping times at the auxiliary contacts of the CB CB tripping Testing the tripping delay measuring at the relay output Measure the tripping times at the relay output Testing the fallback ratio Reduce the current to
185. alues IStandard values IL3 Measured value Phase current Operation i ne IMeasured values IStandard values IG meas Measured value measured IG Operation fundamental Measured values Standard values IG calc Measured value calculated IG Operation fundamental Measured values Standard values lO Measured value calculated Zero Operation current fundamental Measured values Standard values 11 Measured value calculated Operation Positive phase sequence current M raq luas fundamental Sese well Standard values I2 Measured value calculated Operation Unbalanced load current Mensured values fundamental Standard values IL1 H2 Measured value 2nd harmonic 1st Operation harmonic of IL1 Measured values Standard values IL2 H2 Measured value 2nd harmonic 1st Operation harmonic of IL2 Measured values Standard values IL3 H2 Measured value 2nd harmonic 1st Operation harmonic of IL3 Measured values Standard values IG H2 Measured value 2nd harmonic 1st Operation harmonic of IG Measured values Standard values EN MRA4 04 09 Page 83 Measuring Values Value Description Menu path 9 Measured value calculated Operation Apparent power S Fed Apparent Power S Consumpted ea Ue alee Apparent Power Standard values P Measured value calculated Active Operation power P Fed Active Power P M Edva Consumpted Active Power
186. ame Count and RevData Only available if Device planning RTU ment NoOfParityErrors Total number of parity errors Physically O 0 9999999999 Operation LI ICount and RevData IModbus Only available if Device planning RTU NoOfFrameErrors Total Number of Frame Errors Physically 0 0 9999999999 Operation petra Count and RevData Only available if Device planning RTU meen NoOfBreaks Number of detected communication aborts 0 0 9999999999 Operation Count and RevData Only available if Device planning RTU Modbus NoOfQuerylnvalid Total number of Request errors Request 0 0 9999999999 Operation could not be interpreted iesunvand SUD IModbus NoOflnternalError Total Number of Internal errors while 0 0 9999999999 Operation interpreting the request ICount and RevData IModbus asss I A A ee EN MRA4 04 09 Page 209 Module IEC60870 5 103 Module IEC60870 5 103 IEC 103 IEC60870 5 103 Protocol Configuration In order to use the IEC60870 5 103 protocol it has to be assigned to the X103 Interface within the Device Planning The device will reboot after setting this parameter HIN WEIS The parameter X103 is only available if the device is at the rear side equipped with an interface like RS485 or Fiber Optic If the device is equipped with an Fiber Optic Interface the Optical Rest HIN WEIS Position has to be set within the Device Parameters T
187. and reference voltage in case of a short circuit This angle is needed to determine the fault direction in case of short circuits 0 355 45 Field Para Star point treatm Star point treatment sin 90 cos 180 SOLI RESI SOLI RESI Field Para IG MTA Maximum Torque Angle Angle between earth current and residual voltage in case of a short circuit This angle is needed to determine the fault direction in case of short circuits Only available if Star point treatment Solidly or low resistance earthed 0 355 110 Field Para Page 230 EN MRA4 04 09 Field Parameters EVT Angle Cor Fine adjustment of the measuring angle of the earth current transformers By means of the Angle Correction faults of the earth voltage transformers can be taken into account 45 45 0 Field Para V Cutoff Level The Phase Voltage shown in the Display or within the PC Software will be displayed as zero if the Phase Voltage falls below this Cutoff Level This parameter has no impact on recorders This parameter is related to the voltage that is connected to the device phase to phase or phase to earth 0 0 0 100Vn 0 005Vn Device Para Measurem Display VE meas Cutoff Level The measured Residual Voltage shown in the Display or within the PC Software will be displayed as zero if the measured Residual Voltage falls be
188. anning Parameters of the Ground Fault Protection Parameter Description Options Default Menu path Mode Mode do not use non directional forward reverse non directional Device planning Global Protection Parameters of the Ground Fault Protection Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path ExBlo1 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a Prot parameter set and if the state of the AG assigned signal is true ExBlo2 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a l Prot parameter set and if the state of the AG assigned signal is true ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the Trip Command ol he maduleithe Global Prot Para stage if blocking is Prot activated allowed within a parameter AG set and if the state of the assigned signal is true Ex rev Interl External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module by external reverse interlocking if blocking is activated allowed within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true Global Prot Para Prot IG 1 Page 304 EN MRA4 04 09 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51
189. ara P Prot PQS 1 Page 380 EN MRA4 04 09 PQS Power Protection Module ANSI 32 37 Parameter set parameters of the Power Protection module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Function Permanent activation or inactive PQS 1 active Protection Para deactivation of module stage active PQS 2 inactive n PQS 3 inactive P Prot PQS 4 inactive PQS 1 PQS 5 inactive PQS 6 inactive ExBlo Fc Activate allow or inactive inactive Protection Para inactivate disallow f jme blocking of the icd module stage This P Prot parameter is only effective if a signal is assigned to PQS 1 the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo Fc active Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the inactive inactive Protection Para Trip Command of the t jm module stage cid P Prot PQS 1 ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate allow or inactive inactive Protection Para inactivate disallow f jns blocking of the Sue module stage This P Prot parameter is only effective if a signal is assigned to PQS 1 the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo TripCmd Fc active P gt Over load Active Power 0 02 2 00Sn 1 20Sn Protection Para Pickup Value Can be used for monitor
190. arameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo TripCmd Fc active Trig Mode Trigger Mode Should the leading lagging Protection Para Module be triggered if the laqai jun Current Pointer is leading to agging the Voltage Pointer Lead PF Prot Or should the Module be IPE triggered if the Current Ll Pointer is lagging to the Voltage Pointer Lag Threshold Alarm if the threshold is 0 5 0 99 0 8 Protection Para exceeded lt n gt PF Prot IPF 1 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 397 PF Protection Module Power Factor ANSI 55 Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Res Mode Trigger Mode Should the leading leading Protection Para Module be triggered if the TE fes Current Pointer is leading to agging i the Voltage Pointer Lead PF Prot Or should the Module be 4 triggered if the Current PF 1 Pointer is lagging to the Voltage Pointer Lag Reset Value Reset Value 0 5 0 99 0 99 Protection Para lt n gt PF Prot PF 1 t Tripping delay 0 00 300 00s 0 00s Protection Para lt n gt PF Prot PF 1 Pre trig Comp Pre trigger time for the 0 00 300 00s 5 00s Protection Para Compensation Signal fene When this timer is elapsed the compensation signal will PF Prot be activated IPF 1 Post trig Comp Post trigger time of the 0 00 300 00s 5 00s Protection Para Compensation Signal When this timer
191. arameters of the Voltage Transformer Supervision Module 469 Setting Group Parameters of the Voltage Transformer Module 470 Voltage Transformer Supervision Module Input States 471 Voltage Transformer Module Signals Output States a 471 Commissioning Voltage Transformer Supervision via DI ANSI 60FL 472 Commissioning Voltage Transformer Failure ANSI 60FL r 473 DEVICE FARANE TER L L u u a Rosa RIRs RA E nares eauatensantvasenict 474 Dale i Ll Nm m 474 Synchronize Date and Time via Smart View a eme e eene enne A474 dle We acs cesta 474 version Via SMAN NEW uu uu ul a EE E AA EENE DEE E EE aa AAA NE iaee 474 MSU t 475 Direct Commands of the System MOdUle cccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeesseeeeseeeesaeeeeseeeeeeeegeees 476 Global Protection Parameters of the SYSteM ccccccccceececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesseeeseeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeseeeseeseenenses 477 System Module Input States
192. arm L1 Signal Alarm L1 Alarm L2 Signal Alarm L2 Alarm L3 Signal Alarm L3 Alarm Signal Alarm voltage stage Trip L1 Signal General Trip L1 Trip L2 Signal General Trip L2 Trip L3 Signal General Trip L3 Trip Signal Trip TripCmd Signal Trip Command EN MRA4 04 09 Page 359 V Protection Module Voltage Protection ANSI 27 59 Commissioning Overvoltage Protection ANSI 59 Object to be tested Test of the overvoltage protection elements 3 x single phase and 1 x three phase for each element Through testing the overvoltage protection stages it can also be ensured CAUTION that the wiring from the switchboard input terminals is correct Wiring errors at the voltage measuring inputs might result in e False tripping of the directional current protection Example Device suddenly trips in reverse direction but it does not trip in forward direction Wrong or no power factor indication Errors with regard to power directions etc Necessary means e 3 phase AC voltage source Timer for measuring of the tripping time e Voltmeter Procedure 3 x single phase 1 x three phase for each element Testing the threshold values For testing the threshold values and fallback values the test voltage has to be increased until the relay is activated When comparing the displayed values with those of the voltmeter the deviation must be within the permissible tolerances Testing the trip delay For testing the trip d
193. art the software Smart view Select the menu point Device Connection in menu Settings e Click on Serial Connection Click button Settings e When initially setting up the connection a dialogue window appears with the information that so far a direct connection with your protection device has not been established Click on Yes e f so far a location has not been set up on your PC your location information has to be put in Confirm the following pop up window Telephone and Modem Options with OK e The Windows network connection assistant appears after the location information is set up Select the connection type Establish direct connection to another computer e Select the serial interface COM Port where the device shall be connected to Select To be used for all users in window Availability of the connection e Do not change the connection name appearing in window Name of the connection and click the button Complete e Finally you arrive again in window Device Installation from where you started establishing the connection Confirm the adjustments by clicking the OK button Hem I A A J m o a k a EN MRA4 04 09 Page 71 Smart View Set up a Connection via Serial Interface under Windows Vista Establishing the connection between Smart view and the device is a three step procedure 1 Installing Smart view the application itself 2 I
194. arth current measuring via cable type current transformer Gnom secondary 5 A Warning The shielding at the dismantled end of the line has to be put through the cable type current transformer and has to be grounded at the cable side Notice A Recommended for isolated or compensated networks EN MRA4 04 09 Page 47 Current Transformers CT Connection example Anti Clockwise Rotating Field MRI4 MCI4 MRA4 MCA4 gt terminal markings X3 L1 L3 z L 4 a lt a 112 r N amp IC IL2 Three phase current measurement In secondary 1 A Earth current measuring via Holmgreen connection IGnom secondary 1 A Notice Not recommended for isolated and compensated networks rm O As Se Qs sli Page 48 EN MRA4 04 09 Voltage Transformers Voltage Transformers Check the installation direction of the VTs It is imperative that the secondary sides of measuring transformers be 7 Nar Neid ounded d s Check of the Voltage Measuring Values Connect a three phase measuring voltage equal to the rated voltage to the relay NOTICE Take connection of the measuring transformers star connection delta connection duly into account Now adjust voltage values in the nominal voltage range with the corresponding nominal frequency which are not likely to cause overvoltage or undervoltage trips Compare the values shown in the device display
195. ary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 Page 152 EN MRA4 04 09 Binary Output Relays Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Assignment 6 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 Inverting 6 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para M posses active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 Assignment 7 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 Inverting 7 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para a active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 153 Binary Output Relays Binary Output Relay Input States Name Description Assignment via BO1 1 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 BO1 2 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 BO1 3 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 BO1 4 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 BO1 5 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 BO1 6 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 BO1 7 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 Ack signal BO 1 Module inp
196. asier to follow especially where complex parameter changes are involved on every superior higher menu level above of the temporarily saved parameters an implausibility is indicated by a question mark plausibility trace This makes it possible to control or follow from the main menu level at any time where implausibilities exist So it is possible to see from each point of the menu tree that implausibilities have been detected by the software A star parameter change indication is always overwritten by the question mark implausibility symbol If the software detects an implausibility it rejects saving and adopting of the parameters Example If the residual voltage has been parameterized as calculated EVTcon calculated then the software recognizes an implausibility in case voltage measuring is parameterized as phase to phase VTcon Phase to Phase The calculation of the residual voltage is physically not possible by means of phase to phase voltages e Additional parameters can be changed if required n order to transfer changed parameters into the device please select Transfer all parameters into the device in menu Device e Confirm the safety inquiry Shall The Parameters Be Overwritten Enter the password for setting parameters in the popup window e Confirm the inquiry Shall The Data Be Saved Locally with Yes recommended Select a suitable storing location on your hard disk
197. ast 30ms or more in order to prevent faulty trippings In order to ensure correct functioning of the directional detection after single phase short circuits the following reference voltage is used For phase current 7 it is the line to line voltage U23 for phase current 2 the line to line voltage U31 and for phase current 3 the line to line voltage U12 In case the fault happens to be near the measuring location and there is no reference voltage for directional recognition available any more neither measured or from history voltage memory then the module will depending on the parameter setting either trip non directional or it will be blocked N O TI CE All overcurrent protective elements 1 I 6 are identically structured N O T I C E This module offers Adaptive Parameter Sets Parameters can be modified within parameter sets dynamically by means of Adaptive Parameter Sets Please refer to chapter Parameter Adaptive Parameter Sets All 1 6 overcurrent protective elements can be planned as non directional or optionally as directional elements This means all 6 elements can be planned user defined in forward reverse or non directional For each element the following characteristics are available DEFT UMZ NINV IEC AMZ VINV IEC AMZ LINV IEC AMZ EINV IEC AMZ MINV ANSI AMZ VINV ANSI AMZ EINV ANSI AMZ Thermal Flat IT I2T l4T p A ao eee Page 260 EN MRA4 04 09 I Protec
198. ated allowed within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path ExBlo1 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a Supervision parameter set and if the state of the ICTS assigned signal is true ExBlo2 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para Global Prot Para Supervision ICTS EN MRA4 04 09 Page 463 CTS Supervision Module Current Transformer Supervision ANSI 60L Setting Group Parameters of the Current Transformer Supervision Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Function Permanent activation or inactive inactive Protection Para deactivation of ii dens module stage nds Supervision ICTS ExBlo Fc Activate allow or inactivate inactive inactive Protection Para disallow blocking of the ii R module stage This SLNE i parameter is only effective if Supervision a signal is assigned to the corresponding global ICTS protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo Fczactive Al In order to prevent faulty 0 10 1 00In 0 50In Protection Para tripping of phase selective fons protection functions that use the current as tripping Supervision criterion If the difference of ICTS the measured earth curren
199. ath Hardware Variant 1 Optional Hardware A 8 digital inputs 8 digital inputs 7 MRA4 Extension 7 binary output binary output relays relays C 8 digital inputs 13 binary output relays D 16 digital inputs 13 binary output relays Hardware Variant 2 Optional Hardware gt x0 lt Standard 0 Standard MRA4 Extension Housing Mounting form A Flush mounting Flush mounting MRA4 B 19 inch mounting semi flush Communication Communication A Without A Without MRA4 B RS485 terminal C Ethernet F Fiber Optic G RS485 D Sub Page 22 EN MRA4 04 09 Installation and Connection Installation and Connection Three Side View N O TI C E Dependent on the connection method of the SCADA system used the needed space depth differs If for instance a D Sub Plug is used it has to be added to the depth dimension
200. ath Assignment 4 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para x i n active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 Assignment 5 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para ls oe active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 Assignment 6 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 Inverting 6 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para 7 mu c He active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 Assignment 7 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 Inverting 7 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para E h E ene active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 3 t hold To clearly identify the 0 00 300 00s 0 03s Device Para d transition of a Binary Outputs inary output relay the new state is BO Slot X2 lee be Bos the hold time Page 146 EN MRA4 04 09 Binary Output Relays Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path L atched Defines whether the _ inactive inactive Device Para d k L ielay active Binary Outputs acknowledged BO Slot X2 automatically if the event is gone or BO 4 whether the Binary Output Relay is to be acknowledged by a signal manually
201. available AGHI if Reset Mode t delay IH2 Blo Blocking the trip inactive inactive Protection Para command if an ii aus inrush is detected d Prot G 1 nondir Trip at VE 0 Only relevant for inactive inactive Protection Para current protection ti es modules stages with deve i directional feature Prot The device will trip non directional if this AG 1 parameter is set to active and no direction could be determined because no reference voltage V 0 could be measured any more e g if there is a three phase short circuit close to the device If this parameter is set to inactive the protection stage will be blocked in case of V 0 Only available if Device planning Earth current protection Stage Mode directional EN MRA4 04 09 Page 309 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G Ground Fault Protection Input States Name Description Assignment via ExBlo1 l Module input state External Protection Para RIDGE Global Prot Para Prot AG 1 ExBlo2 Module input state External Protection Para oo ng Global Prot Para Prot AG 1 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Protection Para Blocking of the Trip Command Global Prot Para Prot AG 1 Ex rev Interl Module input state External reverse Protection Para nj Global Prot Para Prot AG 1 AdaptSet1 l Module input state Adaptive Protection Para
202. available ifa AR sa en Start FT 5 Startfct Assignment Start fct Protection Para lt n gt AR Start FT 5 FT Fast Trip inactive inactive Protection Para Only available if a active pie start function was AR seeds Start FT EN MRA4 04 09 Page 433 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 assigned 5 Startfct Assignment Start fct Protection Para lt n gt AR Start FT 5 n FT Fast Trip after AR 0 6 0 Protection Para attempt number yes Only available ifa AR oc did Start FT o t FT Trip delay for Fast 0 10 00s 0s Protection Para Trip jus Only available ifa AR eon Start FT 6 Startfct Assignment Start fct Protection Para lt n gt AR Start FT 6 FT Fast Trip inactive inactive Protection Para Only available if a dene Ple start function was AR Hesiod Start FT 6 n FT Fast Trip after AR 0 6 0 Protection Para attempt number jus Only available ifa AR aed was Start FT 6 t FT Trip delay for Fast 0 10 00s Os Protection Para Trip jens Only available ifa AR start function was Start FT Page 434 EN MRA4 04 09 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 Module Automatic Reclosure Fast Trip Signals Output States Name Description 1 FT Signal Fast Trip 1 FT Cmd Signal Trip Command for Fast Tripping 2 FT Signal Fast Trip 2 FT Cmd Signal Trip
203. been changed sys Ack LED Signal LEDs acknowledgment Sys Ack BO Signal Acknowledgment of the Binary Outputs Sys Ack Scada Signal Acknowledge Scada Sys Ack TripCmd Signal Reset Trip Command Sys Ack LED HMI Signal LEDs acknowledgment HMI pre M U Fa z Page 124 EN MRA4 04 09 Assignment List Name Description Sys Ack BO HMI Signal Acknowledgment of the Binary Outputs HMI Sys Ack Scada HMI Signal Acknowledge Scada HMI Sys Ack TripCmd HMI Signal Reset Trip Command HMI sys Ack LED Sca Signal LEDs acknowledgment SCADA Sys Ack BO Sca Signal Acknowledgment of the Binary Outputs SCADA Sys Ack Counter Sca Signal Reset of all Counters SCADA Sys Ack Scada Sca Signal Acknowledge Scada SCADA Sys Ack TripCmd Sca Signal Reset Trip Command SCADA Sys Ack LED I Module input state LEDs acknowledgment by digital input Sys Ack BO Module input state Acknowledgment of the binary Output Relays Sys Ack Scada l Module input state Acknowledge Scada via digital input The replica that SCADA has got from the device is to be reset Sys PS1 I State of the module input respectively of the signal that should activate this Parameter Setting Group Sys PS2 State of the module input respectively of the signal that should activate this Parameter Setting Group Sys PS3 State of the mo
204. been saved they are not yet finally stored and adopted by the device In order to make things easier to follow especially where complex parameter changes are involved on every superior higher ranking menu level the intended change of the parameter is indicated by the star symbol star trace This makes it possible to control or follow from the main menu level at any time where parameter changes have been made and have not finally been saved In addition to the star trace to the temporarily saved parameter changes a general parameter changing symbol is faded in at the left corner of the display and so it is possible from each point of the menu tree to see that there are parameter changes still not adopted by the device Press the OK key to initiate the final storage of all parameter changes Confirm the parameter changes by pressing the Yes softkey or dismiss by pressing Softkey No prx RR R Y sssi Page 222 EN MRA4 04 09 Parameters N O TI C 5 Plausibility check In order to prevent obvious wrong settings the device monitors constantly all temporarily saved parameter changes If the device detects an implausibility this is indicated by a question mark in front of the respective parameter In order to make things easier to follow especially where complex parameter changes are involved on every superior higher ranking menu level above the temporarily saved parameters an
205. ble Resetting via characteristic delayed and instantaneous Reset Trip 2 2 s o1 t 3 bt char S t tchar s t 45 t char s 1x10 100 5 10 f ne t s 05 tchar l 0 05 0 1 0 01 0 01 0 1 l 10 100 x In multiples of the nominal current Page 270 EN MRA4 04 09 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 IT Notice Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and instantaneous Reset Trip 5 3 5 3 t g t char s t t char s m i In 1x10 100 10 10 t s t char 1 T 0 5 0 1 0 05 0 01 0 01 0 1 l 10 100 x In multiples of the nominal current EN MRA4 04 09 Page 271 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 I2T Notice A Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and instantaneous Reset Trip 5 3
206. c active t Pickup Delay If the Pickup Time Delay has 0 00 300 00s 1 00s Protection Para run out a Cold Load Signal will jens be issued CLPU t Release Delay If the Release Time Delay has 0 00 300 00s 1 00s Protection Para run out a Warm Load Signal will jum be issued CLPU I lt The CB is in the OFF Position if 0 01 1 00In 0 01In Protection Para lt n gt CLPU EN MRA4 04 09 Page 343 CLPU Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup States of the inputs of the Cold Load Pickup module Name Description Assignment via ExBlo1 l Module input state External Protection Para DOCKING Global Prot Para CLPU ExBlo2 Module input state External Protection Para SIDOISINIG Global Prot Para CLPU Ex rev Interl Module input state External reverse Protection Para interlocking Global Prot Para CLPU CB Pos Detect Module input state Criterion by which the Circuit Breaker Switch Position is to be detected Protection Para Global Prot Para CLPU Signals of the Cold Load Pickup module states of the outputs Name Description active Signal active ExBlo Signal External Blocking Ex rev Interl Signal External reverse Interlocking enabled Signal Cold Load enabled detected Signal Cold Load detected AR Blo Module input state AR Blo Signal No Load Current Page 344 EN MRA4 04 09 CLPU Supervision Mod
207. can check whether the statistics are alive and if data are being acquired Count and RevData Statistics EN MRA4 04 09 Page 95 Acknowledgments Acknowledgments Collective Acknowledgments for latched signals Collective Acknowledgments Via a signal from the assignment list e g a digital Input all can be acknowledged Where Within the menu Ex Acknowledge Where Within _ the menu Ex Acknowledge Where Within _ the menu Ex Acknowledge Where Within _ the menu Ex Acknowledge LEDs Binary Output SCADA Pending LEDs Relays Trip Command Binary Output Relays SCADA Pending Trip Command Via Smart view All LEDs at once All Binary Output All SCADA All pending trip All at once ba the panel Where Relays at once signals at once ida at Where nb Operation Where Where l Operation oE daed Acknowledge Operation Operation Where Acknowledge diam Acknowledge Acknowledge Operation Acknowledge At the panel the menu Operation Acknowledge can directly be accessed via the C key External All LEDs at once All Binary Output All SCADA All pending trip Acknowledg Relays at once signals at once commands at ment once Page 96 EN MRA4 04 09 Acknowledgments Options for individual acknowledgments for latched signals Individual Acknowledgment LEDs Binary Output Relays Pending Trip Command Via a sign
208. cancelled when this signal is not applied any more But precondition for this blockage is the activated parameter ExBlo Fc If the blocking signal is no longer active and after the blocking time has expired the AR module will fall back into the ready state Volitional Abort of the AR An AR cycle can be stopped by one of 6 assignable blocking signals gt AwE ABoRT lt If the Abort Signal is gone the AR Module checks the position of the CB If the CB is in the On Position the AR Module starts the dead time After expiring of the dead time the module falls back into the state AR REAbv If the CB is in the Off Position the AR Module will wait for a manual switch on of the CB If the CB is in the On Position while the AR is aborted the AR successFuL command could be given out if at least one reclosure attempt has taken place N O TI C E Via the fast trip the AR module is able to trip the circuit breaker ahead of the protection stage that has activated the AR module As a general rule a fast trip is either issued beforehand the first reclosure attempt or afterwards the last permitted reclosure attempt 1 Fast trip at the beginning before the first reclosure attempt shot is executed Purpose Keeping the complete feeder energized After a short break For radial feeders it could make sense to switch of the complete line by a fast trip beforehand a line sections is switched of by time graded protection 80 90 of the faults are not p
209. ck signal BO 5 Module input state Device Para Acknowledgment signal for the binary output relay If latching is set to active the binary output relay can BO Slot X2 only be acknowledged if those signals that initiated the setting are BO 5 fallen back and the hold time is expired Binary Outputs BO6 1 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 BO6 2 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 BO6 3 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 BO6 4 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 BO6 5 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 SSS ESSE cI cr Tr sss Page 158 EN MRA4 04 09 Binary Output Relays signals that initiated the setting are fallen back and the hold time is expired Name Description Assignment via BO6 6 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 BO6 7 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 6 Ack signal BO 6 Module input state Device Para Acknowledgment signal for the IBinarv Outputs binary output relay If latching is set ys Spe to active the binary output relay can BO Slot X2 only be acknowledged if those BO 6 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 159 Binary Output Relays Binary O
210. cking if blocking is activated allowed within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true 1 n Assignment List Protection Para Global Prot Para Prot ALA EN MRA4 04 09 Page 277 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path AdaptSet 1 Assignment AdaptSet Protection Para Adaptive Parameter Global Prot Para Prot 1 AdaptSet 2 Assignment AdaptSet Protection Para ne ua sU Global Prot Para Prot I 1 AdaptSet 3 Assignment AdaptSet Protection Para ae ili Global Prot Para Prot 1 AdaptSet 4 Assignment AdaptSet Protection Para Adaptive Parameter 4 Global Prot Para Prot AT Page 278 EN MRA4 04 09 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 Setting Group Parameters of the Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Function Permanent activation inactive I 1 active Protection Para or deactivation of module stage active I 2 inactive lt n gt I 3 inactive Prot I 4 inactive 1 I 5 inactive I 6 inactive ExBlo Fc Activate allow or inactive inactive Protection Para inactivate disallow blocking of the module stage This Prot parameter is only effective if a signal is ADI assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If
211. conditions are fulfilled the CB on command will be given out at most as long as t CB on Cmd The command will be terminated if the CB is clearly in the ON position that means CB Pos ON true and CB Pos Orr false The counters are incremented Test Was the auto reclosure attempt successful The reclosure attempt has been successful if and only if 1 Not later than the t CB On Cmd timer has expired the CB is clearly in the ON position that means CB Pos Ow 7 true and CB Pos Orr false 2 Within the supervision time no new alarm trip caused by an AR authorized protection function occurs otherwise the AR cycle will be aborted 3 The AR module is not aborted by any blocking or abort signal NOTICE If an alarm trip is generated by an AR authorized protection function while im the supervision discrimination timer runs down the AR module is put back into the state AR ready if and only if the maximum number of AR cycles is not reached yet Otherwise the AR will be broken up stopped and the signal y gt AR FaAILED will be given out He I A A aO EN MRA4 04 09 Page 417 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 If the reclosure attempt has been successful the signal AR successful will be issued External AR Blockade The input signal An ExBro I changes the running AR into the Awe ExB ox state i e the started AR action is interrupted and blocked The blockade is only
212. ctive LEDs automatically if the LEDs group A rete ri LED a to be acknowledged by a signal manually Ack signal Acknowledgment 1 n Assignment List Device Para signal for the LED If latching is set to active the LED can only be acknowledged if those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back Only available if Latched active LEDs LEDs group A LED 3 LED active color The LED lights up in this color if the state of the OR assignment of the signals is true green red red flash green flash LEDs group A red flash LEDs group B red Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 3 Page 168 EN MRA4 04 09 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path LED inactive color The LED lights upin green Device Para ie the state red LEDs assignment of the red flash LEDs group A signals is untrue green fash ILED 3 Assignment 1 Assignment 1 n Assignment List LEDs group A Alarm Device Para LEDs group B LEDs LEDs group A LED 3 Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para en s active LEDs LEDs group A LED 3 Assignment 2 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 3 Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para M a ua active LEDs LEDs group A LED 3 Assignment 3 Assignment 1
213. d values VL31 max VL31 maximum value Operation Statistics Standard values EN MRA4 04 09 Page 89 Statistics VL31 avg VL31 average value Operation Statistics Standard values VL31 min VL31 minimum value Operation Statistics Standard values VL1 max VL1 maximum value Operation Statistics Standard values VL1 avg VL1 average value Operation Statistics Standard values VL1 min VL1 minimum value Operation Statistics Standard values VL2 max VL2 maximum value Operation Statistics IStandard values VL2 avg VL2 average value Operation Statistics IStandard values VL2 min VL2 minimum value Operation Statistics IStandard values VL3 max VL3 maximum value Operation Statistics Standard values VL3 avg VL3 average value Operation Statistics Standard values VL3 min VL3 minimum value Operation Statistics Standard values V1 max Maximum value Symmetrical components positive phase sequence voltage Operation Statistics Standard values V1 avg Average value Symmetrical components positive phase sequence voltage Operation Statistics Standard values Page 90 EN MRA4 04 09 Statistics V1 min Minimum value symmetrical Operation components po
214. da Cmd 7 Scada Command Scada Cmd 8 Scada Command Scada Cmd 9 Scada Command Scada Cmd 10 Scada Command Transmission Signal SCADA active Fail phy Interf Failure in the physical interface Failure Event lost Failure event lost Hem I A s e Uu EN MRA4 04 09 Page 213 Module IEC60870 5 103 IEC60870 5 103 Module Values Value Description Default Size Menu path Internal erorrs Internal erorrs 0 0 9999999999 Operation Count and RevData IEC 103 NReceived Total Number of 0 0 9999999999 Operation PEEN CENAE u Count and RevData IEC 103 NSent Total Number of sent 0 0 9999999999 Operation ks Count and RevData NEC 103 NBadFramings Number of bad 0 0 9999999999 Operation Messe Count and RevData IEC 103 NBadParities Number of Parity 0 0 9999999999 Operation EIOS Count and RevData IEC 103 NBreakSignals Number of 0 0 9999999999 Operation es Count and RevData IEC 103 NInternalError Number of Internal 0 0 9999999999 Operation ENDS Count and RevData IEC 103 NBadCharChecksu Number of 0 0 9999999999 Operation m Checksum Errors Count and RevData NEC 103 Page 214 EN MRA4 04 09 Parameters Parameters Parameter setting and planning can be done directly at the device or by way of the Smart view software Parameter Definitions Device Parameters Device Parameters are part of
215. dbus Modbus Modbus TCP NOTICE Establishing a connection via TCP IP to the device is only possible if your device is equipped with an Ethernet Interface RJ45 Contact your IT administrator in order to establish the network connection Part 1 Setting the TCP IP Parameters Call up Device parameter TCP IP at the HMI panel and set the following parameters e TCP IP address Subnetmask e Gateway Part 2 Configuration of the Devices Call up Device parameter Modbus and set the following communication parameters e Setting a Unit Identifier is only necessary if a TCP network should be coupled to a RTU network e lf a different port than the default port 502 should be used please proceed as follows e Choose Private within the TCP Port Configuration e Set the port number Set the maximum accepted time of no communication If this time has expired without any comunication the device concludes a failure within the master system Allow or disallow the blocking of SCADA commands Part 3 Hardware Connection There is a RJ45 interface at the rear side of the device for the hardware connection to the control system Establish the connection to the device by means of a proper Ethernet cable Hem I A T EN MRA4 04 09 Page 205 Module Modbus Modbus Direct Commands of the Modbus Parameter Description Setting ra
216. disturbance records and reset special things like statistics thermal replica The description of the reset commands can be found within the NOTICE corresponding modules Manual Resets via Smart view e In case Smart view is not running please start it e f device data has not been loaded yet click Receive Data From The Device in menu Device e Double click the Operation icon in the navigation tree e Double click the Reset icon within the operation menu Double click the entry within the popup that is to be reset or deleted The description of the reset commands can be found within the NOTICE corresponding modules p ER Wi Page 100 EN MRA4 04 09 Assignment List Assignment List The ASSIGNMENT LisT below summarizes all module outputs signals and inputs e g states of the assignments Name Description No assignment Prot available Signal Protection is available Prot active Signal active Prot ExBlo Signal External Blocking Prot Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked Prot ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command Prot Alarm L1 Signal General Alarm L1 Prot Alarm L2 Signal General Alarm L2 Prot Alarm L3 Signal General Alarm L3 Prot Alarm G Signal General Alarm Earth fault Prot Alarm Signal General Alarm Prot Trip L1 Signa
217. dule input respectively of the signal that should activate this Parameter Setting Group Sys PS4 State of the module input respectively of the signal that should activate this Parameter Setting Group EN MRA4 04 09 Page 125 otatus Display Status Display In the status display within the menu Operation the present state of all signals of the gt ASSIGNMENT usr can be viewed This means you are able to see if the individual signals are active or inactive at that moment You can choose whether you want to see all signals in an overall status or whether you want to view the signals sorted by modules State of the module input signal is Is shown at the panel as false 0 true 1 Status Display via Smart View e n case Smart view is not running please start it e If the device data were not yet loaded select Receive Data From The Device from menu Device e Double click on icon Operation in the navigation tree Double click on icon Status Display within the operational data e Double click the Overall status if you want to see all signals at once or call up a module of which you want to see the states You can see the state of all corresponding signals on the window N O TI CE To have the status display updated in a cyclic manner select Automatic Up Date lt in menu View State of the module input signal is Is shown
218. e Digital Inputs Dis Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Debouncing time 6 A change of the state of a digital input will only be no debouncing time 20 ms no debouncing time Device Para Digital Inputs recognized after the 50 ms DI Slot X6 debouncing time has expired become 100 ms Group 1 effective Thus wipers will not be misinterpreted Inverting 7 Inverting the input inactive inactive Device Para signals active Digital Inputs DI Slot X6 Group 1 Debouncing time 7 A change of the state of a digital input will only be no debouncing time 20 ms no debouncing time Device Para Digital Inputs recognized after the 50 ms DI Slot X6 debouncing time has expired become 100 ms Group 1 effective Thus wipers will not be misinterpreted Inverting 8 Inverting the input inactive inactive Device Para signals active Digital Inputs DI Slot X6 Group 1 Debouncing time 8 A change of the state of a digital input will only be recognized after the debouncing time has expired become effective Thus wipers will not be misinterpreted 8 no debouncing time 20 ms 50 ms 100 ms no debouncing time Device Para Digital Inputs DI Slot X6 Group 1 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 135 Module Digital Inputs DIs Optional Digital Input Signals Outputs States
219. e 215 Parameters Device Planning Parameters Device Planning Parameters are part of the Device Parameter Tree Improving the Usability clearness All protection modules that are currently not needed can be de protected switched to invisible by means of Device Planning In Menu Device Planning you can adapt the scope of functionality of the protective device exactly to your needs You can improve the usability by de projecting all modules that are currently not needed Adapting the device to your application For those modules that you need determine how they should work e g directional non directional lt gt Direct Commands Direct Commands are NOT part of the Device Parameter Tree They will be executed directly e g Resetting of a Counter State of the Module Inputs Module Inputs are part of the Device Parameter Tree The State of the Module Input is context dependent By means of the Module Inputs influence can be taken on the Modules You can assign Signals onto Module Inputs The state of the signals that are assigned to an input can be taken from the Status Display Module Inputs can be identified by an at the end of the name Signals Signals are part of the Device Parameter Tree The state of the signal is context dependent Page 216 Signals represent the state of your installation equipment e g Position Indicators of the Circuit Breaker Signals are assessments of the state of th
220. e I AA r EN MRA4 04 09 Page 347 IH2 Module Inrush Device Planning Parameters of the Inrush Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu path Mode Mode do not use use Device planning use Global Protection Parameters of the Inrush module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path ExBlo1 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a Prot parameter set and if the state of the NH2 assigned signal is true ExBlo2 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated allowed within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true Global Prot Para Prot 1H2 Page 348 EN MRA4 04 09 IH2 Module Inrush Setting Group Parameters of the Inrush Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Function Permanent activation inactive inactive Protection Para or deactivation of ti iens module stage nds Prot 1H2 ExBlo Fc Activate allow or inactive inactive Protection Para inactivate disallow ii iens blocking of the ae i module stage This Prot parameter is only effective if a signal is IH2 assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are b
221. e LED lights up in green Device Para ee j the state rod LEDs assignment of the red flash LEDs group A signals is untrue aren iiaeh ILED 2 Assignment 1 Assignment 1 n Assignment List LEDs group A Device Para TripCmd LEDs LEDs group B LEDs group A LED 2 Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para M P neg active LEDs LEDs group A LED 2 Assignment 2 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 2 Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para en M ee active LEDs LEDs group A LED 2 Assignment 3 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 2 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 167 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para an s active LEDs LEDs group A LED 2 Assignment 4 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 2 Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para 2 iin active LEDs LEDs group A LED 2 Assignment 5 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 2 Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para an 3 kaa active LEDs LEDs group A LED 2 Latched Defines whether the inactive inactive Device Para LED will be acknowledged a
222. e grid and the equipment System OK Transformer failure detected Signals represent decisions that are taken by the device e g Trip command based on your parameter settings EN MRA4 04 09 Parameters Adaptive Parameter Sets 1 oA noeuioAnoe 9Aloeul eAnoe so u 4 u s0 0 so u 4 ut 0 9Anoeul aAnoe oAngoeur9Ang2e 9AJ9eul oAnoe 9Anjoeur eAnoe eAnoeul eAnoe 19s 1ejeuleJegd o I I 9Angoeui9Anoe 9Aljoeul eAnoe so u u00 s o u ut 0 9Anoeul aAnoe oAgoeulr oAnoe 9AJ 9eul eAnoe 9Aloeur eAnoe eAgnoeur eAnoe 8S Jejeulejed 41 o I 9AnoeuroAnoe SAIOCUI BAOe so u 4 u s070 s0 up ui 0 9Anoeul oAnoe 9Anoeulr oAnoe o9N oeul oAnoe SAIOCUI BAI Oe GAI oeut oAnoe Z 19s JejouleJed I 7 I I OAnoeuli 9Anoe OAnoeul oAnoe s 0 u 4 u 6070 s o u L ui 0 oAnoeul oAnoe OAnoeul 9Anoe SAI OCUI BAOe OAIOCUI BAI OR BANOeUI AA Oe JOS Jo jeuleJed o i O A 1e du l sIpuou olg HI jeser Spo josey Jeyo Jeu lt l 93 puuOdu 1 olgxa puiOdul oig 94 H lul eJ x3 94 oIgxJ uonoun epeog e SSd piepuejs piepuejs piepue s piepue s piepuejs piepuejs piepuejs PES lt mduenssd SAIICUL BAIE SAIICUL BAHOE s 0 u4 u S00 s o
223. e input state External blocking2 ExP 2 ExBlo TripCmd Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command ExP 2 Alarm l Module input state External Alarm ExP 2 Trip Module input state External Trip ExP 3 active Signal active ExP 3 ExBlo Signal External Blocking ExP 3 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked ExP 3 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command ExP 3 Alarm Signal External Alarm ExP 3 Trip Signal External Trip ExP 3 TripCmd Signal External Trip Command ExP 3 ExBlo1 Module input state External blocking ExP 3 ExBlo2 Module input state External blocking2 ExP 3 ExBlo TripCmd Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command ExP 3 Alarm l Module input state External Alarm ExP 3 Trip Module input state External Trip ExP 4 active Signal active ExP 4 ExBlo Signal External Blocking ExP 4 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked ExP 4 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command ExP 4 Alarm Signal External Alarm ExP 4 Trip Signal External Trip ExP 4 TripCmd Signal External Trip Command ExP 4 ExBlot I Module input state External blocking1 ExP 4 ExBlo2 Module input state External blocking2 ExP 4 ExBlo TripCmd I Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command
224. e time In addition to that motors evoke inrush currents when they are re energized Both effects might cause an unwanted alarm trip of the overcurrent protection stages If the CPLU Module detects an Cold Load the following countermeasures against unwanted tripping are available Blocking of the Overcurrent Protection Increase the tripping thresholds respectively the tripping times by means of Adaptive Parameters A CAUTION This Module issues a Signal only it is not armed In order to take influence on the tripping settings of the overcurrent protection you have to assign the signal CPLU Errekrive onto an Adaptive Parameter Set Please refer to chapter Parameter Adaptive Parameter Sets Within the Adaptive Parameter Set you have to modify the tripping characteristic of the overcurrent protection according to your needs pe I GA A o G c Mr EN MRA4 04 09 Page 339 CLPU Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup Example Mode Circuit Breaker Position t Pickup Delay t Release Delay o CLPU detected o Cold Load 1 CLPU name CLPU 1 a Aux ON EEE sa Page 340 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 341 old V 9ueu Buruuni yy old YY eeu CT g m CCO I ss L A v oO O e q dn pid i nd19 gt 4O SOd qO 3dO xny Aejaq aseajay Nd p 2 SES ell e Ae eg dn gt x id 1 gt l Nd19 fid 1o 3dO xny EET r R
225. e tripping delay feed 0 5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay Increase the current with an abrupt change to 0 2 In Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay Successful test result The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays threshold values and fallback ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list Permissible deviations tolerances can be found under Technical Data prx sssi Page 388 EN MRA4 04 09 PQS Power Protection Module ANSI 32 37 NOTICE W EN MRA4 04 09 Testing the threshold values Example Threshold 0 2 Pn Feed rated voltage and rated current with 180 degree phase shift between voltage and current pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay The measured values for the active power P must show a negative algebraic sign Set the tripping threshold e g 0 2 Pn In order to test the tripping thresholds feed 0 1 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay Increase the current slowly until the relay picks up Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant Compare the tripping value to the parameterized Testing the tripping delay Example Threshold 0 2 Pn Feed rated voltage and rated current with 180 degree phase shift between voltage and current pointers
226. ection stages Necessary components e 1 phase AC voltage source Timer for measuring of the tripping time Voltmeter Procedure for each element Testing the threshold values For testing the threshold and fallback values the test voltage at the measuring input for the residual voltage has to be increased until the relay is activated When comparing the displayed values with those of the voltmeter the deviation must be within the permissible tolerances Testing the trip delay For testing the trip delay a timer is to be connected to the contact of the associated trip relay The timer is started when the limiting value of the tripping voltage is exceeded and it is stopped when the relay trips Testing the fallback ratio Reduce the measuring quantity to less than 97 of the trip value The relay must only fall back at 97 of the trip value at the latest Successful test result The measured threshold values trip delays and fallback ratios comply with those specified in the adjustment list Permissible deviations tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data Uo O EN MRA4 04 09 Page 367 VE Protection Module Residual Voltage ANSI 59N Commissioning Residual Voltage Protection Calculated ANSI 59N Object to be tested Test of the residual voltage protection elements Necessary means e 3 phase voltage source N O TI CE Calculation of the residual voltage is only possible if phase voltages star were applied to the
227. ed via DI blocking functions work properly To enable checks on all LEDs and relay functions these have to be provided with the relevant alarm and tripping functions of the respective protection functions elements This has to be tested in practical operation Check of all temporary blockings via digital inputs In order to avoid malfunctions all blockings related to tripping non tripping of protection function have to be tested The test can be very complex and should therefore be performed by the same people who set up the protection concept Check of all general trip blockings All general trip blockings have to be tested N O TI CE Prior to the initial operation of the protection device all tripping times and values shown in the adjustment list have to be confirmed by a secondary test Any description of functions parameters inputs or outputs that does not N o TI CE match the device in hand can be ignored Page 484 EN MRA4 04 09 Commissioning Putting out of Operation Plug out the Relay Warning Dismounting the relay will lead to a loss of the protection functionality Ensure that there is a back up protection If you are not aware of the consequences of dismounting the device stop Don t start A WARNING Inform SCADA before you start Switch off the power supply Ensure that the cabinet is dead and that there are no voltages that could lead to personal injury Plug out t
228. ed as follows after setting up the serial connection Select menu point Device Connection in menu Settings e Select Serial Connection Click button Settings Change to register card General Ensure that Communication cable between two computers Com X is selected in the Drop Down Menu X interface number where you have connected the zero modem cable to Click button Configure Ensure that the Hardware Flowing Control is activated e Ensure that baud rate 115200 is selected pra A e n egest i Page 70 EN MRA4 04 09 Smart View Set up a Connection via Serial Interface under Windows XP After installation of the software the Connection PC Notebook to the Device has to be configured once so that you are able to read device data or re write them into the device by means of the software Smart view NOTICE For connection of your PCs notebooks with the device you need a zero modem cable no serial cable please refer to chapter Zero Modem Cable N O TI CE If your PC notebook does not have a serial interface you need a special USB to serial adapter Only if the USB to serial adapter is correctly installed aided by the provided CD the communication with the device can be established see next chapter Setting up Configuring the connection e Connect your PC notebook with the device via a zero modem cable e St
229. ed operation of the CBF is caused by any protective trip Object to be tested Test of the circuit breaker failure protection Necessary means e Current source e May be ampere meter e Timer N O TI CE When testing the applied test current must always be higher than the tripping threshold LSV If the test current falls below the threshold while the CB is in the OFF position no alarm will be generated Procedure single phase For testing the tripping time of the CBF protection a test current has to be impressed which is higher than the threshold value of one of the current protection modules When the trip relay that is assigned to the protection function picks up a timer will be started and the time until the CBF is signaled by the corresponding relay will be measured To avoid wiring errors it should be checked if the CB in the higher level system switches off The time measured by the timer should be in line with the specified tolerances Alternatively the timer can be started when the auxiliary voltage is applied and the test current impressed and then stopped when the relay for the CBF protection picks up In this case the previously measured tripping delay has to be subtracted from the measured time A WARNING Re connect the control cable to the circuit breaker Successful test result The actual times measured comply with the set point times The CB in the higher level section switches off Ez
230. eeeeseeeceeeeseueeseeeseeeeseeeeseeeseueeseeessueeseeeeaaes 459 Trip Circuit Supervision Module Signals Output States a r 459 Commissioning Trip Circuit Supervision for Circuit Breakers 4TC 460 CTS Supervision MopuLE CURRENT TRANSFORMER Supervision ANSI 60Lf 461 Device Planning Parameters of the Current Transformer Supervision 463 Global Protection Parameter of the Current Transformer Supervision 463 Setting Group Parameters of the Current Transformer Supervision 464 Current Transformer Supervision Input States ccccccccccccceececseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeseeseeeeseesseeeseeeeeeeseees 465 Current Transformer Supervision Signals Outputs States 465 Commissioning Current Transformer Failure Supervision ANSI 60L 466 VTS Supervision Mopure VorracEe TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION ANSI 60FL 467 Device Planning Parameters of the Voltage Transformer Module 469 Global Protection P
231. eeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeesseeeesaeeesaeeeeseeeeeeaeeneeees 361 VE Protection Mobute REsipuAL VottaGe ANSI 59NTJ esee ee 362 Device Planning Parameters of the Residual Voltage Supervision Module 364 Global Protection Parameters of the Residual Voltage Supervision Module 364 Setting Group Parameters of the Residual Voltage Supervision Module 365 Residual Voltage Supervision Module Input States a a nenne 366 Residual Voltage Supervision Module Signals Output States 366 Commissioning Residual Voltage Protection Measured ANSI 59NJ 367 Commissioning Residual Voltage Protection Calculated ANSI 59N 368 V 012 PROTECTION MODULE AsYMMETRY 369 Device planning parameters of the asymmetry module ssssssssssssssseesen eene 371 Global protection parameter of the asymmetry module a nennen 371 Parameter set parameters of the asymmetry module
232. elay a timer is to be connected to the contact of the associated trip relay The timer is started when the limiting value of the tripping voltage is exceeded and it is stopped when the relay trips Testing the fallback ratio Reduce the measuring quantity to less than 97 of the trip value The relay must only fall back at 97 of the trip value at the earliest Successful test result The measured threshold values trip delays and fallback ratios comply with those specified in the adjustment list Permissible deviations tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data SSS ss eee Page 360 EN MRA4 04 09 V Protection Module Voltage Protection ANSI 27 59 Commissioning Undervoltage Protection ANSI 27 This test can be carried out similar to the test for overvoltage protection by using the related undervoltage values Please consider the following deviations e For testing the threshold values the test voltage has to be decreased until the relay is activated For detection of the fallback value the measuring quantity has to be increased so to achieve more than 103 of the trip value At 103 of the trip value the relay is to fall back at the earliest U I AA r e s EN MRA4 04 09 Page 361 VE Protection Module Residual Voltage ANSI 59N VE Protection Module Residual Voltage ANSI 59N Available stages VE 1 VE 2 Both elements of the res
233. en Device Para EE i the state fad ILEDs assignment of the red flash LEDs group A signals is untrue areemilasi ILED 6 Assignment 1 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 6 Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para i nin active LEDs LEDs group A LED 6 Assignment 2 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 6 Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para is bdsm active LEDs LEDs group A LED 6 Assignment 3 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 6 Page 174 EN MRA4 04 09 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para of the assigned signal active LEDs LEDs group A LED 6 Assignment 4 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 6 Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para of the assigned i signal active LEDs LEDs group A LED 6 Assignment 5 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 6 Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para of the assigned signal active LEDs LEDs group A LED 6 Latched Defines whether the _ inactive inactive Device Para LED will be ii LED acknowled
234. ence and observations This manual describes the optionally full featured versions of the devices All technical information and data included in this manual reflect their state at the time this document was issued We reserve the right to carry out technical modifications in line with further development without changing this manual and without previous notice Hence no claim can be brought based on the information and descriptions this manual includes Text graphic and formulae do not always apply to the actual delivery scope The drawings and graphics are not true to scale We do not accept any liability for damage and operational failures caused by operating errors or disregarding the directions of this manual No part of this manual is allowed to be reproduced or passed on to others in any form unless Woodward SEG GmbH amp Co KG have approved in writing This user manual is part of the delivery scope when purchasing the device In case the device is passed on sold to a third party the manual has to be handed over as well Any repair work carried out on the device requires skilled and competent personnel who need to be well aware especially of the local safety regulations and have the necessary experience for working on electronic protection devices and power installations provided by evidence Information Concerning Liability and Warranty Woodward SEG does not accept any liability for damage resulting from conversions or chan
235. ensated networks EE e I Page 44 EN MRA4 04 09 Current Transformers CT Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field MRI4 MCI4 MRA4 MCA4 gt terminal markings X3 L1 L2 II2 IL 4 e lt 4 12 Three phase current measurement In secondary 5 A Earth current measuring via Holmgreen connection IGnom secondary 5 A Notice Not recommended for isolated and compensated networks EN MRA4 04 09 Page 45 Current Transformers CT Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field MRI4 MCI4 MRA4 MCA4 gt terminal markings X3 L1 L2 L ul 4 oc 4 2 4 113 o 1A lt IC IL3 Three phase current measurement In secondary 1 A Earth current measuring via Holmgreen connection IGnom secondary 1 A Notice Not recommended for isolated and compensated networks Page 46 EN MRA4 04 09 Current Transformers CT Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field MRI4 MCI4 MRA4 MCA4 gt terminal markings X3 T q t IL2 ss a po t LER 2 Ring Core Type Current Transformer Measures the ground current Sum of the three phase currents Can be used for measuring the N earth current in isolated and IN compensated networks The shield is to be returned q through the ring core current transformer ALL VASE m Two phase current measurement V connection In secondary 5 A E
236. er Description Options Default Menu path Mode Mode do not use use Device planning use Global Protection Parameters of the CBF Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path ExBlo1 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a Supervision parameter set and if the state of the CBF assigned signal is true ExBlo2 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated allowed within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true Global Prot Para Supervision CBF EN MRA4 04 09 Page 449 CBF Supervision Module Circuit Breaker Failure Protection ANSI 50BF Setting Group Parameters of the CBF Module N O TI C E In order to prevent a faulty activation of the CBF Module the alarm time must be greater than the sum of e Close open time of the circuit breaker please refer to Technical Data of the manufacturer of the circuit Breaker Tripping delay of the device please refer to Technical Data e Security margin Operating time Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Function Permanent activation inactive inactive Protection Para or deactivation of ii jens module stage idi Supervision CBF ExBlo Fc Activate allow or inactive inactive Protection Para inactivate disa
237. ermanent After 0 5 up to 1 s the line is probably no longer faulty and the complete line can be restored re energized If the line is still faulty segments of the line will be switched off selectively by the time graded protection devices 2 Fasttrip at the end after the last permitted reclosure attempt shot is executed Purpose To prevent unnecessary damage from the electrical equipment in case of permanent faults If the last reclosure attempt shot is executed and the fault is still there permanent then the circuit breaker can be switched off by a fast trip beforehand the tipping delay of the protection module that has activated the AR module has expired Fp r H amp e Gt sssi Page 418 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 419 HV 24 JO uonjioqe ue esneo jim awy eAnejedo pezuejeuieuued y uey JeBuo ese zey sown Burddu 1 uonne5 as a H P mGommGmcecomnommcomcemommommmetu L L L L L tJ E L W E I s di i Z d pes y UIUJIM puewwoo 9 du Buissiw 69 p lluinJ O s O jou uonipuoo Bues asm ns I i eAgoe E EN E E 4 Hl e 1 0 11 0 i 0 0 angoeul enyoe mT 1 ues uomiun qv MV ou s oes m NO Xn Ag eso pwguogod i i uonoun dV peiiJny uoueguo WEIS l 0 l 307da s o o gt ou s Max number of
238. eseeeseeeeseeesseeeseeeseeeeesesaeegeeas 321 12 PnRorEcrioN MopuLE UNBALANCED Loan PRorEcrTioN ANSI 46 322 Device Planning Parameters of the Unbalanced Load Module 325 Global Protection Parameters of the Unbalanced Load Module 325 Setting Group Parameters of the Unbalanced Load Module 326 Unbalanced Load Module Input States a a nennen nennen nns 328 Unbalanced Load Module Signals Output States ssssesssssssssssssseeeeneee nennen 328 Commissioning Unbalanced Load Protection ANSI 46 329 SOTF PROTECTION MODULE SWITCH ONTO FAuLT 331 Device Planning Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module 333 Global Protection Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module 334 Setting Group Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module 336 Switch Onto Fault Module Input States
239. etting range Default Menu path PSet Switch Switching Parameter Set PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 PSS via Inp fct PSS via Scada PS1 Protection Para PSet Switch PS1 activated by This Setting Group will be the active one if The Parameter Setting Group Switch is set to Switch via Input and the other three input functions are inactive at the same time In case that there is more than one input function active no Parameter Setting Group Switch will be executed In case all input functions are inactive the device will keep working with the Setting Group that was activated lastly Only available if PSet Switch PSS via Inp fct 1 n Assignment List Protection Para PSet Switch PS2 activated by This Setting Group will be the active one if The Parameter Setting Group Switch is set to Switch via Input and the other three input functions are inactive at the same time In case that there is more than one input function active no Parameter Setting Group Switch will be executed In case all input functions are inactive the device will keep working with the Setting Group that was activated lastly Only available if PSet Switch PSS via Inp fct 1 n Assignment List Protection Para PSet Switch EN MRA4 04 09 Page 477 Device Parameters Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path PS3 activated by This Setting Grou
240. eu z o gx3 eueu 1sr 1u uuuBissv u l LOoIgx3 euieu o jgx3 eueu O gX3 euieu OAIJoeut 24 o gx3 uieu G owe oAnoe euleu oAnoe 9AI oeut uonounJ euieu pexooIq 1o payeayoeep jou s ajnpow uoijosjoug jeeues eu P 9AI oe Old Jo1d uej6eiq o 1843Y eseeld e qexoo q aJe zey s jnpow ez euieu suog Page 239 EN MRA4 04 09 Blockings Current protective functions cannot only be blocked permanently function inactive or temporarily by any blocking signal from the assignment list but also by reverse Interlocking All other protection functions can be activated deactivated or blocked in the same manner name ExBlo name ExBlo1 l name ExBlo2 l T gt 9 c ND lt D gt x e Lu x o ui E c S c name active o gt e eo o 8 5 o 2 oO 2 o c e s o J2 J 5 B E E E gt E e S Gg t EM 5 oO J o 9 o m m EE S je amp 5 9 m gt m E meg E gt o E w A is 2 42 x 5 a c o5 etc T E 8 ls5 1 5 amp E x O 9g 3 le z2 s o Cc G o x i o 9 NEM EM 7 E Ee Ww o 2 z 5al lS T EM lt s lt d EM lt ra s Sis NS c EE c E c E EM c c 2 2 8 g 5 Oo cris y o clo o0 o pass m 9 2 a n II n G c 7 V
241. event Time Synchronization Time and date of the relay can be set by means of the time synchronization function of the IEC60870 5 103 protocol If the time synchronization signal is send out with a confirmation request the device will answer with a confirmation signal pre HPa w amp rssssasi Page 210 EN MRA4 04 09 Module IEC60870 5 103 Spontaneous Events The events that are generated by the device will be forwarded to the master with numbers for standard function types standard information The data point list comprises all events that can be generated by the device Cyclic Measurement The device generates on a cyclic base measured values by means of ASDU 9 They can be read out via a class 2 query Please take into account that the measured values will be send out as multiples 1 2 or 2 4 times the rated value How to set 1 2 or 2 4 as multiplier for a value can be taken from the data point list The parameter Transm priv meas val defines if additional measurement values should be transmitted in the private part Public and private measured values are transmitted by ASDUY That means that either a private or a public ASDU9 will be transmitted If this parameter is set the ASDU9 will contain additional measured values that are an enhancement of the standard The private ASDU9 is send with a fixed function type and information number that does not depend the type of device Please refer
242. evice Planning Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu path Mode Mode do not use use Device planning use EN MRA4 04 09 Page 333 SOTF Protection Module Switch Onto Fault Global Protection Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Mode Mode CB POS CB POS Protection Para I lt Global Prot Para CB POS And I lt ISOTF CB manual ON Ext SOTF ExBlo1 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a ISOTF parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true ExBlo2 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a ISOTF parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true Ex rev Interl External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module by i er ira e Global Prot Para interlocking if ISOTF blocking is activated allowed within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true Manual ON The circuit breaker Protection Para was switched on manually if the state CB Manual ON Global Prot Para of the assigned ISOTF signal is true Only available if Mode CB manual ON CB Pos Detect Criterion by which Protection Para s e
243. evice We planning V Mode V t V Prot V 1 t8 Tripping delay 0 00 10 00s 3 00s Protection Para Only available if Device Phe planning V Mode V t V Prot V 1 V t 9 Pick up value 0 01 2 00Vn 0 90Vn Protection Para Only available if Device Pn planning V Mode V t V Prot V 1 t9 Tripping delay 0 00 10 00s 3 00s Protection Para Only available if Device a planning V Mode V t V Prot V 1 V t lt 10 Pick up value 0 01 2 00Vn 0 90Vn Protection Para Only available if Device a planning V Mode V t lt V Prot V 1 t10 Tripping delay 0 00 10 00s 3 00s Protection Para Only available if Device PM planning V Mode V t V Prot V 1 Page 358 EN MRA4 04 09 V Protection Module Voltage Protection ANSI 27 59 Voltage Protection Module Input States Name Description Assignment via ExBlo1 l Module input state External Protection Para DOC I Global Prot Para V Prot N 1 ExBlo2 l Module input state External Protection Para DOOR Global Prot Para V Prot N 1 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Protection Para Blocking of the Trip Command Global Prot Para V Prot N Voltage Protection Module Signals Output States Name Description active Signal active ExBlo Signal External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command Al
244. evice are transferred when the button Transfer all parameters into the device is pressed provided all device parameters are valid n order to re transfer changed parameters into the device please select Transfer all parameters into the device in menu Device Confirm the safety inquiry Shall the parameters be overwritten into the device Enter the password for setting parameters in the popup window Thereafter the changed data is transferred to the device and adopted e Confirm the inquiry Parameters successfully updated It is recommended to save the parameters into a local file on your hard drive Shall The Data Be Saved Locally with Yes recommended Select a suitable folder on your hard disk e Confirm the chosen folder by clicking Save e The changed parameter data is now saved in the folder chosen by you emp Pow c c nes sss Page 78 EN MRA4 04 09 Smart View Backup and Documentation when using Smart view How to save device data on a PC Click on Save as in menu File Specify a name choose a folder on your hard disk and save the device data accordingly Printing of Device Data When using Smart view Setting List The Printing menu offers the following options Printer setting Page preview Printing Export the selected printing range into a txt file The printing menu of the Smart view software
245. external blocking of the tripping command is activated allowed the tripping command of the entire device will be blocked if the state of the assigned signal becomes true 1 n Assignment List Protection Para Global Prot Para Prot Heu I A A Pe s EN MRA4 04 09 Page 249 Module Protection Prot Protection Module Input States Name Description Assignment via ExBlo1 l Module input state External Protection Para cid Global Prot Para Prot ExBlo2 Module input state External Protection Para Pacang Global Prot Para Prot ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Protection Para Blocking of the Trip Command Global Prot Para Prot Protection Module Signals Output States Name Description available Signal Protection is available active Signal active ExBlo Signal External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command Alarm L1 Signal General Alarm L1 Alarm L2 Signal General Alarm L2 Alarm L3 Signal General Alarm L3 Alarm G Signal General Alarm Earth fault Alarm Signal General Alarm Trip L1 Signal General Trip L1 Trip L2 Signal General Trip L2 Trip L3 Signal General Trip L3 Trip G Signal General Trip Ground fault Trip Signal General Trip Res Fault a Mains No Signal Resetting of fault numbe
246. figuring the connection e Connect your PC notebook with the device via a zero modem cable e Start the software Smart view Select the menu point Device Connection in menu Settings e Click on Serial Connection Click button Settings e When initially setting up the connection a dialogue window appears with the information that so far a direct connection with your protection device has not been established Click on Yes e f so far a location has not been set up on your PC your location information has to be put in Confirm the pop up window Telephone and Modem Options with OK e The Windows network connection assistant appears after the location information is set up Select the connection type Establish direct connection to another computer e Select the serial interface COM Port where the device shall be connected to Select To be used for all users in window Availability of the connection e Do not change the connection name appearing in window Name of the connection and click the button Complete Finally you arrive again in window Device Installation from where you started establishing the connection Confirm the adjustments by clicking the OK button EN MRA4 04 09 Page 69 Smart View N O T C E Due to an bug in Windows 2000 it is possible that the automatically made communication settings are not correctly adopted In order to overcome this problem proce
247. for this product family device line are for instance Feeder protection e Mains protection e Machine protection Any usage beyond these applications the devices are not designed for The manufacturer cannot be held liable for any resulting damage the user alone bears the risk for this As to the appropriate use of the device The technical data specified by Woodward SEG have to be met Hem I A A SH esgn EN MRA4 04 09 Page 13 IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS A WARNING OUT OF DATE PUBLICATION This publication may have been revised or updated since this copy was produced To verify that you have the latest revision be sure to check the Woodward SEG documentation website doc seg pp com The latest version of most publications is available at doc seg pp com If your publication is not there please contact your customer service representative to get the latest copy Page 14 EN MRA4 04 09 IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS CAUTION Electrostatic Discharge Awareness All electronic equipment is electro static sensitive some components more than others To protect these components from electro static damage you must take special precautions to minimize or eliminate electrostatic discharges Follow these precautions when working with or near the control 1 Before doing maintenance on the electronic control discharge the static electricity on your body to ground b
248. g is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a IN Prot parameter set and if the state of the VE I assigned signal is true ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para S s abl Global Prot Para stage if blocking is V Prot activated allowed within a parameter NE TI set and if the state of the assigned signal is true Page 364 EN MRA4 04 09 VE Protection Module Residual Voltage ANSI 59N Setting Group Parameters of the Residual Voltage Supervision Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Function Permanent activation or inactive inactive Protection Para deactivation of module stage active lt n gt V Prot VE 1 ExBlo Fc Activate allow or inactivate inactive inactive Protection Para disallow blocking of the ii kos module stage This aon i parameter is only effective if IN Prot a signal is assigned to the corresponding global VE I protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo Fczactive Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the inactive inactive Protection Para Trip Command of the ii fone module stage cds V Prot VE 1 ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate allow or inactivate inactive inactive Protection Para disallow blocking of the jens module stage This parameter is only effective if IN Prot a signal is assigned
249. g of the state inactive inactive Device Para M i ae active LEDs LEDs group A LED 7 Assignment 4 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 7 Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para Jn a PRBS active LEDs LEDs group A LED 7 Page 176 EN MRA4 04 09 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Assignment 5 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 7 Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para M M o active LEDs LEDs group A LED 7 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 177 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs LED Module Input States Name Description Assignment via LED1 1 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 1 LED1 2 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 1 LED1 3 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 1 LED1 4 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 1 LED1 5 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 1 Acknow Sig 1 Module input state Acknowledgment Signal only for automatic acknowledgment Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 1 LED2 1 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 2
250. g ratio 97 or 0 5 x Vn t 1 resp 10 ms Operating time lt 40ms Starting from U higher than 1 3 x U gt Release time lt 40ms Voltage Protection V lt x Tolerance V lt 1 5 of the setting value resp 1 Vn resetting ratio 103 or 0 5 x Vn t 1 resp 10 ms Operating time lt 40ms Starting from V lower than 0 7 x V lt Release time lt 40ms Voltage Protection V t lt x Tolerance V t lt 1 5 of the setting value resp 1 Vn resetting ratio 103 or 0 5 x Vn t 1 resp 10 ms Operating time lt 40ms Starting from V lower than 0 7 x V lt Release time lt 40ms Residual Voltage Protection VE x Tolerance VE 1 596 of the setting value resp 1 Vn resetting ratio 97 or 0 5 x Vn t 1 resp 10 ms Operating time lt 40ms Starting from VE higher than 1 3 x VE gt Release time lt 40ms He I GA A o v mg M EN MRA4 04 09 Page 505 Tolerances Frequency Protection f gt x Tolerance f gt 10 mHz at fn resetting ratio 99 9596 or 0 05 fn t 1 resp 10 ms Operating time Starting from f higher than f gt 0 02 Hz 40 50Hz lt 60ms 50 70Hz lt 50ms Release time 40 50Hz lt 85ms 50 70Hz lt 75ms Frequency Protection f x Tolerance f lt 10 mHz at fn t 1 resp 10 ms resetting ratio 100 05 or 0 05 fn Operating time Starting from f lower than f lt 0 02 Hz 40 50Hz lt 60ms 50 0Hz lt
251. ged ids x automatically if the LEDs group A event is gone or whether the LED is ILED 7 to be acknowledged by a signal manually Ack signal Acknowledgment 1 n Assignment List Device Para signal for the LED If latching is set to LEDs active the LED can LEDs group A only be acknowledged if LED 7 those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back Only available if Latched active LED active color The LED lights up in green red Device Para this color if the state of the OR red LEDs assignment of the red flash LEDs group A ignals i Stier hu green flash LED 7 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 175 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path LED inactive color The LED lights upin green Device Para Brand i the state d LEDs assignment of the red flash LEDs group A signals is untrue green flash ILED 7 Assignment 1 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 7 Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para A M i a active LEDs LEDs group A LED 7 Assignment 2 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 7 Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para of M a alin active LEDs LEDs group A LED 7 Assignment 3 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 7 Inverting 3 Invertin
252. ges carried out on the device or planning projecting work parameter setting or adjustment changes done by the customer The warranty expires after a device has been opened by others than Woodward SEG specialists Warranty and liability conditions stated in Woodward SEG s General Terms and Conditions are not supplemented by the above mentioned explanations He I AA r oaAos nxr EN MRA4 04 09 Page 11 IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS The signal definitions shown below serve the safety of life and limb as well as for the appropriate operating life of the device DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in A DAN G ER death or serious injury WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury A CAUTION CAUTION used with the safety alert symbol indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in minor or moderate injury NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal injury NOTICE E E did CAUTION without the safety alert symbol is used to address practices not related to personal injury prec sss a ia Page 12 EN MRA4 04 09 IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS Read this entire manual and all other publications pertaining to the work to be performed before installing operating or servicing this equipment Practice all pla
253. gger event start Fault rec Start5 I State of the module input recording if Trigger event start Fault rec Start6 l State of the module input recording if Trigger event start recording if Fault rec Start7 l State of the module input Trigger event start recording if Fault rec Start8 l State of the module input Trigger event start PowerCr Cr Overflow Wp Signal Counter Overflow Wp PowerCr Cr Overflow Wp Signal Counter Overflow Wp PowerCr Cr Overflow Wq Signal Counter Overflow Wq PowerCr Cr Overflow Wq Signal Counter Overflow Wq PowerCr Wp Reset Cr Signal Wp Reset Counter PowerCr Wp Reset Cr Signal Wp Reset Counter PowerCr Wq Reset Cr Signal Wq Reset Counter PowerCr Wq Reset Cr Signal Wq Reset Counter PowerCr Res all Energy Cr Signal Reset of all Energy Counters Modbus Transmission Signal SCADA active Modbus Scada Cmd 1 Scada Command Modbus Scada Cmd 2 Scada Command Modbus Scada Cmd 3 Scada Command Modbus Scada Cmd 4 Scada Command EN MRA4 04 09 Page 123 Assignment List Name Description Modbus Scada Cmd 5 Scada Command Modbus Scada Cmd 6 Scada Command Modbus Scada Cmd 7 Scada Command Modbus Scada Cmd 8 Scada Command Modbus Scada Cmd 9 Scada Command Modbus Scada Cmd 10 Scada Command Modbus Scada Cmd 11
254. gital Input Signals Outputs Siqtes mee 136 BINARY OUTPUT REuLAYs u 137 S I C OL uu uuu E ua E 139 Global Protection Parameters of the Binary Output Relays a r r s 140 Binary Output Relay Input States a rara nnne nnne nsn n serre sni aa sre sna ns 154 Binary Output Relay Signals nennen nnne nnne nnne nnn ina rase sessi sra sa rase arse nnn 160 Licht EMirriNG DIODES LEDS J S 161 I y OP eL 164 Global Protection Parameters of the LED Module 165 LED Module Input States a a a a aaa ise sre sene serre sens 178 OPERATING PANEL HMI 183 Special Parameters of the Panel a a a n rea s rse s rsa rasan nass nnns 183 Direct Commands of the Panel a du suux laus 20geeteseancbucecs 183 Global P
255. gnal is true ExBlo2 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a PF Prot parameter set and if the state of the IPFI assigned signal is true ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para Global Prot Para PF Prot PF 1 Page 396 EN MRA4 04 09 PF Protection Module Power Factor ANSI 55 Parameter set parameters of the Power Factor module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Function Permanent activation or inactive inactive Protection Para deactivation of t jens module stage Mis PF Prot PF 1 ExBlo Fc Activate allow or inactivate inactive inactive Protection Para disallow blocking of the f js module stage This ds parameter is only effective if PF Prot a signal is assigned to the corresponding global PF 1 protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo Fc active Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the inactive inactive Protection Para Trip Command of the t jane module stage ne PF Prot PF 1 ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate allow or inactivate inactive inactive Protection Para disallow blocking of the f jns module stage This inda i parameter is only effective if PF Prot a signal is assigned to the corresponding global PF 1 protection p
256. h VE Blo VE Blo active inactive inactive Protection Para means that the IG ii dist stage will only excite dr i if a residual voltage Prot higher than the pick up value is AG 1 measured at the same time VE Blo inactive means that the excitation of the IG stage does not depend on any residual voltage stage VE If the pick up value is 0 01 2 00Vn 1 00Vn Protection Para exceeded the jens module stage will be i started Prot Only available if VE AGHI Blo active t Tripping delay 0 00 300 00s 0 00s Protection Para Only available if i lt n gt Characteristic Prot DEFT IG 1 t char Time 0 05 20 00 1 Protection Para multiplier tripping characteristic factor i lt n gt Prot Only available if Characteristic AGHI INV Or Characteristic Therm Flat Or Characteristic IT Or Characteristic I2T Or Characteristic 4T Reset Mode Reset Mode instantaneous instantaneous Protection Para Only available if t delay Est Characteristic calculated Prot INV Or Characteristic AG Therm Flat Or Characteristic IT Or Characteristic I2T Or Characteristic 4T Page 308 EN MRA4 04 09 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path t reset Reset time for 0 00 60 00s 0 00s Protection Para intermittent phase ens failures INV i characteristics only Prot Only
257. he signal VTS ALarm is generated now Successful test result part 2 The signal VTS Atarm is generated Hem I A A f EN MRA4 04 09 Page 473 Device Parameters Device Parameters Date and Time In menu Device parameters Date Time you can set date and time Synchronize Date and Time via Smart View n case Smart view is not running please start it e f device data has not been loaded yet click Receive Data From The Device in menu Device Double click the Device parameters icon in the navigation tree e Double click the Date time icon within the operational data e Out of the working window you can now synchronize date and time of the device with your PC i e That means that the device takes over date and time from your PC Version Within this menu Device parameters Version you can obtain information on the soft and hardware version Version via Smart view Within this menu File Properties you can obtain detailed information on the currently opened file like e g soft and hardware version NOTICE In order to be able to transmit a parameter file e g offline created into the device the following issues must comply Type Code written on the top of the device type label and Version of the device model can be found in menu Device Parameters Version rm o e sI Page 474 EN MRA4 04 09
258. he terminals at the rear side of the device Do not pull any cable pull on the plugs If it is stuck use for example a screw driver Fasten the cables and terminals in the cabinet by means of cable clips to ensure that no accidental electrical connections are caused Hold the device at the front side while opening the mounting nuts Remove the device carefully out of the cabinet In case no other device is to be mounted or replaced cover close the cut out in the front door Close the cabinet Hem I A A eee EN MRA4 04 09 Page 485 Service Service General Within this menu you can initiate a reboot of the device p RO ssssrvIUIai Page 486 EN MRA4 04 09 Self Supervision Self Supervision HighPROTEC devices are continuously monitored and supervised through different methods during normal operation as well as during start up phase Results of this supervision may be messages appearing within event recorder from release 1 2 or later indications within the display or Smart view corrective measures disabling of protection functions restart of the device or any combination out of these In case of failures that cannot be corrected immediately three restarts within 20 minutes are accepted before the device will be deactivated The device should be removed in for service in such case to ensure continuous correct opera
259. he time controlled IEC60870 5 103 protocol is based on the Master Slave working principle This means that the substation control and protection system sends an enquiry or instruction to a certain device slave address which will then be answered or carried out accordingly The device meets the compatibility mode 2 Compatibility mode 3 is not supported The following IEC60870 5 103 functions will be supported Initialization Reset Time Synchronization Reading out of time stamped instantaneous signals General Queries Cyclic Signals General Commands Transmission of Disturbance Data Initialization The communication has to be reset by a Reset Command each time that the device is turned on or that communication parameters have been changed The Reset CU Command resets The relay acts on both Reset Commands Reset CU or Reset FCB The relay acts on the reset command by an identification signal ASDU 5 Application Service Data Unit as a reason Cause Of Transmission COT for the transmission of the answer either a Reset CU or a Reset FCB will be sent depending on the type of the reset command This information can be part of the data section of the ASDU signal Name of the Manufacturer The section for the identification of the software contains three digits of the device code for the identification of the device type Beside the upper mentioned identification number the device generates a communication start
260. hed on or off Set the parameter Function to active or inactive in module Prot Only if in module Prot the parameter Function is 7 active the protection is activated i e with Function inactive no protection function is operating Then the device cannot protect any components Switching modules ON or OFF Each of the modules can be switched on or off permanently This is achieved when the parameter Function is set to active or inactive in the respective module Activating or deactivating the tripping command of a protection stage permanently In each of the protection stages the tripping command to the CB can be permanently blocked For this purpose the parameter TripCmd Blo has to be set to active Temporary Blocking To block the complete protection of the device temporarily by a signal In module Prot the complete protection of the device can be blocked temporarily by a signal On condition that a module external blocking is permitted ExBlo Fc active In addition to this a related blocking signal from the assignment list must have been assigned For the time the allocated blocking signal is active the module is blocked If the module Prot is blocked the complete protection function does not Work As long as the blocking signal is active the device cannot protect any components To block a complete protection module temporarily by an active assignment
261. hed to active Setting Groups Setting Group Switch Within the menu Protection Para P Set Switch lt you have the following possibilities To set one of the four setting groups active manually To assign a signal to each setting group that sets this group to active Scada switches the setting groups Setting Group Switch Manual Selection Via Input Function Via Scada e g Digital Input Switching Options Switch over if another Switch over not until the Switch over if there is a setting group is chosen request is clear clear Scada request manually within the menu Protection Para P Set Switch That means if there is Otherwise no switch over more or less than one will be executed request signal active no switch over will be executed NOTICE The description of the parameters can be found within chapter System Parameters asss I AA m D H S EN MRA4 04 09 Page 225 Parameters Setting Group Switch via Smart View n case Smart view is not running please start it e f device data has not been loaded yet click Receive Data From The Device in menu Device Double click the Protection Para icon in the navigation tree Double click the P Set Switch within the protection parameters e Configure the Setting Group Switch respectively choose an active set manually 2293 The description of the parameters can be fou
262. ice and select Transfer All Parameters into the Device Comparing Setting Groups via Smart View e Incase Smart view is not running please start it e Click on menu item Edit and select Compare Parameter Sets e Select the two parameter sets from the two drop down menus you would like to have compared with each other Press the pushbutton compare The values that are different from the set parameters will be listed in tabular form He I A A ae EN MRA4 04 09 Page 227 Parameters Comparing Parameter Files via Smart view With the help of Smart view you can simply compare diff the currently open parameter device file against a file on your hard disk The precondition is that the versions and type of devices match Please proceed as follows e Click on Compare with a Parameter File within the menu Device Click on the Folder icon in order to select a file on your hard disk e The differences will be shown in tabular form Converting Parameter Files via Smart view Parameter files of the same type can be up or downgraded converted As many parameters as possible will be taken over Parameters that are newly added will be set to default Parameters that are not included in the target file version will be deleted In order to convert a parameter file please proceed as follows e n case Smart view is not in operation start this software
263. idual voltage supervision VE 1 and VE 2 are N O TI C E identically structured The residual voltage can be measured in via the auxiliary winding da dn e n open delta The residual voltage can be calculated only if the phase voltages star connection are connected to the measuring inputs of the device EEE E 2 ee Page 362 EN MRA4 04 09 VE Protection Module Residual Voltage ANSI 59N Page 363 pexoo q 10 pejeAnoeep jou puewwos Buriddu 1 sBulyoojq du wesbeiq o 1342Y esee d gt Pa EZ SL puuodu eweu EE sjeuBis Bur4oo q eAnoe ou pue pajeAngoeep jou si eBejs a sBunoo g wesbeig o 1843Y se qd x du uigu be Un uuejy eureu u H3A euieu u L HA EN MRA4 04 09 VE Protection Module Residual Voltage ANSI 59N Device Planning Parameters of the Residual Voltage Supervision Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu path Mode Mode do not use use Device planning use Global Protection Parameters of the Residual Voltage Supervision Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path ExBlo1 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a IN Prot parameter set and if the state of the VE I assigned signal is true ExBlo2 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blockin
264. ield Para primary nominal current of the connected earth current transformer If the earth current is measured via the Holmgreen connection the primary value of the phase current transformer must be entered here ECT sec This parameter defines the 1A 1A Field Para secondary nominal current of 5A the connected earth current transformer If the earth current is done via the Holmgreen connection the primary value of the phase current transformer must be entered here ECT dir Earth fault protection with 0 0 Field Para directional feature depends 180 also on the correct wiring of the earth current transformer A wrong polarity wiring can be corrected by means of the settings 0 or 180 The operator has the possibility of turning the current vector by 180 degrees change of sign without modification of the wiring This means that in terms of figures the determined current indicator was turned by 180 by the device EOE Page 232 EN MRA4 04 09 Field Parameters ECT con Earth current measured or calculated measured calculated measured Field Para IL1 IL2 IL3 Cutoff L evel The Current shown in the Display or within the PC Software will be displayed as zero if the Current falls below this Cutoff Level This parameter has no impact on recorders 0 0 0 100In 0 005In Device Para Measurem Display IG meas Cutoff Level The measu
265. ill pop up asking you How do you want to connect Choose Dial up The Telephone number must not be empty Please enter any number e g 1 Don t care about the username and password Click on the OK button pem I A menit EN MRA4 04 09 Page 73 Smart View Connected to the Device and Calling up Websites at the same Time In principle it is possible to call up websites while there is an active connection to the device If your computer has no direct connection to the internet that means that it is placed behind a proxy server the device connection has to be modified in certain circumstances The device connection has to be provided with the proxy settings Internet Explorer For each connection the proxy settings have to be set manually Please proceed as follows Start your Internet Explorer Call up the gt Tools lt menu Call up the menu Internet options Call up the tab gt Connections lt Click with the left hand mouse key on the button Settings on the right of the HighPROTEC Device Connection Set the check box Use Proxy Server for this connection Enter the proxy settings that are available by your network administrator Confirm the settings by pressing gt OK lt Firefox The proxy settings are centrally managed so there is no need to modify any settings Establishing the Connection via a USB RS232 Adapter If yo
266. in Smart view as false 0 0 true 1 1 No connection to the device Page 126 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Digital Inputs Dis Module Digital Inputs Dls Based on the assignment list the states of digital inputs are allocated to the module inputs Set the following parameters for each of the digital inputs Nominal voltage Debouncing time A state change will only be adopted by the digital input after the debouncing time has expired Inverting where necessary Inverting DI Slot X DI x State of the digital input Nom voltage Debouncing time Input Signal The debouncing time will be started each time the state of the input signal alternates SSS ee EN MRA4 04 09 Page 127 Module Digital Inputs Dls DI Slot X1 Digital Inputs Standard Global Protection Parameters of the Digital Inputs Standards Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Nom voltage Nominal voltage of 24 V DC 24 V DC Device Para MISSUS Dp 48 V DC Digital Inputs 60 V DC DI Slot X1 110 V DC Group 1 230 V DC 110 V AC 230 V AC Inverting 1 Inverting the input inactive inactive Device Para signals active Digital Inputs DI Slot X1 Group 1 Debouncing time 1 A change of the state of a digital input will only be no debouncing time 20 ms no debouncing time Device Para Digital Inputs recog
267. inactive Device Para an s active LEDs LEDs group A LED 1 Assignment 3 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 1 Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para 2 iin active LEDs LEDs group A LED 1 Assignment 4 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 1 Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para i 3 bun active LEDs LEDs group A LED 1 Assignment 5 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 1 Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para u M M ene active LEDs LEDs group A LED 1 Latched Defines whether the inactive LEDs group A active Device Para d d ad active LEDs group B LEDs automatically if the Maeve LEDs group A roe a a LED 2 to be acknowledged by a signal manually Page 166 EN MRA4 04 09 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Ack signal Acknowledgment 1 n Assignment List Device Para on LEDs active the LED can LEDs group A HN iedaes if LED 2 those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back Only available if Latched active LED active color The LED lights upin green red Device Para are i the state fad ILEDs assignment of the red flash LEDs group A Sonar une green flash LED 2 LED inactive color Th
268. ing the maximum allowed forward power limits of transformers or overhead lines Only available if Device planning PQS Mode P gt lt n gt P Prot PQS 1 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 381 PQS Power Protection Module ANSI 32 37 Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path P Under load Active Power 0 02 2 00Sn 0 80Sn Protection Para Pickup Value e g caused ia by idling motors n P Prot Only available if Device planning PQS Mode P lt PQS 1 Pr gt Overload Reverse Active 0 003 1 000Sn 0 020Sn Protection Para Power Pickup Value je Protection against reverse feeding into the power P Prot supply network PQS 1 Only available if Device planning PQS Mode Pr gt Q gt Over load Reactive Power 0 02 2 00Sn 1 20Sn Protection Para Pickup Value Monitoring Jens the maximum allowed n reactive power of the P Prot electrical equipment like transformers or overhead PQS 1 lines If the maximum value is exceeded a condensator bank could be switched off Only available if Device planning PQS Mode Q gt Q lt Under load Reactive 0 02 2 00Sn 0 80Sn Protection Para Power Pickup Value gens Monitoring the minimum value of the reactive power P Prot If it falls below the set value a condensator bank could PQS 1 be switched on Only available if Device planning PQS Mode Q lt Qr gt Overload Reverse Reactive 0 003 1 000Sn 0 020Sn Protecti
269. ing the secondary circuits of current transformers causes A DANGER hazardous voltages The secondary side of the current transformers have to be short circuited before the current circuit to the device is opened The current measuring inputs may exclusively be connected to current measuring transformers Do not interchange the inputs 1 A 5 A e Make sure the transformation ratios and the power of the CTs are correctly rated If the rating of the CTs is not right overrated then the normal operational conditions may not be recognized The pickup value of the measuring unit amounts approx 3 of the rated current of the device Also the CTs need a current greater than approx 3 of the rated current to ensure sufficient accuracy Example For a 600 A CT primary current any currents below 18 A cannot be detected any more e Overloading can result in destruction of the measuring inputs or faulty signals Overloading means that in case of a short circuit the current carrying capacity of the measuring inputs could be exceeded Make sure that the tightening torque is 1 Nm 11 94 Ib in He ID A c p n EN MRA4 04 09 Page 35 Installation and Connection MRA4 MRI4 Terminal Marking gt X3 Electro mechanical assignment IL1 1A IL1 5A IL2 1A IL2 5A IL3 1A IL3 5A IG 1A IG 5A 0 HTL TI x
270. installation requirements concerning Smart view System requirements Windows 2000 or compatible e g Windows XP or Vista e Double click on the installation file with the left mouse button e Select a language for the installation procedure e Confirm by pressing the Continue button in the INFO frame e Select an installation path or confirm the standard installation path by mouse click on the Continue button e Confirm the entry for the suggested installation folder by mouse click on the Continue button e By mouse click on the Install button the installation routine is started Close the installation procedure by mouse click on the Complete button Now you can call up the program via Start Programs Woodward SEG gt HighPROTEC gt Smart view Page 66 EN MRA4 04 09 Smart View Uninstalling Smart view Via the menu Start gt System Control gt Software the Smart view can be removed from your computer Switching the Language of the Graphical User Interface Within the menu Settings Language you can change the language of the graphical user interface Hem I A J o ee EN MRA4 04 09 Page 67 Smart View Setting up the Connection PC Device Set up a Connection via Ethernet TCP IP NOTICE Establishing a connection via TCP IP to the device is only possible if your device is equipped with an Ethernet Interface RJ45 Contact your IT administrator in order to establish
271. invalidity is indicated by the question mark plausibility trace This makes it possible to control or follow from the main menu level at any time where implausibilities are intended to be saved In addition to the question mark trace to the temporarily saved implausible parameter changes a general implausibility symbol question mark is faded in at the left corner of the display and so it is possible to see from each point of the menu tree that implausibility have been detected by the device A star parameter change indication is always overwritten by the question mark implausibility symbol If a device detects an implausibility it rejects saving and adopting of the parameters Example If the residual voltage has been parameterized as calculated EVTcon calculated then the device recognizes an implausibility in case voltage measuring is parameterized as phase to phase VTcon Phase to Phase The calculation of the residual voltage is physically not possible by means of phase to phase voltages Changing of Parameters when using the Smart View Example Example Changing of a protective parameter to alter the characteristic for the overcurrent protection function I 1 in parameter set 1 In case Smart view is not in operation start this software In case the device data has not been loaded select Data To Be Received From The Device in menu Device Double click the Protection Para Icon i
272. ion directional ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G Please test the directional earth overcurrent analog to the directional phase overcurrent protection prx Wr 2 sssi Page 312 EN MRA4 04 09 ThR Protection Module Thermal Replica ANSI 49 ThR Protection Module Thermal Replica ANSI 49 Th The maximal permissible thermal loading capacity and consequently the tripping delay of a component depends on the amount of the flowing current at a specific time the previously existing load current as well as on a constant specified by the component The thermal overload protection is in compliance with IEC255 8 VDE 435 T301 A complete thermal replica function is implemented in the device as Homogeneous Body Replica of the equipment to be protected and by taking the previously existing load into account The protection function is of one step design provided with a warning limit For this the device calculates the thermal load of the equipment by using the existing measured values and the parameter settings When knowing the thermal constants the temperature of the equipment can be established simulated The general tripping times of the overload protection can be gathered from the following equation according to IEC 255 8 _ 2 _ Ip t t warm IN KDE Legend t Tripping delay t warm Warming up time constant lb Base current Maximum permissible thermal continuous current K Over load factor The
273. iples of pickup EN MRA4 04 09 Page 263 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 IEC VINV Notice Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and instantaneous Reset Trip t s n V e t char s t t char s j gt 1 100 10 l t s is 1 5 t char 1 0 5 0 1 0 2 0 1 0 05 0 01 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 x multiples of pickup em sss ssna Page 264 EN MRA4 04 09 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 IEC LINV Notice A Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and Instantaneous Reset Trip t LU t char s t e t char s a Xj 1x10 100 10 t s t char 1 5 1 0 5 0 2 0 1 0 05 0 1 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 x multiples of pickup He I A A r se
274. iption Reboot Signal Rebooting the device 1 Restart initiated by power supply 2 Restart initiated by the user 3 Set on defaults Super Reset 4 Restart by the debugger o Restart because of configuration change 6 General failure 7 Restart initiated by System Abort host side 8 Restart initiated by watchdog timeout host side 9 Restart initiated by System Abort dspside 10 Restart initiated by watchdog timeout dspside 11 Power supply failure short term interruption or power supply voltage to low 12 illegal memory access Act Set Signal Active Parameter Set PS 1 Signal Parameter Set 1 PS 2 Signal Parameter Set 2 PS 3 Signal Parameter Set 3 PS 4 Signal Parameter Set 4 PSS manual Signal Manual Switch over of a Parameter Set PSS via Scada Signal Parameter Set Switch via Scada PSS via Inp fct Signal Parameter Set Switch via input function min 1 param changed Signal At least one parameter has been changed Param to be saved Number of parameters to be saved 0 means that all parameter changes are overtaken Ack LED Signal LEDs acknowledgment Ack BO Signal Acknowledgment of the Binary Outputs Ack Counter Signal Reset of all Counters Ack Scada Signal Acknowledge Scada Ack TripCmd Signal Reset Trip Command Ack LED HMI Signal LEDs acknowledgment HMI Ack BO HMI Signal Acknowledgment of the Binary Outputs HMI Ack Counter HMI Signal Reset of all Counters HMI Ack
275. ircuit breaker was switched off manually Manual ON Signal Circuit breaker was switched on manually Pos OFF Signal Circuit Breaker is in OFF Position Pos ON Signal Circuit Breaker is in ON Position Pos Indeterm Signal Circuit Breaker is in Indeterminate Position Pos Disturb Signal Circuit Breaker Disturbed Undefined Circuit Breaker Position The Position Indicators contradict themselfes After expiring of a Supervision timer the Position Indicators indicate that the circuit breaker is in the ON and OFF Position at the same time Trip Control Module Sum of Tripping Currents Value Description Menu path Sum trip L1 Summation of the tripping currents Operation ise Count and RevData CB Sum trip L2 Summation of the tripping currents Operation paare Count and RevData CB Sum trip I L3 Summation of the tripping currents Operation pugses Count and RevData CB Trip Control Module Values Value Description Default Size Menu path TripCmd Cr Counter Total 0 0 65535 Operation number of trips of the switchgear circuit breaker load break switch Count and RevData CB EN MRA4 04 09 Page 259 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 Available stages I1 1 2 1 3 4 1 5 6 A WARNING If you are using inrush blockings the tripping delay of the current protection functions must be at le
276. is elapsed the compensation signal will be deactivated lt n gt PF Prot IPF 1 Page 398 EN MRA4 04 09 PF Protection Module Power Factor ANSI 55 States of the inputs of the Power Factor module Name Description Assignment via ExBlo1 l Module input state External Protection Para DIOGKING Global Prot Para PF Prot PF 1 ExBlo2 l Module input state External Protection Para VIGOR Global Prot Para PF Prot PF 1 ExBlo TripCmd Module input state External Protection Para Blocking of the Trip Command Global Prot Para PF Prot PF 1 Signals of the Power Factor module states of the outputs Name Description active Signal active ExBlo Signal External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command Alarm Signal Alarm Power Factor Trip Signal Trip Power Factor TripCmd Signal Trip Command Compensator Signal Compensation Signal Impossible Signal Alarm Power Factor Impossible EN MRA4 04 09 Page 399 PF Protection Module Power Factor ANSI 55 Commissioning Power Factor ANSI 55 Object to be tested Testing the projected Power Factor Modules Necessary means e 3 phase AC voltage source e 3 phase AC current source e Timer Procedure Testing the wiring e Feed rated voltage and rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay e Adjust
277. is exceeded the module stage will be started I2 Measured value calculated Unbalanced load current In the equation shown above the heating up process is assumed by integration of the counter system current I2 When 12 is undershoot the built up heat amount will be reduced in line with the adjusted cooling down constant tau cool t t cool Theta t Thetap e emp ss CssNII Page 322 EN MRA4 04 09 I272 Protection Module Unbalanced Load Protection ANSI 46 Legend t Tripping delay t cool Cooling time constant Theta t Momentanous heat thermal energy Theta o Heat thermal energy before the cooling down has started If the heat amount is not reduced when the permitted unbalanced load current is overshoot again the remaining heat amount will cause an earlier tripping 10000 10 Typical NPSI Relay Operating Curves 1 10 t 12 0 5 200 t 12 0 5 100 199 H t 1296 0 5 50 n 12 0 5 20 o cnn t 12 0 5 10 t 12 0 5 5 t 1296 0 5 1 10 I296 Current I2 I2s K 200 K 100 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 323 pexoojq JO pejeAnoeep jou pueuuuJoo Buiddu sBuryoojq du wes6eiq oL 1343Y se q ELO RaT DE JT gt ee T M Ll G pu
278. is then to be confirmed twice Please proceed as follows In order to change the password please enter your old password followed by pressing the gt OK lt key Afterwards enter the new password and press the gt OK lt key Finally confirm your new password and press the gt OK key lt Password Forgotten All passwords can be reset to the fail safe adjustment 1234 by pressing the gt C lt key during cold booting For this procedure confirm the inquiry Shall All Passwords Be Reset with Yes Hem I A X ae EN MRA4 04 09 Page 221 Parameters Changing of Parameters Example e Move to the parameter you want to change by using the softkeys Press the softkey Wrench Enter the password for parameter setting Edit change the parameter Now you can save the change you made and have them adopted by the system or e change additional parameters and save finally all the altered parameters and have them adopted by the system To save parameter changes immediately press the OK key for saving changed parameters directly and to have them adopted by the device Confirm the parameter changes by pressing the Yes softkey or dismiss by pressing No To change additional parameters and save afterwards e move to other parameters and change them N O TI C E A star symbol in front of the changed parameters indicates that the modifications have only temporarily
279. ital Input DI Slot X1 DI 2 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X1 DI 3 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X1 DI 4 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X1 DI 5 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X1 DI 6 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X1 DI 7 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X1 DI 8 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X6 DI 1 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X6 DI 2 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X6 DI 3 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X6 DI 4 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X6 DI 5 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X6 DI 6 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X6 DI 7 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X6 DI 8 Signal Digital Input BO Slot X2 BO 1 Signal Binary Output Relay BO Slot X2 BO 2 Signal Binary Output Relay BO Slot X2 BO 3 Signal Binary Output Relay BO Slot X2 BO 4 Signal Binary Output Relay BO Slot X2 BO 5 Signal Binary Output Relay BO Slot X2 BO 6 Signal Binary Output Relay BO Slot X5 BO 1 Signal Binary Output Relay BO Slot X5 BO 2 Signal Binary Output Relay BO Slot X5 BO 3 Signal Binary Output Relay BO Slot X5 BO 4 Signal Binary Output Relay BO Slot X5 BO 5 Signal Binary Output Relay BO Slot X5 BO 6 Signal Binary Output Relay Event rec Reset all records Signal All records deleted Disturb rec recording Signal Recording Disturb rec Write err Signal Writing error in memory Disturb rec memory full Signal Memory full Disturb rec Clear
280. itch Position is to be detected Protection Para Global Prot Para AR Ready Circuit breaker is ready for operation if the state of the assigned signal is true CB Ready DI Slot X1 DI 1 DI Slot X1 DI 2 DI Slot X1 DI 3 DI Slot X1 DI 4 DI Slot X1 DI 5 DI Slot X1 DI 6 DI Slot X1 DI 7 DI Slot X1 DI 8 DI Slot X6 DI 1 DI Slot X6 DI 2 DI Slot X6 DI 3 DI Slot X6 DI 4 DI Slot X6 DI 5 DI Slot X6 DI 6 DI Slot X6 DI 7 DI Slot X6 DI 8 Protection Para Global Prot Para IAR Page 424 EN MRA4 04 09 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 Setting Group Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Function Permanent activation inactive inactive Protection Para or deactivation of ti jens module stage ena AR General settings ExBlo Fc Activate allow or inactive inactive Protection Para inactivate disallow ii js blocking of the ae i module stage This AR parameter is only effective if a signal is General settings assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo Fc active Ex Sync External inactive inactive Protection Para Synchronisation OK enu uns AR General settings Attempts Maximum number of 1 6 1 Protection Para permitted reclosure jene attempts
281. ive Device Para ls oe active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 Assignment 5 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para 7 mu c He active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 Assignment 6 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 Inverting 6 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para E h E USES active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 Assignment 7 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 Inverting 7 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para 2 b cn active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 4 Page 148 EN MRA4 04 09 Binary Output Relays Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path t hold To clearly identify the 0 00 300 00s 0 03s Device Para state transition of a Bi Output binary output relay Da tol the new state is BO Slot X2 being hold at least for the duration of BO 5 the hold time Latched Defines whether the inactive inactive Device Para Sd Cpu sy active Binary Outputs acknowledged BO Slot X2 automatically if the event is gone or BO 5 whether the Binary Output Relay is to be acknowledged by a signal manually Acknowledgment Acknowledgment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Signal An Bi Output acknowledgment d AL sua signal that BO
282. ive Phase 0 01 2 00Vn 1 00Vn Protection Para Sequence iene Undervoltage IN Prot Only available if Device planning V IV 012 1 012 Mode V1 V2 Negative Phase 0 01 2 00Vn Protection Para Sequence Overvoltage spe IN Prot Only available if Device planning V IV 012 1 012 Mode V2 t Tripping delay 0 00 300 00s Protection Para lt n gt V Prot IV 012 1 VTS Blo Fc Enabling Disbling the inactive inactive Protection Para blocking by the ii jens Voltage Transformer ans n Supervision module NN Prot IV 012 1 States of the inputs of the asymmetry module Name Description Assignment via ExBlo1 l Module input state External Protection Para DOC Global Prot Para IV Prot IV 012 1 ExBlo2 l Module input state External Protection Para DIOE Global Prot Para IV Prot IV 012 1 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Protection Para Blocking of the Trip Command Global Prot Para IV Prot IV 012 1 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 373 V 012 Protection Module Asymmetry Signals of the asymmetry module states of the outputs Name Description active Signal active ExBlo Signal External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command Alarm Signal Alarm voltage asymmetry Trip Signal Trip TripCmd Signal Trip Command p s sssi Page 374 EN MRA4 04 09 V 012 Protec
283. jd S5iA q iud eyep du j euieu UlJe v eujeu Iud eyoep uue v eujeu sjeuBis Buryoojq eAnoe ou pue pejearoeep jou si eDejs sBuryoojg ueJBeiq ol Jajey se qd u i euieu iud eyep u L EN MRA4 04 09 f Protection Module Frequency Protection ANSI 81O U Device Planning Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module f and DF DT df dt delta phi Parameter Description Options Default Menu path Mode Mode do not use f 1 f lt Device planning f lt f 2 f gt f gt f 3 f lt f lt and df dt f 4 f lt f and df dt f 5 f lt f and DF DT f 6 f Global Protection Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path ExBlo1 External blocking of the module if blocking is activated allowed within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true 1 n Assignment List Protection Para Global Prot Para f Prot If 1 ExBlo2 External blocking of the module if blocking is activated allowed within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true 1 n Assignment List Protection Para Global Prot Para f Prot If 1 ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module the stage if blocking is activated allowed within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true
284. king of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a IN Prot parameter set and if the state of the NDI assigned signal is true ExBlo2 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a IN Prot parameter set and if the state of the NDI assigned signal is true ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the Trip Command ar the modulene Global Prot Para stage if blocking is IN Prot activated allowed within a parameter NDI set and if the state of the assigned signal is true Page 354 EN MRA4 04 09 V Protection Module Voltage Protection ANSI 27 59 Setting Group Parameters of the Voltage Protection Module if a signal is assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo TripCmd Fc active Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Function Permanent activation or inactive V 1 active Protection Para see ae 4 active V 2 active lt n gt V 3 inactive V Prot V 4 inactive I1 ExBlo Fc Activate allow or inactive inactive Protection Para inactivate disallow blocking of the active stie module stage This IN Prot parameter is only effective if a signal is assigned to MU
285. l General Trip L1 Prot Trip L2 Signal General Trip L2 Prot Trip L3 Signal General Trip L3 Prot Trip G Signal General Trip Ground fault Prot Trip Signal General Trip Prot Res Fault a Mains No Signal Resetting of fault number and mains fault number Prot dir fwd Signal Phase current failure forward direction Prot dir rev Signal Phase current failure reverse direction Prot dir n poss Signal Phase fault missing reference voltage Prot IG dir fwd Signal Earth fault forward Prot IG rev dir Signal Earth fault reverse direction Prot IG dir n poss Signal Earth fault direction detection not possible Prot ExBlo1 l Module input state External blocking Prot ExBlo2 Module input state External blocking2 Prot ExBlo TripCmd Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command CB TripCmd Signal Trip Command CB Res TripCmd Cr Signal Resetting of the Counter total number of trip commands CB Ack TripCmd Signal Acknow TripCmd CB Res Sum trip Signal Reset summation of the tripping currents CB Ready Signal Circuit breaker is ready for operation CB Manual OFF Signal Circuit breaker was switched off manually CB Manual ON Signal Circuit breaker was switched on manually CB Pos OFF Signal Circuit Breaker is in OFF Position CB Pos ON Signal Circuit Breaker is in ON Position EN MRA4 04 09 Page 101
286. l Trip I 4 TripCmd Signal Trip Command I 4 DefaultSet Signal Default Parameter Set I 4 AdaptSet 1 Signal Adaptive Parameter 1 I 4 AdaptSet 2 Signal Adaptive Parameter 2 I 4 AdaptSet 3 Signal Adaptive Parameter 3 I 4 AdaptSet 4 Signal Adaptive Parameter 4 I 4 ExBlo1 l Module input state External blocking1 I 4 ExBlo2 Module input state External blocking2 Page 104 EN MRA4 04 09 Assignment List Name Description 4 ExBlo TripCmd I Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command I 4 Ex rev Interl Module input state External reverse interlocking I 4 AdaptSet1 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter1 I 4 AdaptSet2 I Module input state Adaptive Parameter2 I 4 AdaptSet3 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter3 I 4 AdaptSet4 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter4 I 5 active Signal active 5 ExBlo Signal External Blocking I 5 Ex rev Interl Signal External reverse Interlocking I 5 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked I 5 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command I 5 1H2 Blo Signal Blocking the trip command by an inrush I 5 Alarm L1 Signal Alarm L1 I 5 Alarm L2 Signal Alarm L2 I 5 Alarm L3 Signal Alarm L3 I 5 Alarm Signal Alarm I 5 Trip L1 Signal General Trip L1 I 5 Trip L2 Signal General Trip L2 I 5 Trip L3 Signal
287. l protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized Ex active lt n gt rev Interl Fc active Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking inactive inactive Protection Para of the Trip t jane Command of the oe module stage Prot IG 1 emp sai Page 306 EN MRA4 04 09 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate allow or inactive inactive Protection Para inactivate disallow ii jens blocking of the ATUN i module stage This Prot parameter is only effective if a signal is AGHI assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo TripCmd Fc active IG If the pick up value is 0 01 20 00In 0 01In Protection Para exceeded the jens module stage will be i started I Prot Only available if AG Characteristic DEFT Or Characteristic INV Char Characteristic DEFT DEFT Protection Para IEC NINV lt n gt IEC VINV l Prot IEC EINV IG 1 IEC LINV ANSI MINV ANSI VINV ANSI EINV Therm Flat IT I2T l4T EN MRA4 04 09 Page 307 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu pat
288. l Prot Para allowed within a Supervision parameter set and if the state of the TCS assigned signal is true ExBlo2 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para Global Prot Para Supervision TCS CB Pos Detect Criterion by which the Circuit Breaker Switch Position is to be detected CB Pos Protection Para Global Prot Para Supervision TCS EN MRA4 04 09 Page 457 TCS Supervision Module Trip Circuit Supervision ANSI 74 TC Setting Group Parameters of the Trip Circuit Supervision Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Function Permanent activation inactive inactive Protection Para or deactivation of module stage ALINE i lt n gt Supervision TCS ExBlo Fc Activate allow or inactive inactive Protection Para inactivate disallow blocking of the active FEES module stage This Supervision parameter is only effective if a signal is TCS assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo Fc active t TCS Tripping delay time 0 10 10 00s 0 2s Protection Para of the Trip Circuit Supervision lt n gt Supervision TCS Page 458 EN MRA4 04 09 TCS Supervision Module Trip Circuit Supervision ANSI 74 TC Trip Circuit Supervision Module Input States Name Descripti
289. l Replica ANSI 49 Object to be tested Protective function ThR Necessary means e Three phase current source e Timer Procedure Calculate the tripping time for the current to be constantly impressed by using the formula for the thermal image N O TI C E The parameter of the temperature rise of the component z has to be known to guarantee an optimal protection _ 2 E Ip t t warm IN KDE Legend t Tripping delay t warm Warming up time constant lb Base current Maximum permissible thermal continuous current K Over load factor The maximum admissible thermal limit is defined calculated by the product of overload factor and basic current k IB measured current x In lp previously existing load Testing the threshold values Apply the current you have based your mathematical calculation on Testing the trip delay The thermal capacity should be zero before the test is started See N O TI C E Measuring Values For testing the trip delay a timer is to be connected to the contact of the associated trip relay Apply the current you have based your mathematical calculation on The timer is started as soon as the current is applied and it is stopped when the relay trips Successful test result The calculated tripping time and the fallback ratio comply with the measured values For permissible deviations tolerances please see Technical Data HET IDE I A Pe Marl EN
290. l installation and safety regulations for working at electrical power installations must always to be followed e g VDE EN DIN IEC Prior to the initial voltage connection the following must be guaranteed Correct grounding of the device That all signal circuits are tested That all control circuits are tested Transformer wiring is checked Correct rating of the CTs Correct burden of the CTs That the operational conditions are in line with the Technical Data Correct rating of the transformer protection Function of the transformer fuses Correct wiring of all digital inputs Polarity and capacity of the supply voltage Correct wiring of the analogue inputs and outputs N O TI CE The permissible deviations of measuring values and device adjustment are dependent on the technical data tolerances SSNS ee EN MRA4 04 09 Page 483 Commissioning Commissioning Protection Test Putting into operation Protection test must be carried out by authorized and qualified personnel Before the device is put into operation the related documentation has to be read and understood With any test of the protection functions the following has to be checked Is activation tripping saved in the event recorder Is tripping saved in the fault recorder Is tripping saved in the disturbance recorder Are all signals messages correctly generated Do all general parameterized blocking functions work properly Do all temporary parameteriz
291. le click the Disturb rec Icon e In the window the disturbance records are shown in tabular form e In order to delete a disturbance record double click on K the red x in front of the disturbance record and confirm EEE e Page 188 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Disturbance Recorder Direct Commands of the Disturbance Recorder Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Man Trigger Manual Trigger Untrue Untrue Operation True Recorders Man Trigger Reset all rec Reset all records inactive inactive Operation active Reset Global Protection Parameters of the Disturbance Recorder Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Start 1 Start recording if the 1 n Assignment List Alarm Device Para assigned signal is ini Recorders Disturb rec Start 2 Start recording if the 1 n Assignment List Device Para assigned signal is Tie Recorders Disturb rec Start 3 Start recording if the 1 n Assignment List Device Para assigned signal is fue Recorders Disturb rec Start 4 Start recording if the 1 n Assignment List Device Para assigned signal is fre Recorders Disturb rec Start 5 Start recording if the 1 n Assignment List Device Para assigned signal is inue Recorders Disturb rec Start 6 Start recording if the 1 n Assignment List Device Para assigned signal is thue Recorders
292. le inputs e g I 1 CAUTION The ground terminal has to be connected to the pole when using DC supply The digital inputs are provided with different switching thresholds can be parameterized two AC and five DC input ranges For each group the following switching thresholds can be defined 24V DC 48V DC 60V DC 110 V AC DC 230 V AC DC If a voltage gt 80 of the set switching threshold is applied at the digital input the state change is recognized physically 1 If the voltage is below 40 of the set switching threshold the device detects physically 0 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 31 Installation and Connection Terminal Marking X6 for device MRA4 Electro mechanical assignment for device MRA4 0 HTL DI 8 1 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 COM1 n C n C n C n C n C n C n C n C 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 EEE I Page 32 EN MRA4 04 09 Installation and Connection Voltage Measuring Inputs The device is provided with 4 voltage measuring inputs three for measuring the phase to phase voltages V12 V23 V31 or phase to neutral voltages VL1 VL2 VL3 and one for the measuring of the residual voltage VE With the field parameters the correct connection of
293. le stage inactive active inactive Protection Para lt n gt Prot ThR ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate allow or inactivate disallow blocking of the module stage This parameter is only effective if a signal is assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo TripCmd Fc active inactive active inactive Protection Para lt n gt Prot ThR Base current Maximum permissible thermal continuous current 0 01 4 00In 1 00In Protection Para lt n gt Prot ThR EN MRA4 04 09 Page 317 ThR Protection Module Thermal Replica ANSI 49 Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path K Over load factor 0 80 1 20 1 00 Protection Para The maximum ins admissible thermal i limit is Prot defined calculated by the product of ThR overload factor and basic current k IB Alarm Theta Pick up value 50 10096 80 Protection Para lt n gt Prot ThR T warm Warming up time 1 60000s 10s Protection Para constant lt n gt Prot ThR T cool Cooling time 1 60000s 10s Protection Para constant TS Prot ThR EEE EE se si Page 318 EN MRA4 04 09 ThR Protection Module Thermal Replica ANSI 49 Thermal Overload Module Input States
294. ledged BO Slot X2 automatically if the event is gone or BO 2 whether the Binary Output Relay is to be acknowledged by a signal manually Acknowledgment Acknowledgment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Signal An Bi Output acknowledgment OSO s signal that BO Slot X2 acknowledges the corresponding binary BO 2 output relay can be assigned to each output relay The acknowledgment signal is only effective if the parameter Latched is set to active Only available if Latched active Inverting Inverting of the inactive inactive Device Para SIBI HOMES active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 Page 142 EN MRA4 04 09 Binary Output Relays Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Assignment 1 Assignment 1 n Assignment List BO Slot X2 Alarm Device Para BO Slot X5 Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para M posses active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 Assignment 2 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para a active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 Assignment 3 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para md He active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO
295. llow ii jn blocking of the dis module stage This Supervision parameter is only effective if a signal is CBF assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo Fc active I CBF gt If the pick up value is 0 00 0 10In 0 00In Protection Para exceeded the jens module stage will be j started Supervision CBF t CBF If the delay time is 0 00 10 00s 0 20s Protection Para expired an CBF J n alarm is given out Supervision CBF SSS ESSE e Page 450 EN MRA4 04 09 CBF Supervision Module Circuit Breaker Failure Protection ANSI 50BF CBF Module Input States Name Description Assignment via ExBlo1 l Module input state External Protection Para DOC I Global Prot Para Supervision CBF ExBlo2 l Module input state External Protection Para DOOR Global Prot Para Supervision CBF CBF Module Signals Output States Name Description active Signal active ExBlo Signal External Blocking running Signal CBF Module started Alarm Signal Circuit Breaker Failure EN MRA4 04 09 Page 451 CBF Supervision Module Circuit Breaker Failure Protection ANSI 50BF Commissioning Circuit Breaker Failure Protection ANSI 50BF N O TI C E The time that is parameterized for the CBF must not be below the CB control time otherwise an unwant
296. load a PDF Template in order to create and print out self adhesive films for LED assignment texts front foil by means of a laser printer Recommendation AVERY Zweckform Art Nr 3482 c AU eee Page 162 EN MRA4 04 09 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs JO0 O9 9AHn9EUI 131 Jojoo 9Al2e q31 epeos abpajmouyoy 1SI7 u uuuBissv u 3Bp jmouyoy INH 98Bpejwouxo v 9Al 2e 9AI128UI p u21e1 Bunu Au u uluBissv y BumueAu E p 1ueuuBissy BurueAu c u uluBissv z BurueAu c euuBissy Buni Au E 1jueuiufissy Page 163 EN MRA4 04 09 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs The System OK LED This LED flashes green while the device is booting After completed booting the LED for System OK lights up in green thus signalizing that the protection function is activated If however in spite of successful booting or after the third unsuccessful reboot caused by the module self supervision the System OK LED flashes in red or is red illuminated please contact the Woodward SEG Service Dept See also chapter Self Supervision LED System OK cannot be parameterized prx sssi Page 164 EN MRA4 04 09 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs Global Protection Parameters of the LED Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Latched Defines whether the inactive inactive Device Para LED
297. locked that are parameterized ExBlo Fc active IH2 IH1 Maximum 10 4096 15 Protection Para permissible percentage of the dis 2nd harmonic of the Prot 1st harmonic 12 block mode 1 ph Blo If an inrush 1 ph Blo 1 ph Blo Protection Para is detected in one phase the 3 ph Blo lt n gt corresponding phase Prot of those modules will be blocked where AH2 inrush blocking is set to active 3 ph Blo If an inrush is detected in at least one phase all three phases of those modules where inrush blocking is set to active will be blocked cross blocking EN MRA4 04 09 Page 349 IH2 Module Inrush Inrush Module Input States Name Description Assignment via ExBlo1 l Module input state External Protection Para RIDGE Global Prot Para Prot 1H2 ExBlo2 Module input state External Protection Para oo ng Global Prot Para Prot 1H2 Inrush Module Signals Output States Name Description active Signal active ExBlo Signal External Blocking Blo L1 Signal Blocked L1 Blo L2 Signal Blocked L2 Blo L3 Signal Blocked L3 Blo IG Signal Blocking of the earth protection module 3 ph Blo Signal Inrush was detected in at least one phase trip command blocked Emp t oss c wc e n 5 28 Page 350 EN MRA4 04 09 IH2 Module Inrush Commissioning Inrush Dependent o
298. low this Cutoff Level This parameter has no impact on recorders 0 0 0 100Vn 0 005Vn Device Para Measurem Display VE calc Cutoff Level The calculated Residual Voltage shown in the Display or within the PC Software will be displayed as zero if the calculated Residual Voltage falls below this Cutoff Level This parameter has no impact on recorders 0 0 0 100Vn 0 005Vn Device Para Measurem Display V012 Comp Cutoff Level The Symmetrical Component shown in the Display or within the PC Software will be displayed as zero if the Symmetrical Component falls below this Cutoff Level This parameter has no impact on recorders 0 0 0 100Vn 0 005Vn Device Para Measurem Display CT pri Nominal current of the primary side of the current transformers 1 50000A 1000A Field Para EN MRA4 04 09 Page 231 Field Parameters CT sec Nominal current of the 1A 1A Field Para secondary side of the current 5A transformers CT dir Protection functions with 0 0 Field Para directional feature can only 180 work properly if the connection of the current transformers is free of wiring errors If all current transformers are connected to the device with a wrong polarity the wiring error can be compensated by this parameter This parameter turns the current vectors by 180 degrees ECT pri This parameter defines the 1 50000A 1000A F
299. lues 2 max Maximum value unbalanced load Operation fundamental Statistics Standard values I2 avg Average value unbalanced load Operation current fundamental Statistics Standard values I2 min Minimum value unbalanced load Operation current fundamental Statistics Standard values Page 92 EN MRA4 04 09 Statistics Value Description Menu path S max Maximum value of the apparent Operation ixi cd Statistics Standard values o avg Average of the apparent power Operation Statistics Standard values S min Minimum value of the apparent Operation iiid Statistics Standard values P max Maximum value of the active power Operation Statistics Standard values P avg Average of the active power Operation Statistics Standard values P min Minimum value of the active power Operation Statistics Standard values Q max Maximum value of the reactive Operation dubiis Statistics Standard values Q avg Average of the reactive power Operation Statistics Standard values Q min Minimum value of the reactive Operation aid Statistics Standard values cos phi max Maximum value of the power factor Operation Statistics Standard values cos phi avg Average of the power factor Operation Statistics Standard values cos phi min Minimum value of the power factor Operation Statistics Standard values EN MRA4 04 09 Page 93
300. m 9A LA ommo Buiuuejd eoi eq u L C LO A euieu u DNE A V 012 Protection Module Asymmetry EN MRA4 04 09 Page 370 V 012 Protection Module Asymmetry Device planning parameters of the asymmetry module Parameter Description Options Default Menu path Mode oymmetrical do not use V2 Device planning Components V1 gt Supervision of the i Positve Phase V1 Sequence or Negative Phase V2 Sequence Global protection parameter of the asymmetry module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path ExBlo1 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a V Prot parameter set and if the state of the v 012 1 assigned signal is true 1 ExBlo2 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a V Prot parameter set and if the state of the IV 012 1 assigned signal is true 2 ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the Trip Command of the module the stage if blocking is activated allowed within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true Global Prot Para IN Prot IV 012 1 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 371 V 012 Protection Module Asymmetry Parameter set parameters of the asymmetry m
301. m Signal Alarm voltage asymmetry V 012 1 Trip Signal Trip V 012 1 TripCmd Signal Trip Command V 012 1 ExBlot I Module input state External blocking1 V 012 1 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 Page 114 EN MRA4 04 09 Assignment List Name Description V 012 1 ExBlo TripCmd I Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command V 012 2 active Signal active V 012 2 ExBlo Signal External Blocking V 012 2 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked V 012 2 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command V 012 2 Alarm Signal Alarm voltage asymmetry V 012 2 Trip Signal Trip V 012 2 TripCmd Signal Trip Command V 012 2 ExBlo1 I Module input state External blocking V 012 2 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 V 012 2 ExBlo TripCmd I Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command V 012 3 active Signal active V 012 3 ExBlo Signal External Blocking V 012 3 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked V 012 3 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command V 012 3 Alarm Signal Alarm voltage asymmetry V 012 3 Trip Signal Trip V 012 3 TripCmd Signal Trip Command V 012 3 ExBlo1 I Module input state External blocking1 V 012 3 E
302. m retention time Hold time At signal changes the minimal latching time ensures that the relay will be maintained picked up or released for at least this period If binary outputs are parameterized Latchedzactive they will keep return into their position even if there is a break within the power supply If binary output relays are parameterized Latched active The binary output will also retain if the binary output is reprogrammed in another way This applies also if Latched is set to inactive Resetting a binary output that has latched a signal will always require an acknowledgment The System OK Relay watchdog cannot be configured N O T I C E y y g g Acknowledgment options Binary output relays can be acknowledged e Via the push button C at the operating panel e Each binary output relay can be acknowledged by a signal of the assignment list If Latched is active Via the module Ex Acknowledge all binary output relays can be acknowledged at once if the signal for external acknowledgment that was selected from the assignment list becomes true e g the state of a digital input Via SCADA all output relays can be acknowledged at once HIpEENETI E I XD P a EN MRA4 04 09 Page 137 epeog eDpe wouxyoy sr 1ueuuuBissy u e6pejwouxov kz INH eBpejwouxov dare 9AlI328UI peu ie 4 Bunau Z Juowubissy 9 B
303. maximum admissible thermal limit is defined calculated by the product of overload factor and basic current k IB measured current x In Ip previously existing load He I A A ee EN MRA4 04 09 Page 313 EN MRA4 04 09 pexoojq 10 pejeAnoeep jou puewwos Buiddu sBuryooiq du weibeiq ol 1242Y se d D ER E pud SW CL LL ly eTl eTl jen cl F SS SS B EM l PS J snx SIN 2 EE xw oL 1 Z1l zi E deese du l sul MEE Lo d SIN NECS T uw T m IL sjeuBis Buryoojq eAnoe ou pue payennoesp jou s eDejs s sBurjoo g wesbeig o Jajay se q C sul ulgu ThR Protection Module Thermal Replica ANSI 49 Page 314 ThR Protection Module Thermal Replica ANSI 49 Direct Commands of the Thermal Overload Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Reset Reset the Thermal inactive inactive Operation Nee active Reset Device Planning Parameters of the Thermal Overload Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu path Mode Mode do not use use Device planning use EN MRA4 04 09 Page 315 ThR Protection Module Thermal Replica ANSI 49 Global Protection Parameters of the Thermal Overload Module the Trip Command of the module the stage if blocking is activated allowed within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is t
304. me Moves to the top of the active window End Moves to the bottom of the active window Ctrl O Pda the file opening dialog Browsing through the file system for an existing device ile Ctrl N Creates a new parameter file file by means of a template Ctrl S Saves actual loaded parameter file F1 Displays the online help information F2 Load Device Data F5 Reloads the displayed data of a device Ctrl F5 Enables automatic refresh Ctrl Shift T Back to the navigation window Ctrl F6 Walks through the tabular forms detail windows Page Previous value parameter setting Page V Next value parameter setting EN MRA4 04 09 Page 65 Smart View Smart View Smart view is a parameter setting and evaluation software Menu controlled parameter setting incl validity checks Offline configuration of all relay types Reading and evaluating of statistical data and measuring values Setting into operation assistance Display of the device status Fault analysis via event and fault recorder N O TI C E Smart view is available in two different versions with and without Data Visualizer optionally to analyze disturbance records Basic Edition Standard Edition option to analyze disturbance records Installation of Smart View Port 52152 must not be blocked by a Firewall NOTICE d N O TI CE If the Windows Vista User Access Control pops up while installing Smart view please Allow all
305. me is shorter than the starting time mains calculated e f more than one attempt is parameterized with each reclosure of the CB the current quantity which is applied to the current measuring inputs has to be high enough to result in tripping The test should be continued until all set AR attempts have been carried out N O T CE The number of attempts permitted can be found in the Technical Data provided by the CB manufacturer The specified dead times have to be kept Successlul test result The AR test is successfully completed when the last AR attempt also results in tripping ss i A cmm sWi Page 440 EN MRA4 04 09 ExP Protection Module External Protection ExP Protection Module External Protection Available stages ExP 1 ExP 2 ExP 3 ExP 4 All 4 stages of the external protection ExP 1 4 are identically structured NOTICE i d By using the module External Protection the following can be incorporated into the device function trip commands alarms and blockades of external protection facilities Devices which are not provided with a communication interface can be connected to the control system as well Hem I A Tr EN MRA4 04 09 Page 441 pexool q JO pejeAngoeep jou puewwod Burddu sBumoolq du wesbeiq o Jajay eseelgd A L puiodu uieu sr Ju uuuBissv up jsr 1u uuuBissv u
306. n the navigation tree Double click the Protection Para Set Icon in the navigation tree Double click the Set 1 Icon in the navigation tree Double click the protection stage I 1 in the navigation tree In the working window a tabulated overview appears showing the parameters assigned to this protective function In this table double click the value parameter you want to change here Char Another window popup is opened where you can select the required characteristic Close this window by clicking the OK key NOTICE A star symbol in front of the changed parameters indicates that the alterations zs eeeeee e e e e EN MRA4 04 09 Page 223 Parameters NOTICE have only temporarily been saved They are not yet finally stored and adopted by the software device In order to make things easier to follow especially where complex parameter changes are involved on every superior higher menu level the intended change of the parameter is indicated by the star symbol star trace This makes it possible to control or follow from the main menu level at any time where parameter changes have been made and have not finally been saved Plausibility check In order to prevent obvious wrong settings the software monitors constantly all temporarily saved parameter changes If it detects an implausibility this is indicated by a question mark in front of the respective parameter In order to make things e
307. n the parameterized inrush blocking mode 1 ph Blo or 3 ph N o TI C E Blo the test procedure is different For mode 1 ph Blo the test has to be carried out first for each individual phase and then for all three phases together For mode 3 ph Blo the test is a three phase one Object to be tested Test of inrush blocking Necessary means e three phase current source with adjustable frequency e three phase current source for the first harmonic Procedure dependent on the parameterized blocking mode e Feed the current to the secondary side with nominal frequency e Feed abruptly current to the secondary side with double nominal frequency The amplitude must exceed the preset ratio threshold H2 IN e Ascertain that the signal InRUsH ALARm is generated now Successful test results The signal IuRusH ALARM is generated and the event recorder indicates the blocking of the current protection stage Hem I A A O AD EN MRA4 04 09 Page 351 V Protection Module Voltage Protection ANSI 27 59 V Protection Module Voltage Protection ANSI 27 59 Available stages V 1 VI2 VI3 V 4 If the VT measurement location is not at the bus bar side but at the output side the following has to be taken into account When disconnecting the line is it has to be ensured that by an External Blocking undervoltage tripping of the U elements cannot happen This i
308. nal f 1 TripCmd Signal Trip Command f 1 ExBlo1 I Module input state External blocking1 f 1 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 f 1 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command f 2 active Signal active 2 ExBlo Signal External Blocking f 2 Blo by V lt Signal Module is blocked by undervoltage f 2 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked 2 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command f 2 Alarm f Signal Alarm Frequency Protection f 2 Alarm df dt DF DT Alarm instantaneous or average value of the rate of frequency change f 2 Alarm delta phi Signal Alarm Vector Surge f 2 Alarm Signal Alarm Frequency Protection collective signal f 2 Trip f Signal Frequency has exceeded the limit f 2 Trip df dt DF DT Signal Trip df dt or DF DT f 2 Trip delta phi Signal Trip delta phi f 2 Trip Signal Trip Frequency Protection collective signal f 2 TripCmd Signal Trip Command f 2 ExBlo1 I Module input state External blocking1 f 2 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 f 2 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command f 3 active Signal active Page 112 EN MRA4 04 09 Assignment List Name Description f 3 ExBlo Signal External Blocking f 3 Blo by V lt
309. ncy change Alarm delta phi Signal Alarm Vector Surge Alarm Signal Alarm Frequency Protection collective signal Trip f Signal Frequency has exceeded the limit Trip df dt DF DT Signal Trip df dt or DF DT Trip delta phi Signal Trip delta phi Trip Signal Trip Frequency Protection collective signal TripCmd Signal Trip Command EN MRA4 04 09 Page 411 f Protection Module Frequency Protection ANSI 81O U Commissioning Frequency Protection Overfrequency ANSI 810 Object to be tested All parameterized overfrequency protection stages Necessary means e hree phase voltage source with variable frequency e Timer Procedure Testing the threshold values e Keep on increasing the frequency until the respective frequency element is activated Note the frequency value Disconnect the test voltage Testing the trip delay e Setthe test voltage to nominal frequency Now connect a frequency jump activation value and then start a timer Measure the tripping time at the relay output Testing the fallback ratio Reduce the measuring quantity to less than 99 95 of the trip value or 0 0596 fn The relay must only fall back at 99 95 of the trip value at the earliest or 0 05 fn Successful test result Permissible deviations tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data Commissioning Frequency Protection Underfrequency ANSI 81U For all parameterized underfreq
310. nd for Fast Tripping AR 4 FT Signal Fast Trip AR 4 FT Cmd Signal Trip Command for Fast Tripping AR 5 FT Signal Fast Trip AR 5 FT Cmd Signal Trip Command for Fast Tripping AR 6 FT Signal Fast Trip AR 6 FT Cmd Signal Trip Command for Fast Tripping ExP 1 active Signal active ExP 1 ExBlo Signal External Blocking ExP 1 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked ExP 1 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command ExP 1 Alarm Signal External Alarm ExP 1 Trip Signal External Trip ExP 1 TripCmd Signal External Trip Command ExP 1 ExBlot I Module input state External blocking1 ExP 1 ExBlo2 Module input state External blocking2 ExP 1 ExBlo TripCmd Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command ExP 1 Alarm l Module input state External Alarm ExP 1 Trip Module input state External Trip ExP 2 active Signal active ExP 2 ExBlo Signal External Blocking ExP 2 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked ExP 2 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command ExP 2 Alarm Signal External Alarm ExP 2 Trip Signal External Trip ExP 2 TripCmd Signal External Trip Command EN MRA4 04 09 Page 119 Assignment List Name Description ExP 2 ExBlo1 Module input state External blocking ExP 2 ExBlo2 Modul
311. nd within chapter System N o TI CE Parameters Emp jl uu a s iB iu s wm mast Page 226 EN MRA4 04 09 Parameters Copying Setting Groups Parameter Sets via Smart View Setting groups can only be copied if there are no implausibilities no red N O TI CE question mark It is not necessary to set up two setting groups that only differ in few parameters With the help of Smart view you can simply copy an existing setting group to another not yet configured one You only need to change those parameters where the two setting groups are different To efficiently establish a second parameter set where only few parameters are different proceed as follows Incase Smart view is not running please start it e Open an offline parameter file of a device or load data of a connected device By way of precaution save the relevant device parameters File Save as Select Copy Parameter Sets out of the menu Edit e Then define both source and destination of the parameter sets to be copied source copy from destination copy to Mouse click on OK to start copy procedure e The copied parameter set is now cached not yet saved e Then modify the copied parameter set s if applicable e Assign a new file name to the revised device parameter file and save it on your hard disk backup copy e To transfer the modified parameters back to the device click on menu item Dev
312. ng 3 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para x active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 Assignment 4 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para md He active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 Assignment 5 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para ao active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 Assignment 6 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 Inverting 6 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para i pom active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 141 Binary Output Relays Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Assignment 7 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 Inverting 7 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para x i _ his active Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 t hold To clearly identify the 0 00 300 00s 0 03s Device Para state transition of a Binarv Outputs binary output relay Tipos the new state is BO Slot X2 being hold at least for the duration of BO 2 the hold time L atched Defines whether the _ inactive inactive Device Para d a E active Binary Outputs acknow
313. ng delays or individual tripping delays threshold values and fallback ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list Permissible deviations tolerances can be found under Technical Data Page 391 PQS Power Protection Module ANSI 32 37 NOTICE Testing the threshold values Feed 120 of the S lt threshold to the measuring inputs of the relay Reduce the fed power slowly until the relay picks up Compare the measured value at the time of tripping to the parameterized setting Testing the tripping delay Feed 120 of the S lt threshold to the measuring inputs of the relay Reduce the fed power with an abrupt change to 80 of the S lt threshold Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay Successful test result The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays threshold values and fallback ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list Permissible deviations tolerances can be found under Technical Data ER ERE i n ess 0 Page 392 EN MRA4 04 09 PF Protection Module Power Factor ANSI 55 PF Protection Module Power Factor ANSI 55 Available stages PF 1 PF 2 pe I A A r s EN MRA4 04 09 Page 393 pexoojq Jo pejeAnoeep jou puewwod Huddi sBunoojq du uejBeiq OL 1943Y eseelgd S e xew XI O u S 0 gt uueu L l
314. ng of the Trip Command VE 2 active Signal active VE 2 ExBlo Signal External Blocking VE 2 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked VE 2 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command VE 2 Alarm Signal Alarm Residual Voltage Supervision stage VE 2 Trip Signal Trip VE 2 TripCmd Signal Trip Command VE 2 ExBlo1 I Module input state External blocking1 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 111 Assignment List Name Description VE 2 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 VE 2 ExBlo TripCmd Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command f 1 active Signal active f 1 ExBlo Signal External Blocking f 1 Blo by V Signal Module is blocked by undervoltage f 1 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked f 1 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command f 1 Alarm f Signal Alarm Frequency Protection f 1 Alarm df dt DF DT Alarm instantaneous or average value of the rate of frequency change f 1 Alarm delta phi Signal Alarm Vector Surge f 1 Alarm Signal Alarm Frequency Protection collective signal f 1 Trip f Signal Frequency has exceeded the limit f 1 Trip df dt DF DT Signal Trip df dt or DF DT f 1 Trip delta phi Signal Trip delta phi f 1 Trip Signal Trip Frequency Protection collective sig
315. ng ratio 97 or 0 596 x In VE 1 5 of the setting value resp 196 In resetting ratio 97 or 0 596 x In t DEFT 1 resp 10 ms Operating time Starting from IG higher than 1 1 x IG non directional lt 35 ms directional lt 40ms Release time directional and non directional lt 45ms t char 5 IEC NINV IEC VINV IEC LINV IEC EINV ANSI MINV ANSI ANSI VINV ANSI EINV Therm Flat IT I2T 14T t reset 1 resp 10 ms Only available if Characteristic INV EN MRA4 04 09 Page 503 Tolerances Thermal Replica ThR Tolerance Ib 2 of the setting value resp 196 In K Alarm ThR 11 5 of the setting value Unbalanced load l2 gt x Tolerance I2 2 of the setting value resp 1 In resetting ratio 97 or 0 596 x In t DEFT 1 resp Tripping delay time DEFT 10 ms Operating time lt 60ms Release time lt 40ms k 5 INV T cool 5 INV Page 504 EN MRA4 04 09 Tolerances Inrush Supervision IH2 Tolerance IH2 In 1 In resetting ratio 1 x In or 596 x IH2 Inrush supervision is possible if 1t Harmonic gt 0 1xIn and 2 Harmonic gt 0 01xln Voltage Protection V gt x Tolerance V 1 596 of the setting value resp 1 Vn resettin
316. nge Default Menu path Reset Diagn Cr All Modbus Diagnosis inactive inactive Operation Counters will be reset active IReset Global Protection Parameters of the Modbus Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Slave ID Device address Slave ID within the bus 1 247 1 Device Para system Each device address has to be Modbus unique within a bus system Only available if Device planning RTU Unit ID The Unit Identifier is used for routing 1 255 200 Device Para This parameter is to be set if a Modbus Modbus RTU and a Modbus TCP network should be coupled Only available if Device planning TCP TCP Port Config TCP Port Configuration This parameter Default Default Device Para is to be set only if the default Modubs Private IModbus TCP Port should not be used Only available if Device planning TCP Port Port number 502 65535 502 Device Para Only available if Device planning TCP OQ Only available if TCP Port Config Private t timeout Within this time the answer has to be 0 01 10 00s 1s Device Para received by the SCADA system IModbus otherwise the request will be disregarded In that case the Scada system detects a communication failure and the Scada System has to send a new request Only available if Device planning RTU Baud rate Baud rate 1200 19200 Device Para Only available if Device planning RTU awe L Das 4800 9600 19200 38400 Page 206 EN MRA4 04 09
317. ngs the tripping delay of the earth current protection functions must be at least 30ms or more in order to prevent faulty trippings All earth current elements G 1 IG 4 are identically structured NOTICE y N O T I C E This module offfers Adaptive Parameter Sets Parameters can be modified within parameter sets dynamically by means of Adaptive Parameter Sets Please refer to chapter Parameter Adaptive Parameter Sets All IG 1 G 4 earth current protective elements can be planned user defined as non directional or as directional stages This means for instance all 4 elements can be projected in forward reverse direction For each element the following characteristics are available DEFT UMZ NINV AMZ VINV AMZ LINV AMZ EINV AMZ MINV AMZ VINV AMZ EINV AMZ Thermal Flat IT I2T l4T Explanation t Tripping delay t char Time multiplier tripping characteristic factor IG Fault current IG Ifthe pick up value is exceeded the module stage will be started SSNS ee EN MRA4 04 09 Page 287 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G The directional decision depends on the layout of the mains star point or the angle between residual voltage and ground current The residual voltage can be measured via suitable transformers da dn winding formerly e n or can be calculated provided the VTs are in star connection The earth current can be measured either direc
318. nized after the 50 ms DI Slot X1 enu p ame 100 ms Group 11 effective Thus wipers will not be misinterpreted Nom voltage Nominal voltage of 24 V DC 24 V DC Device Para l npa 48 V DC Digital Inputs 60 V DC DI Slot X1 110 V DC Group 2 230 V DC 110 V AC 230 V AC Inverting 2 Inverting the input inactive inactive Device Para signals active Digital Inputs DI Slot X1 Group 2 Page 128 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Digital Inputs Dis Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Debouncing time 2 A change of the state of a digital input will only be no debouncing time 20 ms no debouncing time Device Para Digital Inputs recognized after the 50 ms DI Slot X1 debouncing time has expired become 100 ms Group 2 effective Thus wipers will not be misinterpreted Nom voltage Nominal voltage of 24 V DC 24 V DC Device Para WIS Ideas 48 V DC Digital Inputs 60 V DC DI Slot X1 110 V DC Group 3 230 V DC 110 V AC 230 V AC Inverting 3 Inverting the input inactive inactive Device Para signals active Digital Inputs DI Slot X1 Group 3 Debouncing time 3 A change of the state of a digital input will only be no debouncing time 20 ms no debouncing time Device Para Digital Inputs recognized after the 50 ms DI Slot X1 debouncing time has expired become 100 ms Group 3 effective Thus wipers
319. nseey e qejeAe 104g sueyauuesed es Jeyoluesed 1deoxo peBueyo Buraq si JejeuueJed ou JUSWWOLU eui Jy SAND O1d EN MRA4 04 09 Page 242 Module Protection Prot Each protection stage can decide automatically about a trip The trip decision is passed on to module Prot and The tripping commands of all protection stages are combined in module Prot by an OR logic Collective signals direction decisions information about phases The tripping commands are executed by the module TripControl A WARNING The tripping commands are executed by the module TripControl If a protection module is activated respectively issues a trip command to the CB two alarm signals will be created 1 The module or the protection stage issues an alarm e g I 1 ALaRm or I 1 TRIP 2 The master module Prot collects summarizes the signals and issues an alarm or a trip signal PRoT ALARM PROT TRIP Heu I A r r EN MRA4 04 09 Page 243 Module Protection Prot du u Jaueu D du 10Jd du au eu du auueu q L du jeJoeuo e o peaj m ejnpouu uonoosjoud pezuoujne du eAnoe ue Jo duy yoeg euueu EN MRA4 04 09 Page 244 Module Protection Prot Page 245 wey aweu vi uuelv10Jd uue v eureu r L uue v tueu r L uue e eAnooejJoo uueje jeszaul e oj peaj rM 499 Buipnjour jng sejnpouu uoisiedns woz d ox npouu e Jo uueje uoe3
320. nstalling a virtual modem that is a precondition for TCP IP communication via a zero modem cable to be done within the control panel 3 Establishing a network connection between Smart view and the device to be done within Smart view 1 Installlation of Smart view the application itself Please see above 2 Installation of the virtual modem Call up the gt Control Panel lt Choose gt Hardware amp Sound lt Choose gt Phone amp Modem Options lt Go to Tab Modem Click on the gt Add lt button A new window Install new modem pops up Set the check box Don t detect my modem Choose will select from list lt Click on the gt Next lt button Choose the correct COM Port Click on the gt Next lt button Select Computer cable between two computers Click on the gt Properties lt button Go to Tab General Click on the gt Change Settings lt button Go to Tab Modem Set within the Drop Down Menu the correct baud rate 115200 Click on the gt OK lt button Click on the gt OK lt button You have to reboot your computer now Page 72 EN MRA4 04 09 Smart View 3 Establishing a network connection between Smart view and the device Connect the device to the PC notebook via a correct Zero Modem Cable Run Smart view Call up Device Connection within the menu Device Connection Click on the Settings button A wizard w
321. nt and safety instructions and precautions Failure to follow instructions can cause personal injury and or property damage PROPER USE Any unauthorized modifications to or use of this equipment outside its specified mechanical electrical or other operating limits may cause personal injury and or property damage including damage to the equipment Any such unauthorized modifications 1 constitute misuse and or negligence within the meaning of the product warranty thereby excluding warranty coverage for any resulting damage and 2 invalidate product certifications or listings The progamable devices subject to this manual are designed for protection and also control of power installations and operational devices The devices are further designed for installation in low voltage LV compartments of medium voltage MV switchgear panels or in de centralized protection panels The programing and parameterization has to meet all requirements of the protection concept of the equipment that is to be protected You must ensure that the device will properly recognize and manage e g switch off the circuit breaker on the basis of your progaming and parameterization all operational conditions failures Before starting any operation and after any modification of the programming parameterization test make a documentary proof that your programing and parameterization meets the requirements of your protection concept Typical applications
322. nt and voltage remains constant Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay Successful test result The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays threshold values and fallback ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list Permissible deviations tolerances can be found under Technical Data prx ssssrSaEsawi Page 386 EN MRA4 04 09 PQS Power Protection Module ANSI 32 37 P N O TI CE Testing the threshold values Example Threshold 0 3 Pn Feed rated voltage and rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay PF 1 The measured values for the active power P must show a positive algebraic sign Set the tripping threshold e g 0 3 Pn In order to test the tripping thresholds feed 0 5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay Reduce the current slowly until the relay picks up Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant Compare the tripping value to the parameterized Testing the tripping delay Example Threshold 0 3 Pn Feed rated voltage and rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay PF 1 The measured values for the active power P must show a positive algebraic sign Set the tripping threshold e g 0 3 Pn In order to test the tripping delay feed 0 5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay Increase the current
323. nu Operation Statistics e Call up the Standard values or Special values Statistics to be Read Out via Smart view e Incase Smart view is not running please start it e f device data have not yet been loaded click Receive Data From The Device in menu Device e Double click on icon Operation in the navigation tree Double click on icon Statistics within the navigation tree Operation Double click on icon Standard values or Special values e In the window the statistical data is shown in tabular form The values can be read out cyclically For this purpose please select Auto Refresh out of the menu View He I AA ud eu EN MRA4 04 09 Page 87 Statistics Statistics Configuration The Statistic module can be configured within the menu Device Parameter Statistics The time interval that is taken into account for the calculation of the statistics can either be limited by a fixed duration or it can be limited by a start function freely assignable signal from the assignment list Fixed duration If the statistic module is set to a fixed duration time interval the minimum maximum and average values will be calculated and displayed continuously on the basis of this duration time interval Start function flexible duration If the statistic module is to be started by a start function the statistics will be updated not until the start func
324. number of bits with valence 1 or with odd parity ODD an odd number of 1 valence bits are transmitted But it is also possible to transmit no parity bits here the setting is Parity None More information on the stop bits The end of a data byte is terminated by the stop bits Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Slave ID Device address Slave ID 1 247 1 Device Para within the bus system Each device address has to be HEC 103 unique within a bus system t call If there is no request telegram 1 3600s 60s Device Para sent from Scada to the device IEC 103 after expiry of this time the device concludes a communication failure within the Scada system Transm priv meas Transmit additional private inactive inactive Device Para val measuring values UR NEC 103 Baud rate Baud rate 1200 19200 Device Para 2400 NEC 103 4800 9600 19200 38400 5 600 Physical Settings Digit 1 Number of bits Digit 8E1 8E1 Device Para 2 E even parity O odd parity N no parity Digit 3 801 HEG 109 Number of stop bits More 8N1 information on the parity It is aN2 Page 212 EN MRA4 04 09 Module IEC60870 5 103 IEC60870 5 103 Module Signals Output States Name Description Scada Cmd 1 Scada Command Scada Cmd 2 Scada Command Scada Cmd 3 Scada Command Scada Cmd 4 Scada Command Scada Cmd 5 Scada Command Scada Cmd 6 Scada Command Sca
325. odem cable e Select Receiving Data From The Device in menu Device pem I A UW s EN MRA4 04 09 Page 77 Smart View Restoring of Device Data when using Smart view Via the button Transfer only modified parameters into the device only modified parameters are transmitted into the device Parameter modifications are indicated by a red star symbol in front of the parameter The star symbol in the device tree window indicates that parameters in the opened file within smart view differ from parameters stored on your local hard disk Via the button Transfer only modified parameters into the device you can transmit all parameters that are marked by this symbol If a parameter file is saved on your local hard drive these parameters are no longer classified to be modified and cannot be transmitted via the button Transfer only modified parameters into the device In case that you have loaded and modified a parameter file from the device and saved it to your local hard drive without transferring the parameters into the device beforehand you cannot use the button Transfer only modified parameters into the device In a case like that use Transfer all parameters into the device N O T I C E The button Transfer only modified parameters into the device only works if modified parameters are available in the Smart view In contrast to that all parameters of the d
326. odule Device planning V 012 Mode V1 Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Function Permanent activation inactive inactive Protection Para or deactivation of l module stage AGUNG nx IN Prot IV 012 1 ExBlo Fc Activate allow or inactive inactive Protection Para inactivate disallow ii ee blocking of the chus module stage This V Prot parameter is onl effective if a id is IV 012 1 assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo Fczactive Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking inactive inactive Protection Para of the Trip Command of the ACNE PS module stage IN Prot IV 012 1 ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate allow or inactive inactive Protection Para inactivate disallow blocking of the active Pss module stage This IN Prot parameter is onl effective if a ne is M012 1 assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo TripCmd Fc active V1 Positive Phase 0 01 2 00Vn 1 00Vn Protection Para Sequence Overvoltage Psp IN Prot Only available if IN 012 1 Page 372 EN MRA4 04 09 V 012 Protection Module Asymmetry Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path V1 Posit
327. odule Switch Onto Fault SOTF In case that a faulty line is energized e g when an earthing switch is while maintenance in the ON Position an instantaneous tripping required This protection module can initiate a high speed trip of the overcurrent protection modules This module can be started via a digital input that indicates that the circuit breaker is manually closed This Module issues a Signal only This Module is not armed does not issue a trip command In order to take influence on the tripping settings of the overcurrent protection in case of switching onto a fault you have to assign the signal SOTF ErrekrivE onto an Adaptive Parameter Set Please refer to chapter Parameter Adaptive Parameter Sets Within the Adaptive Parameter Set you have to modify the tripping characteristic of the overcurrent protection according to your needs Hem I A A sarl EN MRA4 04 09 Page 331 SOTF Protection Module Switch Onto Fault O g NV 9ueu Buiuuni sv JdJLOS X4 ALOS x7 PON NO enuen io NO Jenuew gO pON 1l cll V e qeua 1 41OS 440 xny pejiqeue 41O0S gt PUY SOd 82 Spon TE NEN MENS Luo 4LOS fid 9 2 4LOS gt SPON SOd 82 9poIN jqeu J4 LOS sjeuBis Buyoojq eAnoe ou pue paenoeap jou si eDejs sBunoojg ueJBelrq o Jajay se q C 31LOS eujeu EN MRA4 04 09 Page 332 SOTF Protection Module Switch Onto Fault D
328. odule input state External blocking1 V 3 ExBlo2 l Module input state External blocking2 V 3 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command V 4 active Signal active V 4 ExBlo Signal External Blocking V 4 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked V 4 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command V 4 Alarm L1 Signal Alarm L1 V 4 Alarm L2 Signal Alarm L2 V 4 Alarm L3 Signal Alarm L3 V 4 Alarm Signal Alarm voltage stage V 4 Trip L1 Signal General Trip L1 V 4 Trip L2 Signal General Trip L2 V 4 Trip L3 Signal General Trip L3 V 4 Trip Signal Trip V 4 TripCmd Signal Trip Command V 4 ExBlo1 l Module input state External blocking1 V 4 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 V 4 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command VE 1 active Signal active VE 1 ExBlo Signal External Blocking VE 1 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked VE 1 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command VE 1 Alarm Signal Alarm Residual Voltage Supervision stage VE 1 Trip Signal Trip VE 1 TripCmd Signal Trip Command VE 1 ExBlo1 I Module input state External blocking1 VE 1 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 VE 1 ExBlo TripCmd I Module input state External Blocki
329. odule input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 6 Acknow Sig 6 Module input state Acknowledgment Signal only for automatic acknowledgment Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 6 LED7 1 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 7 LED7 2 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 7 LED7 3 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 7 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 181 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs Name Description Assignment via LED7 4 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 7 LED7 5 Module input state LED Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 7 Acknow Sig 7 Module input state Acknowledgment Signal only for automatic acknowledgment Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 7 Page 182 EN MRA4 04 09 Operating Panel HMI Operating Panel HMI Special Parameters of the Panel This menu Device Parameter HMI is used to define the contrast of the display the maximum admissible edit time and the menu language after expiry of which all unsaved parameter changes will be rejected Direct Commands of the Panel Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Contrast Contrast 30 60 50 Device Para HMI Global Protection Parameters of the
330. offers contextual different types of printing ranges e Printing of the complete parameter tree All values and parameters of the present parameter file are printed e Printing of the displayed working window Only the data shown on the relevant working window are printed i e this applies if at least one window is opened Printing of all opened working windows The data shown on all windows are printed i e this applies only if more than one window is opened e Printing of the device parameter tree as from a shown position on All data and parameters of the device parameter tree are printed as from the position marking in the navigation window Below this selection the complete name of the marking is additionally displayed Saving Data as a txt file via Smart view Within the print menu File gt Print you can choose Export into File in order to export the device data into a text file N O TI CE Only the actual selected printing range will be exported into a text file That means If you have chosen the Complete device parameter tree then the Complete device parameter tree will be exported But if you have chosen Actual working window only this window will be exported You can print out operating data but not export them NOTICE If you export a txt file the content of this file is encoded as Unicode That means that if you want to edit this file your application must support Unicode encoded files e g
331. olated and iu compensated networks The MS shield is to be returned Qu _ through the ring core current E transformer 1 Two phase voltage measurement wiring of the measuring inputs V connection Two phase current measurement V connection In secondary 5 A Earth current measuring via cable type current transformer IGnom secondary 5 A Warning A The shielding at the dismantled end of the line has to be put through the cable type current transformer and has to be grounded at the cable side Notice Notice Recommended for isolated or Calculation of the residual voltage VE is not compensated networks possible EN MRA4 04 09 Page 57 Connection Examples Voltage and Current Transformers Connection example Anti Clockwise Rotating Field a V32 VLI VL3 VI2 ee 95 VLI VL3 VL2 RI m x q F Three phase current measurement In secondary 1 A Earth current measuring via Holmgreen connection IGnom secondary 1 A Three phase voltage measurement wiring of the measurement inputs star connection Measurement of the residual voltage VE via auxilliary windings e n open delta Notice Measuring of VE and IG is possible A A Notice Not recommended for isolated and compensated networks mE J sM i Page 58 EN MRA4 04 09 Navigation Operation Navigation Operation
332. on Assignment via ExBlo1 l Module input state External Protection Para DOC I Global Prot Para Supervision TCS ExBlo2 Module input state External Protection Para blocking2 Global Prot Para Supervision TCS CB Pos Detect l Module input state Criterion by which the Circuit Breaker Switch Position is to be detected Protection Para Global Prot Para Supervision TCS Trip Circuit Supervision Module Signals Output States Name Description active Signal active ExBlo Signal External Blocking Alarm Signal Alarm Trip Circuit Supervision EN MRA4 04 09 Page 459 TCS Supervision Module Trip Circuit Supervision ANSI 74 TC Commissioning Trip Circuit Supervision for Circuit Breakers 74TC N O TI CE For CBs that trip by means of little energy e g via an optocoupler it has to be ensured that the current applied by the digital inputs will not cause false tripping of the CB Object to be tested Test of the trip circuit supervision Procedure part 1 Simulate failure of the control voltage in the power circuits Successful test result part 1 After expiry of t TCS the trip circuit supervision TCS of the device should signal an alarm Procedure part 2 Simulate a broken cable in the CB control circuit Successful test result part 2 After expiry of t TCS the trip circuit supervision TCS of the device should signal an alarm prx E
333. on Para Power Pickup Value lt n gt Only available if Device P Prot lanning PQS Mode Tia IPQS 1 S gt Over load Apparent Power 0 02 2 00Sn 1 20Sn Protection Para Pickup Value lt n gt Only available if Device P Prot Ji es planning PQS Mode S PQS 1 S lt Under load Apparent 0 02 2 00Sn 0 80Sn Protection Para Power Pickup Value lt n gt Only available if Device P Prot ing PQS M S lt planning PQS Mode S PQS 1 Page 382 EN MRA4 04 09 PQS Power Protection Module ANSI 32 37 Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path t Tripping delay 0 00 300 00s 0 00s Protection Para lt n gt P Prot PQS 1 States of the inputs of the Power Protection module Name Description Assignment via ExBlo1 l Module input state External Protection Para MOCKING Global Prot Para P Prot PQS 1 ExBlo2 l Module input state External Protection Para a Global Prot Para P Prot PQS 1 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Protection Para Blocking of the Trip Command Global Prot Para P Prot PQS 1 Signals of the Power Protection module states of the outputs Name Description active Signal active ExBlo Signal External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command Alarm Signal Alarm Power Protection
334. onsidering the linear rising measuring error The limiting value of the CT supervision is calculated as follows Al deviation rated value Kd correction factor Imax current maximum Limiting value Al Kd x Imax Precondition for identifying an error 3 KI IG gt Delta I Kd Imax The evaluation method of the circuit supervision by using factor Kd can be graphically represented as follows limit value Kd Imax A Imax If the current is measured in two phases only for instant only IL1 IL3 or if there is no separate earth current measuring e g normally via a cable type DIE ICE A I J JG pesa EN MRA4 04 09 Page 461 CTS Supervision Module Current Transformer Supervision ANSI 60L CT the supervision function should be deactivated uJeN SIO ol I sjeuBis Bupioojq eAnoe ou pue pejeAnoeep jou s Be S sBuppojg uueJDelig o J9j9 eseeld Eu c EN MRA4 04 09 Page 462 CTS Supervision Module Current Transformer Supervision ANSI 60L Device Planning Parameters of the Current Transformer Supervision Parameter Description Options Default Menu path Mode Mode do not use use Device planning use Global Protection Parameter of the Current Transformer Supervision the module if blocking is activ
335. ot Para CB CB Manager EN MRA4 04 09 Page 257 Module Trip Control TripControl Trip Control Module Input States Name Description Assignment via Acknow Sig l Module input state Protection Para AO Amon ana oon Global Prot Para input signal CB CB TripLogic Aux ON I Position indicator check back signal Protection Para d Global Prot Para CB CB Manager Aux OFF I Module input state Position Protection Para p eliaall signal of the Global Prot Para CB CB Manager Manual ON I Module input state Circuit breaker Protection Para was switched on manually Global Prot Para CB CB Manager Manual OFF I Module input state Circuit breaker Protection Para was switched off manually Global Prot Para CB CB Manager Ready l Module input state CB ready Protection Para Global Prot Para CB CB Manager Page 258 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Trip Control TripControl Trip Control Module Signals Outputs States Name Description TripCmd Signal Trip Command Res TripCmd Cr Signal Resetting of the Counter total number of trip commands Ack TripCmd Signal Acknow TripCmd Res Sum trip Signal Reset summation of the tripping currents Pos Signal Circuit Breaker Position 0 Indeterminate 1 OFF 2 ON 3 Disturbed Ready Signal Circuit breaker is ready for operation Manual OFF Signal C
336. ot through panel command 3 Super reset reset to factory settings 4 Restart by debugger WW SEG internally for system analysis purpose 5 Restart because of configuration changes 6 General failure reboot without definite reason 7 Reboot by SW system abort HOST side summary of several reboot reasons detected by software i e wrong pointer corrupted files etc 8 Reboot by watchdog timeout HOST side signaling if the protection class task hangs for more than 800 ms 9 Reboot by system abort DSP side summary of several reboot reasons detected by software i e wrong pointer DSP side 10 Reboot by watchdog timeout DS side appears when DSP sequence needs longer than 3 ms for one cycle 11 Loss of auxiliary voltage or low voltage reboot after loss of auxiliary voltage or voltage dropping below reboot level but not becoming zero 12 Faulty memory access message of MMU memory mapping unit that prohibited memory access has occurred Page 488 EN MRA4 04 09 Technical Data Technical Data Climatic Environmental Conditions Storage Temperature 25 C up to 70 C 13 F to 158 F Operating Temperature 0 C up to 55 C 32 F to 131 F Permissible Humidity at Ann Average lt 75 rel on 56d up to 95 rel Permissible Installation Altitude 2000 m 6561 67 ft above sea level If 4000 m 13123 35 ft altitude apply a changed classification of the operating and test voltages may be necessary Degree of P
337. owing parameters for each LED Latching self holding function If Latching is set to active the state that is set by the alarms will be stored If latching Latching is set to inactive the LED always adopts the state of those alarms that were assigned Acknowledgment signal from the assignment list LED active color LED lights up in this color in case that at least one of the allocated functions is valid red red flashing green green flashing off LED inactive color LED lights up in this color in case that none of the allocated functions is valid red red flashing green green flashing off e Apart from the LED for System OK each LED can be assigned up to five functions alarms out of the assignment list Inverting of the signals if necessary pem I A iul EN MRA4 04 09 Page 161 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs Acknowledgment options LEDs can be acknowledged by e Via the push button C at the operating panel e Each LED can be acknowledged by a signal of the assignment list If Latched active e Via the module Ex Acknowledge all LEDs can be acknowledged at once if the signal for external acknowledgment that was selected from the assignment list becomes true e g the state of a digital input e Via SCADA all LEDs can be acknowledged at once N O T CE Via the Internet you can down
338. p Command PQS 5 active Signal active PQS 5 ExBlo Signal External Blocking PQS 5 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked PQS 5 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command PQS 5 Alarm Signal Alarm Power Protection PQS 5 Trip Signal Trip Power Protection PQS 5 TripCmd Signal Trip Command PQS 5 ExBlo1 Module input state External blocking PQS 5 ExBlo2 Module input state External blocking PQS 5 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command PQS 6 active Signal active PQS 6 ExBlo Signal External Blocking PQS 6 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked PQS 6 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command PQS 6 Alarm Signal Alarm Power Protection PQS 6 Trip Signal Trip Power Protection PQS 6 TripCmd Signal Trip Command PQS 6 ExBlot I Module input state External blocking PQS 6 ExBlo2 Module input state External blocking PQS 6 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command PF 1 active Signal active PF 1 ExBlo Signal External Blocking PF 1 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked EN MRA4 04 09 Page 117 Assignment List Name Description PF 1 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip
339. p Command V 012 3 TripCmd Signal Trip Command V 012 4 TripCmd Signal Trip Command V 012 5 TripCmd Signal Trip Command V 012 6 TripCmd Signal Trip Command PQS 1 TripCmd Signal Trip Command PQS 2 TripcCmd Signal Trip Command PQS 3 TripCmd Signal Trip Command PQS 4 TripCmd Signal Trip Command PF 1 TripCmd Signal Trip Command PF 2 TripCmd Signal Trip Command ExP 1 TripCmd Signal External Trip Command EN MRA4 04 09 Page 437 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 Name Description ExP 2 TripCmd Signal External Trip Command ExP 3 TripCmd Signal External Trip Command ExP 4 TripCmd Signal External Trip Command SOTF enabled Signal Switch Onto Fault enabled This Signal can be used to modify Overcurrent Protection Settings CLPU enabled Signal Cold Load enabled CBF Alarm Signal Circuit Breaker Failure TCS Alarm Signal Alarm Trip Circuit Supervision Page 438 EN MRA4 04 09 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 AR Start Functions Name Description No assignment I 1 Phase Overcurrent Stage I 2 Phase Overcurrent Stage I 3 Phase Overcurrent Stage I 4 Phase Overcurrent Stage I 5 Phase Overcurrent Stage I 6 Phase Overcurrent Stage IG 1
340. p will be the active one if The Parameter Setting Group Switch is set to Switch via Input and the other three input functions are inactive at the same time In case that there is more than one input function active no Parameter Setting Group Switch will be executed In case all input functions are inactive the device will keep working with the Setting Group that was activated lastly Only available if PSet Switch PSS via Inp fct 1 n Assignment List Protection Para PSet Switch PS4 activated by This Setting Group will be the active one if The Parameter Setting Group Switch is set to Switch via Input and the other three input functions are inactive at the same time In case that there is more than one input function active no Parameter Setting Group Switch will be executed In case all input functions are inactive the device will keep working with the Setting Group that was activated lastly Only available if PSet Switch PSS via Inp fct 1 n Assignment List Protection Para PSet Switch Ack LED All acknowledgeable LEDs 1 n Assignment List Device Para will be acknowledged if the Ex Acknowledge state of the assigned signal becomes true Ack BO All acknowledgeable binary 1 n Assignment List Device Para output relays will be acknowledged if the state of Ex Acknowledge the assigned signal becomes true Ack Scada SCADA will be 1 n Assignment List
341. pdate any portion of this publication at any time Information provided by Woodward SEG is believed to be correct and reliable However no responsibility is assumed by Woodward SEG unless otherwise expressly undertaken Woodward SEG 2007 All Rights Reserved He I AA P EN MRA4 04 09 Page 15 IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS Scope of Delivery The delivery scope does not include the fastening material but includes all connection terminals except communication connectors Please check the consignment for completeness on arrival delivery note Please ascertain whether the type plate connection diagram type code and description of the device tally If you have any doubts please contact our Service Department contact address to be found on the reverse of the manual Storage The devices must not be stored outdoors The storing facilities have to be sufficiently ventilated and must be dry see Technical Data Important Information In line with the customer s requirement the devices are combined in a A WARNING modular way in compliance with the order code The terminal assignment of the device can be found on the top of the device wiring diagram In addition to that it can be found within the appendix wiring diagrams prc CH r r sueMt 0 J Page 16 EN MRA4 04 09 IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS T Zi DW ul l
342. quency Protection collective signal f 4 Trip f Signal Frequency has exceeded the limit f 4 Trip df dt DF DT Signal Trip df dt or DF DT f 4 Trip delta phi Signal Trip delta phi f 4 Trip Signal Trip Frequency Protection collective signal f 4 TripCmd Signal Trip Command f 4 ExBlo1 l Module input state External blocking1 f 4 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 f 4 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command f 5 active Signal active f 5 ExBlo Signal External Blocking f 5 Blo by V Signal Module is blocked by undervoltage f 5 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked f 5 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command EN MRA4 04 09 Page 113 Assignment List Name Description f 5 Alarm f Signal Alarm Frequency Protection f 5 Alarm df dt DF DT Alarm instantaneous or average value of the rate of frequency change f 5 Alarm delta phi Signal Alarm Vector Surge f 5 Alarm Signal Alarm Frequency Protection collective signal f 5 Trip f Signal Frequency has exceeded the limit f 5 Trip df dt DF DT Signal Trip df dt or DF DT f 5 Trip delta phi Signal Trip delta phi f 5 Trip Signal Trip Frequency Protection collective signal f 5 TripCmd Signal Trip Command f 5 ExBlo1 1
343. r Setting lt please proceed as follows 1 Mark in the device display the parameter you want to change 2 Press the softkey gt Wrench lt to change temporarily into the parameter setting mode 3 Enter the parameter password 4 Change the parameter 5 Change perhaps additional parameters As long as you are within the parameter setting mode a wrench icon will be N O TI CE shown in the upper right corner of the display F 6 For saving the altered parameter e press the OK key confirm by pressing the softkey Yes 7 Then the device changes into mode Display Only Emp ssssIW sasi Page 220 EN MRA4 04 09 Parameters Password Password Entry at the Panel Passwords can be entered by way of the softkeys 1 2 3 4 Example For password 3244 press successively Softkey 3 Softkey 2 Softkey 4 Softkey 4 Password Changes Passwords can be changed at the device in menu Device Para Password or by means of the Smart view software A password must be a user defined combination of the numerics 1 2 3 and NOTICE We All other characters and keys won t be accepted The password of operation mode gt Parameter setting and planning lt enables you to transfer parameters from the Smart view software into the device When you want to change a password the existing one has to be entered firstly The new password up to 8 digits
344. r and mains fault number dir fwd Signal Phase current failure forward direction dir rev Signal Phase current failure reverse direction dir n poss Signal Phase fault missing reference voltage IG dir fwd Signal Earth fault forward IG rev dir Signal Earth fault reverse direction IG dir n poss Signal Earth fault direction detection not possible Page 250 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Protection Prot Protection Module Values Value Description Menu path FaultNo Disturbance No Operation Count and RevData Prot MainsFaultNo Mains disturbance No Operation Count and RevData Prot EN MRA4 04 09 Page 251 Module Trip Control TripControl Module Trip Control TripControl CB The tripping commands of all protection modules are combined in module TripLogic by an OR logic The command for tripping can come from each of the protection modules but the actual tripping command to the CB is only given by the module TripLogic In addition to that you can set within this module the minimum hold time of the tripping command and define whether the tripping command is latched or not prx rFsssssi Page 252 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Trip Control TripControl 10 puigdu sexa 19 puuOdu 1 lt l epeos eDpe wouxov sr jueuiuBissy u eDpe wouxoy L lt INH a6pajmouyoy ANOeU peuoxieT qO pwdu jeuieu Puodur euieu q
345. ral Trip L2 I 6 Trip L3 Signal General Trip L3 I 6 Trip Signal Trip I 6 TripCmd Signal Trip Command I 6 DefaultSet Signal Default Parameter Set I 6 AdaptSet 1 Signal Adaptive Parameter 1 I6 AdaptSet 2 Signal Adaptive Parameter 2 I6 AdaptSet 3 Signal Adaptive Parameter 3 I6 AdaptSet 4 Signal Adaptive Parameter 4 I 6 ExBlo1 l Module input state External blocking1 I 6 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 6 ExBlo TripCmd I Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command I 6 Ex rev Interl Module input state External reverse interlocking I 6 AdaptSet1 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter1 I 6 AdaptSet2 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter2 I 6 AdaptSet3 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter3 I 6 AdaptSet4 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter4 IG 1 active Signal active IG 1 ExBlo Signal External Blocking IG 1 Ex rev Interl Signal External reverse Interlocking IG 1 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked IG 1 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command IG 1 Alarm Signal Alarm IG IG 1 Trip Signal Trip IG 1 TripCmd Signal Trip Command IG 1 GH2 Blo Signal blocked by an inrush IG 1 DefaultSet Signal Default Parameter Set IG 1 AdaptSet 1 Signal Adaptive Parameter 1 IG 1 AdaptSet 2 Signal Adaptive Parameter 2 I
346. rameter down by scrolling downwards e Via SOFTKEY lt right you will come to a submenu e Via SOFTKEY Top of list you will jump directly to the top of a list Via SOFTKEY Bottom of list you will jump directly to the end of a list e Via SOFTKEY the related digit will be incremented Continuous pressure gt fast e Via SOFTKEY the related digit will be decremented Continuous pressure gt fast e Via SOFTKEY left you will go one digit to the left e Via SOFTKEY right you will go one digit to the right e Via SOFTKEY Parameter setting you will call up the parameter setting mode e Tee eee lt e Via SOFTKEY delete data will be deleted In order to return to the main menu just keep pressing the Softkey Arrow Left until you arrive at the main menu Page 64 EN MRA4 04 09 Navigation Operation Smart view Keyboard Commands You can control Smart view alternatively by means of keyboard commands instead of the mouse Key Description Moving up within the navigation tree or parameter list V Moving down within the navigation tree or parameter list lt Collapse the tree item or select a folder on a higher level gt Expands the tree item or selects a subfolder Numpad Expands the tree item Numpad Collapses the tree item Ho
347. re is ii fen detected duds V Prot Only available if Device planning V Mode V t NTN t Tripping delay 0 00 300 00s V 1 1s Protection Para Only available if Device VIS s ish planning V Mode V 3 0 00s V Prot V gt Orv lt i V 4 0 00s NT Vstart If the voltage falls below 0 01 2 00Vn 0 90Vn Protection Para this Voltage the Time J n Depending Voltage Protection will be started V Prot Only available if Device MUI planning V Mode Vstart lt Only available if Device planning V Mode Vstart lt V t 1 Pick up value 0 01 2 00Vn 0 01Vn Protection Para Only available if Device i planning V Mode V t V Prot V 1 t1 Tripping delay 0 00 10 00s 0 00s Protection Para Only available if Device isti planning V Mode V t V Prot V 1 V t 2 Pick up value 0 01 2 00Vn 0 01Vn Protection Para Only available if Device PM planning V Mode V t V Prot V 1 t2 Tripping delay 0 00 10 00s 0 15s Protection Para Only available if Device h gt planning V Mode V t lt V Prot V 1 Page 356 EN MRA4 04 09 V Protection Module Voltage Protection ANSI 27 59 Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path V t 3 Pick up value 0 01 2 00Vn V 1 0 70Vn Protection Para Only available if Device VIE 70 vn Pte planning V Mode V t V 3 0 70Vn V Prot V 4 0 30Vn NT t3 Tripping delay 0 0
348. recording if Recorders Disturb rec Start5 State of the module input Trigger Device Para event start recording if Recorders Disturb rec Start6 State of the module input Trigger Device Para event start recording if Recorders Disturb rec Start lI State of the module input Trigger Device Para event start recording if Recorders Disturb rec Start8 State of the module input Trigger Device Para event start recording if Recorders Disturb rec Disturbance Recorder Module Signals Name Description recording Signal Recording Write err Signal Writing error in memory memory full Signal Memory full Clear fail Signal Clear failure in memory Reset all records Signal All records deleted Reset rec Signal Delete record Man Trigger Signal Manual Trigger EN MRA4 04 09 Page 191 Module Disturbance Recorder Special Parameters of the Disturbance Recorder Value Description Default Size Menu path Rec state Recording state Ready Ready Operation Recording Status display Writing file Disturb rec Trigger Blo Error code Error code OK OK Operation Write err Status display Clear fail Disturb rec Calculation err File not found Auto overwriting off Page 192 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Fault Recorder Module Fault Recorder Fault rec The fault recorder can be started by one of eight start events selection from the
349. red Earth Current shown in the Display or within the PC Software will be displayed as zero if the measured Earth Current falls below this Cutoff Level This parameter has no impact on recorders 0 0 0 100In 0 005In Device Para Measurem Display IG calc Cutoff Level The calculated Earth Current shown in the Display or within the PC Software will be displayed as zero if the calculated Earth Current falls below this Cutoff Level This parameter has no impact on recorders 0 0 0 100In 0 005In Device Para Measurem Display 1012 Cutoff Level The Symmetrical Component shown in the Display or within the PC Software will be displayed as zero if the Symmetrical Component falls below this Cutoff Level This parameter has no impact on recorders 0 0 0 100In 0 005In Device Para Measurem Display EN MRA4 04 09 Page 233 Blockings Blockings The device provides a function for temporary and permanent blocking of the complete protection functionality or of single protection stages Make absolutely sure that no illogical or even life threatening blockings are allocated Make sure that you do not carelessly deactivate protection functions which have to be available according to the protection concept Permanent Blocking Switching ON or OFF the complete protection functionality In module Protection the complete protection of the device can be switc
350. reen Device Para this color if the state of the OR red LEDs assignment of the red flash LEDs group A ignals i An TS green flash LED 4 Assignment 1 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 4 Page 170 EN MRA4 04 09 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Inverting 1 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para 7 an E active LEDs LEDs group A LED 4 Assignment 2 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 4 Inverting 2 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para M s r active LEDs LEDs group A LED 4 Assignment 3 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 4 Inverting 3 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para s on M Sese active LEDs LEDs group A LED 4 Assignment 4 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 4 Inverting 4 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para a M res active LEDs LEDs group A LED 4 Assignment 5 Assignment 1 n Assignment List Device Para LEDs LEDs group A LED 4 Inverting 5 Inverting of the state inactive inactive Device Para 7 a M ee active LEDs LEDs group A LED 4 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 171 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs
351. rent Transformers CT Current Transformers CT Check the installation direction It is imperative that the secondary sides of measuring transformers be DANGER Mii s CT secondary circuits must always to be low burdend or short circuited during operation NOTICE All current measuring inputs can be provided with 1 A or 5 A nominal Make sure that the wiring is correct Current Transformer Connection Examples Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field MRI4 MCI4 MRA4 MCA4 gt terminal marking X3 Three phase current measurement In secondary 5 A Notice Calculation of G is possible pe I A n F EN MRA4 04 09 Page 43 Current Transformers CT Connection example Clockwise Rotating Field MRI4 MCI4 MRA4 MCA4 gt terminal marking X3 z Ring Core Type Current Transformer Measures the ground current Sum of the three phase currents Can be used for measuring the earth current in isolated and compensated networks The shield is to be returned through the ring core current transformer NON Z lt A LLL LL Three phase current measurement In secondary 1 A Earth current measuring via cable type current transformer Gnom secondary 1 A Warning The shielding at the dismantled end of the line has to be put through the cable type current transformer and has to be grounded at the cable side Notice Recommended for isolated or comp
352. ring the dialogue it is possible to correct invalid settings e g the recommended baud rate Cancel The warning is ignored and the connection adjustments remain as they are This procedure is accepted for a limited time but in such a case the user is obliged to establish a correct connection later on emp o Bess ne s i Page 76 EN MRA4 04 09 Smart View Smart view persistent connection problems In case of persistent connection problems you should remove all connection settings and establish them again afterwards In order to remove all connection settings please proceed as follows 1 Remove the settings for the Dial up Network Close Smart view Call up the gt Control Panel lt Choose Network amp Internet On the left side click on Manage Network Connections Click on HighPROTEC Direct Connection with the right hand mouse key Choose Delete from the shortcut menu Click on the OK button 2 Remove the virtual modem Call up the gt Control Panel lt Choose gt Hardware amp Sound lt Choose gt Phone amp Modem Options lt Go to Tab Modem Click on the correct in case there is more than one entry Connection cable between two com puters Click on the Remove button Loading of Device Data when using Smart view e Starting of the Smart view e Make sure the connection has been established properly e Connect your PC with the device via a zero m
353. rk due to an bug in the Windows operating system Your attention is drawn to this problem by the operational software and the error message Warning invalid connection setting will be shown To solve this problem you need administration rights Please proceed as follows Select menu point Device Connection in menu Settings Select Serial Connection Click button Settings Change to register card General Ensure that Communication cable between two computers Com X is selected in the Drop Down Menu X interface number where you have connected the zero modem cable to He I AA M w EN MRA4 04 09 Page 75 Smart View N O TI CE If the message Warning invalid connection settings appears during i establishing the connection this indicates that the connection adjustments you have chosen are not correct On this warning you can react as follows Yes to set up the connection completely new By this all adjustments are cancelled and the connection assistant is opened again for renewed adjustment of the connection to the device This procedure is advisable in case basic adjustments cannot be modified via the characteristics dialogue e g if a new additional serial interface has been installed on the system No to modify the existing dial up network entry Opens the dialogue for characteristics of the connection settings Du
354. rotection EN 60529 HMI front panel with seal IP54 HMI front panel without seal IP50 Rear side terminals IP20 Routine Test Insulation test acc to IEC60255 5 All tests to be carried out against earth and other input and output circuits Aux voltage supply digital inputs 2 5 kV eff 50 Hz current measuring inputs signal relay outputs Voltage measuring inputs 3 0 kV eff 50 Hz All wire bound communication interfaces 1 5 kV DC Housing Housing B2 height width 173 mm 6 811 4 U 212 7 mm 8 374 42 HP Housing depth incl terminals 208 mm 8 189 Material housing Aluminum extruded section Material front panel Aluminum Foil front Mounting position Horizontal 45 around the X axis must be permitted Weight MRAA housing B2 approx 4 2 kg 9 259 Ib Plug in Connectors with Integrated Short Circuiter Conventional Current Inputs Nominal current 1Aand5A Continuous loading capacity 4 x In continuously Overcurrent withstand 30 x In 10 s 100 x In 1 s 250 x In 10 ms 1 half wave Screws M4 captive type acc to VDEW Connection cross section 1 xor 2 x 2 5 mm 2 x AWG 14 with wire end ferrule 1 xor 2 x 4 0 mm 2 x AWG 12 with ring cable sleeve or cable sleeve 1 x or 2 x 6 mm 2 x AWG 10 with ring cable sleeve or cable sleeve EN MRA4 04 09 Page 489 Technical Data Voltage Supply Aux Voltage 24V 270 V DC 48 230 V AC 20 10 Buffer time in case of supply failure gt 50 ms at
355. rotection Parameters of the Panel nennen nennen nnne nnne rennes 183 MODULE DISTURBANGE RECORDER 184 Read Out Disturbance IReG0r S u uuu u u uuu baquan 187 Disturbance Recorder to be Read Out by Smart view ssssssssssssssss e emen 187 Deleting Disturbance Records a 188 Deleting Disturbance Records via Smart view a em eme EEEE nnns 188 Direct Commands of the Disturbance Recorder Module 189 Global Protection Parameters of the Disturbance Recorder Module 189 Disturbance Recorder Module Input States a nennen nnne nnn anser 191 Disturbance Recorder Module Signals a aaa nnne nennen ns 191 Special Parameters of the Disturbance Recorder nene nnne nennen 192 MODULE AULT RECORDER Sia Ri RE eso mu etMIEEQ I FRUI LOHN NI REFER DE DEI D I ME IM E MEE
356. rrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 ANSI VINV Notice Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and instantaneous Reset Trip E e t char s t 0 491 t char s ic 1 1x10 100 15 t s t char 10 5 1 2 1 0 5 0 1 0 01 0 1 l 10 100 x gt multiples of pickup Emp COC sawi Page 268 EN MRA4 04 09 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 ANSI EINV Notice Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and instantaneous Reset Trip 29 1 t z t char s t 0 1217 t char s 1 gt 1 1x10 100 t s 10 t char 15 MN 10 5 2 0 1 0 01 0 1 l 10 100 5 x gt multiples of pickup asss I A X ss EN MRA4 04 09 Page 269 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 Therm Flat Notice Various reset modes are availa
357. rue Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path ExBlo1 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a Prot parameter set and if the state of the THR assigned signal is true ExBlo2 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a Prot parameter set and if the state of the THR assigned signal is true ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para Global Prot Para Prot ThR Page 316 EN MRA4 04 09 ThR Protection Module Thermal Replica ANSI 49 Setting Group Parameters of the Thermal Overload Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module stage inactive active inactive Protection Para lt n gt Prot ThR ExBlo Fc Activate allow or inactivate disallow blocking of the module stage This parameter is only effective if a signal is assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo Fc active inactive active inactive Protection Para lt n gt Prot ThR Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the modu
358. s realized through detecting of the CB position via digital inputs yet been applied undervoltage tripping has to be prevented by an External Blocking In case of an fuse failure it is important to block the U stages so that an undesired operation can be prevented When the aux voltage is switched on and the measuring voltage has not N O TI CE All 4 voltage elements are identically structured and can optionally be projected as over undervoltage or time dependent polygon element N O TI C E If phase voltages are applied to the measuring inputs of the device and field parameter VT con is set to Phase to neutral the messages issued by the voltage protection module in case of actuation or trip should be interpreted as follows V 1 ALarm L1 or V 1 Trip L1 gt alarm or trip caused by phase voltage VL1 V 1 ALarm L2 or V 1 TaP L2 gt alarm or trip caused by phase voltage VL2 V 1 ALarm L3 or V 1 TanP L3 gt alarm or trip caused by phase voltage VL3 If however line to line voltages are applied to the measuring inputs and field parameter VT con is set to Phase to Phase then the messages should be interpreted as follows V 1 ALarm L1 or V 1 TRP L1 gt alarm or trip caused by line to line voltage V12 V 1 ALARM L2 or V 1 TRP L2 gt alarm or trip caused by line to line voltage V23 V 1 ALarm L3 or V 1 TRP L3 g
359. setting value resp 1 5 Vn 97 or 0 5 x Vn t 1 resp 10 ms Operating time lt 60ms Release time lt 40ms EN MRA4 04 09 Page 507 Tolerances Automatic Reclosing AR Tolerance t start 1 resp 20 ms t DP1 t DP6 1 resp 20 ms t DE1 t DE6 1 resp 20 ms t Superv 1 resp 20 ms t CB ON Cmd 1 resp 20 ms t sync_AR 1 resp 20 ms 1 n SA 6 t SA 1 resp 20 ms Page 508 EN MRA4 04 09 Tolerances PQS Tolerance at 0 8 Vn Vn 2100 V symmetrically feeded P Q gt PF gt 0 5 3 of the setting value resp 0 1 of Sn resetting ratio 97 of setting values or 0 2 W t 1 of the setting value resp 10 ms Operating time lt 5 ms resetting time lt 5 ms PQS Tolerance at 0 8 Vn Vn 100 V symmetrically feeded P lt Q lt PF gt 0 5 3 of the setting value resp 0 1 of Sn resetting ratio 103 of setting values or 0 2 W t 1 of the setting value resp 10 ms Operating time lt 5 ms resetting time lt 5 ms PQS Tolerance at 0 8 Vn Vn 100 V symmetrically feeded S gt 3 of the setting value resp 0 1 of Sn resetting ratio 97 of setting values or 0 2 W t 1 of the setting value resp 10 ms Operating time lt 5 ms resetting time lt 5 ms PQS Tolerance at 0 8 Vn Vn 1
360. sse sae sisse aene n aea 98 Manual Ackoweagmeni vid Smari Eu NEN E EN 98 External Acknowledgments ase rase sse isses sata nsu rase sese neas 99 External Acknowledge via Smart VieW 0000 Mme e emen enne e ee ene n nna n qatqa 99 MANUAL RESETS soos oer iu riri RES be RU ESURAUI EE MERI UN NER ESSUMIN ia skua fas ou MEN NUN MS a LAU EMRR E AE SR CEPI ES 100 Manual Resets via Smart view aa aa siia ss sa sss ssa sane se ns 100 ASSIGNMENT LUST uuu u Cue eve Co E qas Los seu deus tu MEQUE dex SE M DEED IS KK UU unan ss 101 STATS Dip y u u 126 Status Display vid Smart VIGW uuu u rusak Saa aaa aa Aa oar EE aee aE 126 MopukLE DicGiTAL iNpurs Dis U u 127 Digital inputs SLIandgard 128 Global Protection Parameters of the Digital Inputs Standards 128 Digital Inputs Signals Outputs States nennen enne nn nnns nnn nennen ns 132 Opuonal Digtal IMPUS NER Lu uU ULU L uaitaaiwkatashuaswiwawaaalquanawkuasbunswiyawpiwsktankawkukaspuswapaskakanaskuan 133 Global Protection Parameters of the Optional Digital Inpufs aaa RR 133 Optional Di
361. ssssssssssssssseseeeeen eene nnne nnne nne nnne nna senes 77 Restoring of Device Data when using Smart view ssssssssssssssssseseeen nennen nnne nnne nnn nnns 78 Backup and Documentation when using Smart view ar nne nnne nnn snas 79 Printing of Device Data When using Smart view Setting List sss 79 Saving Daiaasa iile vid Me NET 9 Offline Device Planning vla Smart view a vega PuU Rb dU u d Ea UD CU 80 MEASURING VAEUES iui cora FEE oai ste tense ades irai xev us s ev ase suas EE Rena data P sr adgs sav ERR d rix EP ER ME Aii 81 Read out Measured Values aaa rssrrssrssssssssssssssssssaa 81 Read out of Measured Values via Smart view meme eene ee eene esee nnne 8 Standard Measured Values a uc aeu add mo Cus dva x vd aE SR boda doe Xp vavragUedasu de 82 ENERGY C OUNTE R u cic caste ce cele etn cy eae eo 5 5 us 5 85 Page 4 EN MRA4 04 09 Global Parameters of the Energy Counter MOdUule ccccceecccceeeeceeeeeeeeeesaeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeesaeeeeseeeeseneesseeeaees 85 Direct Commands of the Energy Counter Module ssessssssssssssseeseeeeee nennen nnne nnn nnns 85 Signals of the Energy Counter Module
362. st result The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays threshold values and fallback ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list Permissible deviations tolerances can be found under Technical Data Heu I AA r s E EN MRA4 04 09 Page 385 PQS Power Protection Module ANSI 32 37 Q gt NOTICE Testing the threshold values Example Threshold 1 1 Qn Feed rated voltage and 0 9 times rated current 90 phase shift to the measuring inputs of the relay PF 0 The measured values for the active power Q must show a positive algebraic sign Set the tripping threshold e g 1 1 Qn In order to test the tripping thresholds feed 0 9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay Increase the current slowly until the relay picks up Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant Compare the tripping value to the parameterized Testing the tripping delay Example Threshold 1 1 Qn Feed rated voltage and rated current 90 phase shift to the measuring inputs of the relay PF 0 The measured values for the active power Q must show a positive algebraic sign Set the tripping threshold e g 1 1 Qn In order to test the tripping delay feed 0 9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay Increase the current with an abrupt change to 1 2 In Ensure that the angle between curre
363. sting the fallback ratio PF Reset Example 0 86 leading e Adjust the angle between voltage and current current pointer leading with an abrupt change to PF 0 707 45 leading e Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay Compare the measured tripping time to the parameterized Successful test result The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays threshold values and fallback ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list Permissible deviations tolerances can be found under Tech nical Data Hem I A A H r Ga EN MRA4 04 09 Page 401 f Protection Module Frequency Protection ANSI 81O U f Protection Module Frequency Protection ANSI 810 U Available stages 6 f 1 f 2 3 f 4 f 5 f 6 All frequency protective elements f 1 to f 6 are identically structured N O TI CE q yp f 1 to f 6 y N O TI C E The frequency is calculated as the average of the measured values of the three phase frequencies Only valid measured frequency values are taken into account If a phase voltage is no longer measurable this phase will be excluded from the calculation of the average value Rmi E C sss sssi Page 402 EN MRA4 04 09 f Protection Module Frequency Protection ANSI 810 U gt A q ojg aweu S puiodiu eueu du eueu J duj eueu r L UJe v eueu J
364. stive phase stai Standard values V2 max Maximum value Symmetrical Operation components negative phase statis Standard values V2 avg Average value Symmetrical Operation components negatve Phase stai Standard values V2 min Minimum value Symmetrical Operation components negate phase static Standard values IL1 max IL1 maximum value fundamental Operation Statistics Standard values IL1 avg IL1 average value fundamental Operation Statistics Standard values IL1 min IL1 minimum value fundamental Operation Statistics Standard values IL2 max IL2 maximum value fundamental Operation Statistics Standard values IL2 avg IL2 average value fundamental Operation Statistics Standard values IL2 min IL2 minimum value fundamental Operation Statistics Standard values IL3 max IL3 maximum value fundamental Operation Statistics Standard values IL3 avg IL3 average value fundamental Operation Statistics Standard values IL3 min IL3 minimum value fundamental Operation Statistics Standard values EN MRA4 04 09 Page 91 Statistics I1 max Maximum value positive phase Operation sequence current fundamental Statistics Standard values I1 avg Average value positive phase Operation sequence current fundamental Statistics Standard values I1 min Minimum value positive phase Operation sequence current fundamental Statistics Standard va
365. t O Hed n ES A A aw O pwd uieu O TT Lu du L eueu 2 ju euun dn oj o euun 4e6611 e1 JojesueduJo eujeu n lo n Ul 9Jd duuoo Buy jsoq eueu dwog B11 eJq eueu Aejaq se j y puy ejeq dnxolg D uuejv eueu sjeuBis Burjoojq eroe ou pue pejeAnoeep jou s apels sBunooj g uieJBerq OL 19J J se q rA u lidad eureu u L d4d PF Protection Module Power Factor ANSI 55 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 394 PF Protection Module Power Factor ANSI 55 EN MRA4 04 09 Q leading lagging PF O PF gt 0 90 lt phi lt 180 0 lt phi lt 90 p lagging leading PF gt 0 PF O 180 phi 270 270 lt phi lt 360 Page 395 PF Protection Module Power Factor ANSI 55 Device planning parameters of the Power Factor module Parameter Description Options Default Menu path Mode Mode do not use use Device planning use Global protection parameter of the Power Factor module the Trip Command of the module the stage if blocking is activated allowed within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path ExBlo1 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a PF Prot parameter set and if the state of the IPFI assigned si
366. t and the calculated value l0 is higher than the pick up value Al an alarm event is generated after expiring of the excitation time In such a case a fuse failure a broken wire or a faulty measuring circuit can be assumed Alarm delay Alarm delay 0 1 9999 0s 1 0s Protection Para lt n gt Supervision ICTS Kd Dynamic correction factor for 0 00 0 99 0 00 Protection Para the evaluation of the jenes difference between calculated and measured Supervision earth current This correction ICTS factor allows transformer faults caused by higher currents to be compensated Page 464 EN MRA4 04 09 CTS Supervision Module Current Transformer Supervision ANSI 60L Current Transformer Supervision Input States Name Description Assignment via ExBlo1 l Module input state External Protection Para DOC I Global Prot Para Supervision ICTS ExBlo2 Module input state External Protection Para DOOR Global Prot Para Supervision ICTS Current Transformer Supervision Signals Outputs States Name Description active Signal active ExBlo Signal External Blocking Alarm Signal Alarm Current Transformer Measuring Circuit Supervision pem I A A sss EN MRA4 04 09 Page 465 CTS Supervision Module Current Transformer Supervision ANSI 60L Commissioning Current Transformer Failure Supervision ANSI 60L Precondition N
367. t alarm or trip caused by line to line voltage V31 For each of the voltage protection stages it can be defined if it should be actuated in case over or undervoltage was detected in all three phases or if it already should be alarmed when the over or undervoltage was detected in only one of the phases Page 352 EN MRA4 04 09 V Protection Module Voltage Protection ANSI 27 59 pexooIq Jo payeanoeap jou puewwod Buddy 1 f sBurjoo q du uejBeiq ol Jajay se qd E puiodu tuueu du eujeu N Q lt O ae wass a E T Al A A aweu z du euieu az mm LC EL cdu eueu Pp A U pi Buiuuej d eai eq 0c WEI SLA a L1dup eueu SLA wesbeiq OL 1343H esee d eV uw ID eAnoeul 0 Ni uue v eujeu yoolg S A euieu c1 uue v euieu sjeuBis Burjoo q eAnoe ou pue pejeAnoeep zou si eBejs Z sBuoolg weibeig o 19J J se qd 8C uue v euieu u L A euieu u EL Page 353 EN MRA4 04 09 V Protection Module Voltage Protection ANSI 27 59 Device Planning Parameters of the Voltage Protection Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu path Mode Mode do not use V 1 V Device planning V V 2 V V V 3 V V t V 4 V Global Protection Parameters of the Voltage Protection Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path ExBlo1 External bloc
368. t CB Pos Global Prot Para Switch Position is to be detected Only available if Mode CB POS Or CB POS And I lt SOTF Page 334 EN MRA4 04 09 SOTF Protection Module Switch Onto Fault Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Ext SOTF External Switch Onto Fault Only available if Mode Ext SOTF DI Slot X1 DI 1 DI Slot X1 DI 2 DI Slot X1 DI 3 DI Slot X1 DI 4 DI Slot X1 DI 5 DI Slot X1 DI 6 DI Slot X1 DI 7 DI Slot X1 DI 8 DI Slot X6 DI 1 DI Slot X6 DI 2 DI Slot X6 DI 3 DI Slot X6 DI 4 DI Slot X6 DI 5 DI Slot X6 DI 6 DI Slot X6 DI 7 DI Slot X6 DI 8 Protection Para Global Prot Para ISOTF EN MRA4 04 09 Page 335 SOTF Protection Module Switch Onto Fault Setting Group Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module stage inactive active inactive Protection Para lt n gt ISOTF ExBlo Fc Activate allow or inactivate disallow blocking of the module stage This parameter is only effective if a signal is assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo Fc active inactive active inactive Protection Para lt n gt ISOTF Ex re
369. t X1 DI 1 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X1 DI 2 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X1 DI 3 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X1 DI 4 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X1 DI 5 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X1 DI 6 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X1 DI 7 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X1 DI 8 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X6 DI 1 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X6 DI 2 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X6 DI 3 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X6 DI 4 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X6 DI 5 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X6 DI 6 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X6 DI 7 Signal Digital Input DI Slot X6 DI 8 Signal Digital Input EN MRA4 04 09 Page 219 Parameters Operational Modes access authorization Operational Mode Display Only The protection is activated All data measuring values records and counters meters can be viewed Operation Mode Parameter Setting and Planning In this mode you are able to edit and set parameters e change device planning details and e parameterize and reset operational data event recorder fault recorder power meter switching cycles N O T I C E If the device was not active within the parameter setting mode for a longer time can be set between 20 3600 seconds it changes automatically into Display Only mode Please refer to the appendix Module Panel NOTICE As long as you are within the parameter setting mode you cannot acknowledge In order to change into operation mode gt Paramete
370. t are parameterized ExBlo TripCmd Fc active f gt Pick up value for 40 00 69 95Hz 51 00Hz Protection Para overfrequency jus Only available if Device f Prot planning f Mode f Or f gt f and df dt Or f gt and DF DT ATI f lt Pick up value for 40 00 69 95Hz 49 00Hz Protection Para lt n gt f Prot If 1 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 409 f Protection Module Frequency Protection ANSI 81O U Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path t Tripping delay 0 00 3600 00s 1 00s Protection Para Only available if Device a planning f Mode f lt f Prot Orf gt Or f gt and df dtOr f lt and df dt AN df dt Measured value calculated 0 1 10 0Hz s 1 0Hz s Protection Para Rate of frequency change Jenis Only available if Device f Prot planning f Mode df dt Or Jf f lt and df dt Or f and df dt ul t df dt Trip delay df dt 0 00 300 00s 1 00s Protection Para lt n gt f Prot f 1 DF Frequency difference for the 0 0 10 0Hz 1 00Hz Protection Para maximum admissable jens variation of the mean of the rate of frequency change f Prot This function is inactive if DF 0 If 1 Only available if Device planning f Mode f lt and DF DT Or f and DF DT DT Time interval of the 0 1 10 0s 1 00s Protection Para maximum admissable rate jens of frequency change f Prot Only available if Device f planning f Mode f lt and Ju DF DT Or f and DF DT df dt mode df
371. t be misinterpreted Inverting 7 Inverting the input inactive inactive Device Para signas active Digital Inputs DI Slot X1 Group 3 Debouncing time 7 A change of the state of a digital input will only be no debouncing time 20 ms no debouncing time Device Para Digital Inputs recognized after the 50 ms DI Slot X1 debouncing time has expired become 100 ms Group 3 effective Thus wipers will not be misinterpreted Inverting 8 Inverting the input inactive inactive Device Para signals active Digital Inputs DI Slot X1 Group 3 Page 130 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Digital Inputs Dis Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Debouncing time 8 A change of the state of a digital input will only be recognized after the debouncing time has expired become effective Thus wipers will not be misinterpreted 8 no debouncing time 20 ms 50 ms 100 ms no debouncing time Device Para Digital Inputs DI Slot X1 Group 3 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 131 Module Digital Inputs DIs Digital Inputs Signals Outputs States Name Description DI 1 Signal Digital Input DI 2 Signal Digital Input DI 3 Signal Digital Input DI 4 Signal Digital Input DI 5 Signal Digital Input DI 6 Signal Digital Input DI 7 Signal Digital Input DI 8 Signal Digital Input Page 132
372. t discharge 6 kV Radiated radio frequency electromagnetic field immunity test IEC 61000 4 3 35 V m class X ANSI C37 90 2 Immunity to conducted disturbances induced by radio frequency fields IEC 61000 4 6 10 V class 3 Power frequency magnetic field immunity test IEC 61000 4 8 continues 30 A m icc 3 sec 300 A m EMC Emission Tests Radio interference suppression test IEC CISPR1 1 Limit value class B Radio interference radiation test IEC CISPR11 Limit value class B He I A r eee EN MRA4 04 09 Page 497 Standards Environmental Tests Classification IEC 60068 1 Climatic classification IEC 60721 3 1 Classification of ambient conditions Storage IEC 60721 3 2 Classification of ambient conditions Transportation IEC 60721 3 3 Classification of ambient conditions Stationary use at weatherprotected locations Test Ad Cold IEC 60068 2 1 Temperature test duration Test Bd Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 2 Temperature Relative humidity test duration Test Cab Damp Heat steady state IEC 60068 2 78 Temperature Relative humidity test duration Test Db Damp Heat cyclic IEC 60068 2 30 Temperature Relative humidity Cycles 12 12 hour Page 498 0 055 56 1K5 1B1 1C1L 1S1 1M2 but min 25 C 2K3 2B1 2C1 2S1 2M2 3K6 3B1 3C1 3S1 3M2 but min 0 C and 3K8H for 2h 20 C 16h 55 C lt 50 72h 40 C 93 56 d 55 C 95 EN MRA4 04
373. t1 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter1 IG 3 AdaptSet2 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter2 IG 3 AdaptSet3 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter3 IG 3 AdaptSet4 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter4 IG 4 active Signal active IG 4 ExBlo Signal External Blocking IG 4 Ex rev Interl Signal External reverse Interlocking IG 4 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked IG 4 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command IG 4 Alarm Signal Alarm IG IG 4 Trip Signal Trip IG 4 TripCmd Signal Trip Command IG 4 IGH2 Blo Signal blocked by an inrush IG 4 DefaultSet Signal Default Parameter Set IG 4 AdaptSet 1 Signal Adaptive Parameter 1 IG 4 AdaptSet 2 Signal Adaptive Parameter 2 IG 4 AdaptSet 3 Signal Adaptive Parameter 3 IG 4 AdaptSet 4 Signal Adaptive Parameter 4 IG 4 ExBlo1 l Module input state External blocking1 IG 4 ExBlo2 Module input state External blocking2 IG 4 ExBlo TripCmd Module input state Command External Blocking of the Trip IG 4 Ex rev Interl Module input state External reverse interlocking IG 4 AdaptSet1 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter1 IG 4 AdaptSet2 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter2 IG 4 AdaptSet3 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter3 IG 4 AdaptSet4 l Module input state Adaptive Parameter4 ThR active Signal active
374. tart 8 t rec lt Max file size eee Auto overwriting active Follow up time 25 Start 1 Pre trigger time 15 200 ms Max file size 2s Pre trigger time Follow up time x 500 ms t rec x x x 1000 ms x 1 0 Max file size x asss I A A r gn EN MRA4 04 09 Page 185 Module Disturbance Recorder Example Disturbance Recorder Timing Chart II Start 1 Prot Alarm Start 2 Start 3 Start 4 Start 5 Start 6 Start 7 otart 8 Auto overwriting active t rec Max file size Follow up time 25 Pre trigger time 1596 Max file size 2s Start 1 1335 ms Pre trigger time Follow up time t rec 2000 ms Max file size 2000 ms ems c E rm sssi Page 186 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Disturbance Recorder Read Out Disturbance Records Within the Menu Operation Disturb rec you can Detect accumulated Disturbance Records NOTICE Within the Menu Operation Recorders Man Trigger you can trigger the disturbance recorder manually Disturbance Recorder to be Read Out by Smart view e In case Smart view is not running please start it e f device data has not been loaded yet click Receive Data From The Device in menu Device e Double click the Operation icon in the navigation tree e Double click the Recorders icon in the navigation tree
375. te MN 490 Power CONS UMM NOM ea LLL aineenaan NE eaan AN TAEA EEEE EEA DEEA SEERA EEEE E EA EdE AEE EAEAN 490 keal HMO KK cne E E EEE E AN E E E 490 D e 490 Bielice Rin ots P A A 491 Current and Earth Current Measurement nene nennen sene rn nsn nnns nnne rna nnns 492 Voltage and Residual Voltage Measurement 492 Frequency Measuremeni_ anori 492 Sia Uie e c NOT omm 493 SUpPErVISION OMG S u 493 Time Syncironizaton TRG Uu UU ll uu EE A A REAN aS 494 PON hi T GS acter acts uuu E ua ua E A asas ayama saq 494 I sc usni 494 OL VAS ap E 494 STANDARD ec u a er usa NE CER M E ENDE EE MEDIUM GEM EN EU MU 495 Be jj D Spgs ess nei se cera DTE 495 igh Voltage Tests EC 60255 O ics ssaccosanccusausenianees sxatenadecbunecctins penebonianaueviowed lesen ER EAE aes anes 495 ENIC MI METRO m 496 EMC EMISSION TOS E Rt 497 ENVION IS CAN T6 SU PIP ISA SSS I pau bm b E EEE E sss tI c qnd 498 I li ir MIR 499 Joi u E u o UNS 500 Real Time Clock Olean E
376. the File Menu Within the menu Modify Device Configuration Typecode you can modify the device configuration or simply find out the type code of your current selection If you want to transfer the parameter file into a device please refer to chapter Restoring of device data when using Smart view Page 80 EN MRA4 04 09 Measuring Values Measuring Values Read out Measured Values In menu Operation Measured Values both measured and calculated values can be viewed The measured values are ordered by Standard values and special values depending on the type of device Read out of Measured Values via Smart view e Incase Smart view is not running please start it e Ifthe device data were not yet loaded select Receive Data From The Device from menu Device e Double click on icon Operation in the navigation tree Double click on icon Measured Values within the navigation tree Operation e Double click the Standard Values or special values within the Measured values The measured and calculated values are shown now in tabular form on the window N O T I C E To have the measuring data read in a cyclic manner select Auto refresh in menu View The measured values are read out about every two seconds He I A A s mr Va EN MRA4 04 09 Page 81 Measuring Values Standard Measured Values
377. the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo Fc active active lt n gt Ex rev Interl Fc Activate allow or inactive inactive Protection Para inactivate disallow blocking of the module stage This Prot parameter is only effective if a signal is ADI assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized Ex rev Interl Fc active active lt n gt Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking inactive inactive Protection Para of the Trip Command of the module stage Prot UAT active lt n gt Heu I A r h l EN MRA4 04 09 Page 279 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 Only available if Characteristic DEFT Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate allow or inactive inactive Protection Para inactivate disallow ii as blocking of the MS module stage This Prot parameter is only effective if a signal is ADI assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized ExBlo TripCmd Fc active gt If the pick up value is 0 01 40 00In 1 00In Protection Para exceeded the jas module stage will be C started Prot
378. the AR cycle if AbortFct Protection Para the state of the I I lt n gt assigned signal is true If the state of AR this function is true the AR will be AbortF ct aborted abort 6 Abort the AR cycle if AbortFct Protection Para lt n gt AR AbortF ct Page 436 EN MRA4 04 09 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 AR Abort Functions Name Description No assignment 1 TripCmd Signal Trip Command I 2 TripCmd Signal Trip Command I 3 TripCmd Signal Trip Command 4 TripCmd Signal Trip Command 5 TripCmd Signal Trip Command I 6 TripCmd Signal Trip Command IG 1 TripCmd Signal Trip Command IG 2 TripCmd Signal Trip Command IG 3 TripCmd Signal Trip Command IG 4 TripCmd Signal Trip Command ThR TripCmd Signal Trip Command I22 1 TripCmd Signal Trip Command 122 2 TripCmd Signal Trip Command V 1 TripCmd Signal Trip Command V 2 TripCmd Signal Trip Command V 3 TripCmd Signal Trip Command V 4 TripCmd Signal Trip Command VE 1 TripCmd Signal Trip Command VE 2 TripCmd Signal Trip Command f 1 TripCmd Signal Trip Command f 2 TripCmd Signal Trip Command f 3 TripCmd Signal Trip Command f 4 TripCmd Signal Trip Command f 5 TripCmd Signal Trip Command f 6 TripCmd Signal Trip Command V 012 1 TripCmd Signal Trip Command V 012 2 TripCmd Signal Tri
379. the Device Parameter Tree By means of them you can depending on the type of device Set cutoff levels Assign Digital Inputs Assign LEDs Assign Acknowledgment Signals Configure Statistics Adapt HMI Settings Configure Recorders reports Set Date and Time Change Passwords Check the version build of the device Field Parameters Field Parameters are part of the Device Parameter Tree Field Parameters comprise the essential basic settings of your switchboard such as rated frequency transformer ratios Protection Parameters Protection Parameters are part of the Device Parameter Tree This tree comprises e Global Protection Parameters are part of the Protection Parameters All settings and assignments that are done within the Global Parameter Tree are valid independent of the Setting Groups They have to be set once only In addition to that they comprise the CB Management The Parameter Setting Switch is part of the Protection Parameters You can either direct switch onto a certain parameter setting group or you can determine the conditions for switching onto another parameter setting group e Setting Group Parameters are part of the Protection Parameters By means of the Parameter Setting Group Parameters you can individually adapt you protective device to the current conditions or grid conditions They can be individually set in each Setting group He I A A m ET EN MRA4 04 09 Pag
380. the button Execute immediately e Enter your password Page 98 EN MRA4 04 09 Acknowledgments External Acknowledgments Within the menu Ex Acknowledge you can assign a signal e g the state of a digital input from the assignment list that acknowledges all acknowledgeable LEDs at once acknowledges all acknowledgeable binary outputs at once acknowledges all acknowledgeable SCADA signals at once Ex Acknowledge Ack LED Ex Acknowledge Ack BO Ex Acknowledge Ack Scada Within the menu Protection Para Global Prot Para MN ripControl you can assign a signal that acknowledges a pending trip command For details please refer to chapter gt TripControl External Acknowledge via Smart view In case Smart view is not running please start it e Ifthe device data were not yet loaded select Receive Data From The Device from menu Device Double click on icon Device Parameter in the navigation tree Double click on icon Ex Acknowledge within the operation menu e Inthe working window you can assign now each one signal that resets all acknowledgeable LEDs a signal that resets all binary outputs a signal that resets the SCADA signals respectively a signal that acknowledges a pending trip command Hp I AA saa EN MRA4 04 09 Page 99 Manual Resets Manual Resets In menu Operation Reset you can reset counters delete records e g
381. the current pointers 30 lagging to the voltage pointers e The following measuring values have to be shown P 0 86 Pn Q 0 5 Qn S 1 Sn If the measured values are shown with a negative algebraic sign check the NOTICE si genus apasha In this example PF Trigger is set to 0 86 30 lagging and PF Reset is set NOTICE to 0 86 30 leading Carry out the test with the settings trigger and reset that fit to your switchboard Testing the threshold values Trigger PF Trigger Example 0 86 lagging e Feed rated voltage and rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay PF 1 e Adjust the angle between voltage and current current pointer lagging until the relay picks up e Write down the pickup value Testing the Reset PF Reset Example 0 86 leading e Reduce the angle between voltage and current beyond PF 1 current pointer leading until the alarm drops off Write down the reset value Rmi ssIAI lt ai Page 400 EN MRA4 04 09 PF Protection Module Power Factor ANSI 55 Testing the trip delay PF Trigger Example 0 86 lagging e Feed rated voltage and rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay PF 1 e Adjust the angle between voltage and current current pointer lagging with an abrupt change to PF 0 707 45 lagging e Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay Compare the measured tripping time to the parameterized Te
382. the network connection Part 1 Set the TCP IP Parameters at the panel Device Call up the menu Device parameter TCP IP at the HMI panel and set the following parameters e TCP IP address Subnetmask e Gateway Part 2 Setting the IP address within Smart view Call up the menu Settings Device Connection within Smart view e Setradio button Network Connection e Enter the IP Address of the device that should be connected Page 68 EN MRA4 04 09 Smart View Set up a Connection via Serial Interface under Windows 2000 After installation of the software the Connection PC Notebook to the Device has to be configured once so that you are able to read device data or re write them into the device by means of the software Smart view N O TI C E For connection of your PCs notebooks with the device you need a special zero modem cable no serial cable please refer to chapter gt Zero Modem Cable N O TI CE If your PC notebook does not have a serial interface you need a special USB to serial adapter Only if the USB to serial adapter is correctly installed aided by the provided CD the communication with the device can be established see next chapter N O TI C E The connection Notebook PC to the device must not be protected encrypted via a smartcard If the network connection wizard asks you to encrypt the connection via a smartcard or not please choose Do not use the smartcard Setting up Con
383. time the position indicators check back signals have to change from ON to OFF Global Prot Para CB CB Manager Page 254 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Trip Control TripControl Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path tmax ON Within this time the 0 00 10 00s 0 10s Protection Para Sues E a Global Prot Para CB Within this time CB d SS chiede CB Manager back signals have to change from OFF to ON Aux ON The CB is in ON Protection Para ecce DI Slot X1 DI 1 Global Prot Para signal is true 52a DI Slot X1 DI 2 CB DI Slot X1 DI 3 CB Manager DI Slot X1 DI 4 DI Slot X1 DI 5 DI Slot X1 DI 6 DI Slot X1 DI 7 DI Slot X1 DI 8 DI Slot X6 DI 1 DI Slot X6 DI 2 DI Slot X6 DI 3 DI Slot X6 DI 4 DI Slot X6 DI 5 DI Slot X6 DI 6 DI Slot X6 DI 7 DI Slot X6 DI 8 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 255 Module Trip Control TripControl Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Aux OFF The CB is in OFF position if the state of the assigned signal is true 52b DI Slot X1 DI 1 DI Slot X1 DI 2 DI Slot X1 DI 3 DI Slot X1 DI 4 DI Slot X1 DI 5 DI Slot X1 DI 6 DI Slot X1 DI 7 DI Slot X1 DI 8 DI Slot X6 DI 1 DI Slot X6 DI 2 DI Slot X6 DI 3 DI Slot X6 DI 4 DI Slot X6 DI 5 DI Slot X6 DI 6 DI Slot X6 DI 7 DI Slot X6 DI 8 Protection Para Global Prot Para CB CB Manager Manual ON
384. tion Contact data and address can be found at the end of this manual In case of any failures the recorders of the device should be left untouched to ensure an easy diagnosis and proper repair at the factory Besides the records and visible indications to the customer there exists internal information about failures These allow service personnel to make a detailed analysis of files with failure reports at least at factory site Self supervision is applied by different functions at different cyclic or noncyclic timings to the following parts and functions of the device faultless cyclic execution of software functional capability of memory boards consistency of data functional capability of hardware sub assemblies and faultless operation of the measuring unit Faultless cyclic operation of software is supervised by timing analysis and checking results of different functions Errors of the software function watchdog function lead to restarting the device and switching off the self supervision relay life contact Also the System OK LED will blink red after three unsuccessful attempts to restart the device within a time period of 20 minutes The main processor cyclically monitors the operation of the signal processor and initiates corrective actions or restart of the device in case of faulty operation Data and files are generally secured against unintended overwriting or faulty changes by checksums The measuring unit
385. tion Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 Explanation t Tripping delay t char Time multiplier tripping characteristic factor Fault current gt If the pick up value is exceeded the module stage will be started By using the projecting parameters each of the overcurrent protective elements can be defined as forward reverse or non directional The forward or reverse direction is based on the characteristic angle for the phase direction specified by the field parameter MTA No directional information will be taken into account if the current protective element is planned as non directional EN MRA4 04 09 Page 261 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 DEFT 100 0 1 0 01 ENpS D a e cm tmm s d Page 262 EN MRA4 04 09 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 IEC NINV A Notice Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and instantaneous Reset Trip t I t char s t a t char s T 1 C gt 100 10 1 1 0 tis t char 0 5 0 2 0 1 0 1 T 0 01 0 01 0 1 10 100 x mult
386. tion Module Asymmetry Commissioning Asymmetry Protection Object to be tested Test of the asymmetry protection elements Necessary means e 3 phase AC voltage source Timer for measuring of the tripping time e Voltmeter Testing the tripping values Example Set the pickup value for the voltage in the negative phase sequence to 0 5 Vn Set the tripping delay to 1 s In order to generate a negative phase sequence voltage interchange the wiring of two phases VL2 and VL3 Testing the trip delay otart the timer and abrupt change switch to 1 5 times of the set tripping value Measure the trip delay Successful test result The measured threshold values and trip delays comply with those specified in the adjustment list Permissible deviations tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data peu I AA Ve He Y EN MRA4 04 09 Page 375 PQS Power Protection Module ANSI 32 37 PQS Power Protection Module ANSI 32 37 Available stages PQS 1 PQS 2 PQS 3 PQS 4 PQS 5 PQS 6 Emp R r o a Ms 8 0 Page 376 EN MRA4 04 09 PQS Power Protection Module ANSI 32 37 pexoojq 10 pejyeAnoeep jou puewwos Burddu sBumoolq du wesbeig o Jajay se qd gt S S JD O lt O Jd gt d d s puJ23du euieu epojy eueu du eujeu 0 1 eueu E mde sjeuBis Bunjoojq eAnoe ou pue pejeAnoeep jou s eDejs
387. tion becomes true rising edge At the same time a new time interval will be started Statistics Configuration via Smart view In case Smart view is not running please start it e f device data has not been loaded yet click Receive Data From The Device in menu Device Double click on icon Device Parameter in the navigation tree Double click on icon Statistics within the navigation tree Device Parameter e Configure the Statistics module em A i sss Page 88 EN MRA4 04 09 Statistics Direct Commands Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path Reset Reset of statistics inactive inactive Operation active Reset Standard Statistic Values Value Description Menu path f max Max frequency value Operation Statistics Standard values f avg Average frequency value Operation Statistics Standard values f min Min frequency value Operation Statistics Standard values VL12 max VL12 maximum value Operation Statistics Standard values VL12 avg VL12 average value Operation Statistics Standard values VL12 min VL12 minimum value Operation Statistics Standard values VL23 max VL23 maximum value Operation Statistics Standard values VL23 avg VL23 average value Operation Statistics Standard values VL23 min VL23 minimum value Operation Statistics Standar
388. tly via a cable type transformer or detected by a Holmgreen connection The earth current can alternatively be calculated from the phase currents but this is only possible if the phase currents are not ascertained by a V connection The device can optionally be procured with a sensitive earth current measuring input in preparation ENSE RADA sa sssi Page 288 EN MRA4 04 09 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G DEFT 100 0 1 0 01 IG EN MRA4 04 09 Page 289 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G IEC NINV Notice Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and instantaneous Reset Trip t 0 14 l t char s t 214 t char s IG IG V 1 IG 1 IG gt 7 100 10 1 1 0 t s t char 0 5 0 2 0 1 0 1 0 05 0 01 0 01 0 1 10 100 x G gt multiples of pickup Page 290 EN MRA4 04 09 IG Protection Module Ground Fault ANSI 50N G 51N G 67N G IEC VINV Notice A Various reset modes are available Resetting via characteristic delayed and instantaneous
389. to the data point list Commands The data point list comprises a list of the supported commands Any command will be responded by the device with a positve or negative confirmation If the command is executable the execution with the corresponding reason for the transmission COT will be lead in at first and subsequently the execution will be confirmed with COT1 within a ASDU9Y Disturbance Recording The disturbances recorded by the device can be read out by means described in standard IEC60870 5 103 The device is in compliance with the VDEW Control System by transmission of an ASDU 23 without disturbance records at the beginning of an Gl Cycle A disturbance record contains the following information Analog Measured Values IL1 IL2 IL3 IN Voltages VL1 VL2 VL3 VEN Binary States transmitted as marks eg Alarms and Trips Das Transmission ratio will not be supported The transmission ratio is included in the Multiplier Blocking the Transmission Direction The relay does not support functions to block the transmission in a certain direction supervision direction asss I A A M es a EN MRA4 04 09 Page 211 Module IEC60870 5 103 Global Protection Parameters of the IEC60870 5 103 possible that the last data bit is followed by a parity bit which is used for recognition of communication errors The parity bit ensures that with even parity EVEN always an even
390. to the measuring inputs of the relay The measured values for the active power P must show a negative algebraic sign Set the tripping threshold e g 0 2 Pn In order to test the tripping delay feed 0 1 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay Increase the current with an abrupt change to 0 3 In Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay Successful test result The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays threshold values and fallback ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list Permissible deviations tolerances can be found under Technical Data Page 389 PQS Power Protection Module ANSI 32 37 NOTICE W Page 390 Testing the threshold values Example Threshold 0 2 Qn Feed rated voltage and rated current with 90 degree phase shift between voltage and current pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay The measured values for the active power Q must show a negative algebraic sign Set the tripping threshold e g 0 2 Qn In order to test the tripping delay feed 0 1 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay Increase the current slowly until the relay picks up Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay Testing the tripping delay Example Threshold 0
391. tting value is 10 apply 15 Successful test result Permissible deviations tolerances and fallback ratio can be taken from the Technical Data pem I A A PS EN MRA4 04 09 Page 415 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 AR Protection Module Automatic Reclosure ANSI 79 AR Module AR is used for auto reclosing of overhead lines The start timer must not exceed the supervision timer Otherwise a series of uncontrolled reclosure attempts can be provoked Tripping times that are longer exceed the parameterized start time due to an abort of the AR attempt Thus it has to be ensured by all means that Supervision time t Superv gt Start time t Start gt longest tripping time CAUTION The AR module requires a signal CB reapy An AR cycle can be stopped by one of 6 assignable blocking signals N O TI CE y p y g g Sig AR procedure Initialization Activation The state of the AR changes from the inactive to the active state when parameter Function active is selected and at least one authorized protective function is allocated to the AR and provided that the AR module is not being blocked by an active blocking signal AR activated When the AR is activated this state is called AR active and is signaled as well Supervision time applies only if the CB is switched on manually When position CB Pos ON lt THAT MEANS CB Pos ON TRUE and CB Pos Orr
392. ue If you are testing tripping delays of less than modules e g P lt start a timer simultaneously with an abrupt change of the object to be tested from 120 of the tripping value to 80 of the tripping value EN MRA4 04 09 PQS Power Protection Module ANSI 32 37 P N O TI CE Testing the threshold values Example Threshold 1 1 Pn Feed rated voltage and 0 9 times rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay PF 1 The measured values for the active power P must show a positive algebraic sign Set the tripping threshold e g 1 1 Pn In order to test the tripping thresholds feed 0 9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay Increase the current slowly until the relay picks up Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant Compare the tripping value to the parameterized Testing the tripping delay Example Threshold 1 1 Pn Feed rated voltage and rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay PF 1 The measured values for the active power P must show a positive algebraic sign Set the tripping threshold e g 1 1 Pn In order to test the tripping delay feed 0 9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay Increase the current with an abrupt change to 1 2 In Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay Successful te
393. uency elements this test can be carried out similar to the test for overfrequency protection by using the related underfrequency values Please consider the following deviations e For testing the threshold values the frequency has to be decreased until the protection element is activated e For detection of the fallback ratio the measuring quantity has to be increased to more than 100 05 of the trip value or 0 0596 fn At 100 05 of the trip value the relay is to fall back at the earliest or 0 05 fn EET Ho eee Page 412 EN MRA4 04 09 f Protection Module Frequency Protection ANSI 810 U Commissioning df dt Object to be tested All frequency protection stages that are projected as df dt Necessary means e Three phase voltage source e Frequency generator that can generate and measure a linear defined rate of change of frequency Procedure Testing the threshold values e Keep on increasing the rate of change of frequency until the respective element is activated Note the value Testing the trip delay e Setthe test voltage to nominal frequency e Now apply a step change sudden change that is 1 5 times the setting value Example apply 3 Hz per second if the setting value is 2 Hz per second Measure the tripping time at the relay output Compare the measured tripping time to the parameterized Successful test result Permissible deviations tolerances and fallback ratios can be t
394. ui u 0 K m vSd z z m E UA esa NPPLUI ANJOL nppeuI npe s 0 uy u 0 0 s 0 ui luk 0 vd N peule Npeul Npe sO uw w s0 0 s o uw ul 0 9 pJepuels Q iSd E L Iegidepy 5 I epo uos 3esd 1egidepy v Yegidepy 9 n jsr1 jueuuuBissy u p amp ep egidepy eJeg uonoejoud amp 2 jsr1 1ueuuufissy u c esidepy 9 1sr1 1u uuuBissv u egidepy jsr1 u uuuBissv us 8 piesidepy yesgidepy u LL 301d eed 104g Ieqolo e1eq uonoejo4d Page 217 EN MRA4 04 09 Parameters Adaptive Parameter Sets are part of the Device Parameter Tree By means of Adaptive Parameter Sets you can temporarily modify single parameters within the parameter setting groups Application Examples e The output signal of the Switch Onto Fault module can be used to activate an Adaptive Parameter Set that sensibilizes the overcurrent protection e The output signal of the Cold Load Pickup module can be used to activate an Adaptive Parameter Set that desensitizes the overcurrent protection e By means of Adaptive Parameter Sets an Adaptive Auto Reclosure can be realized After an reclosure attempt the tripping thresholds or tripping curves of the overcurrent protection can be adapted e Depending on undervoltage the overcurrent protection can be modified Voltage Controlled N O T I C E Adaptive Parameter Sets are only av
395. ule VTS is capable of detecting a fuse failure at the secondary side of the VTs as long as the automatic circuit breakers of the VTs are connected with the device via a digital input and if this input is assigned to the module VTS Supervision of the VTs by comparing the measured and calculated residual voltage The module VTS can detect a VT failure if the calculated residual voltage does not match the measured one As a precondition however the phase voltages not the line to line voltage are connected to the device and so the residual voltage can be calculated It is furthermore necessary that the residual voltage is actually being measured by means of the VTs auxiliary windings e n If an adjustable threshold value difference between measured and calculated residual voltage has been exceeded a VT failure can be assumed This will then be signaled by an alarm message ESESIC I A A m p i EN MRA4 04 09 Page 467 VTS Supervision Module Voltage Transformer Supervision ANSI 60FL sjeuBis Bur4oo q eAoe ou pue pajeAroeep jou si eDejs sBurjoo g wesbeiq ol 1342Y se d Z Ch wely SLA p nse w u09 JA3 L lt yeg o eseug uoo A DT TUUS panses sa I 3 0 Sa I am mm a s a Qs co Q m I ETA l peje nojeo A Wiel SLA NE dA ZTA LA3 dd XJ SLA LES sr 1u uuuBissv u LAA amp 4 sn4 XF SLA LA dd XJ SLA s17 jueuuufissy u LA II
396. ule Cold Load Pickup Commissioning of the Cold Load Pickup Module Object to be tested Testing the the module Cold Load Pickup according to the parameterized operating mode I lt No current LS POS Circuit Breaker Position I No current and CB POS Position of the Circuit Breaker I lt No current or CB POS Position of the Circuit Breaker Necessary means e Three phase current source If the Enable Mode depends on current e May be ampere meters If the Enable Mode depends on current Timer Test Example for Mode CB POS Circuit Breaker Position N O TI C E Mode I lt In order to test the tripping delay start the timer and feed with an abrupt change current that is distinct less than the I threshold Measure the tripping delay In order to measure the fallback ratio feed with an abrupt change a current that is distinct above the I threshold Mode I lt and CB POS Combine the abrupt change switching ON and OFF of the current with the manual switching ON and OFF of the circuit breaker Mode I lt or CB POS Initially carry out the test with an abrupt changing current that is switched ON and OFF above and below the I threshold Measure the tripping times Finally carry out the test by manually switching ON and OFF the Circuit Breaker The Circuit Breaker has to be in the OFF Position There must not be any load current The Status Display of the device shows the signal CLPU ErFFEcrTivE
397. ult Menu path nondir Trip at V 0 Only relevant for inactive inactive Protection Para current protection ii eas modules stages with eo i directional feature Prot The device will trip non directional if this parameter is set to active and no direction could be determined because no reference voltage V 0 could be measured any more e g if there is a three phase short circuit close to the device If this parameter is set to inactive the protection stage will be blocked in case of V 0 Only available if Device planning I Mode directional A 1 Page 282 EN MRA4 04 09 I Protection Module Overcurrent Protection ANSI 50 51 67 I Module Input States Name Description Assignment via ExBlo1 l Module input state External Protection Para DOC I Global Prot Para Prot 1 ExBlo2 Module input state External Protection Para DOOR Global Prot Para Prot I 1 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Protection Para Blocking of the Trip Command IGlobal Prot Para Prot 1 Ex rev Interl Module input state External reverse Protection Para icin Global Prot Para Prot 1 AdaptSet1 l Module input state Adaptive Protection Para Pseilietem Global Prot Para Prot 1 AdaptSet2 Module input state Adaptive Protection Para Ti I Global Prot Para Prot 1 AdaptSet3 Module input state Adaptive Protection Para
398. ungeAu 9 1u uuuBissv Burau G juowubissy y Buni Au p u uluBissv on e BunueAu L LS u uuuBissv z uau c 1u uuuBissv Bureau 1ueuiufissy e aJ jndjno _ pjou 1 L KAeugqeujoeras L lt LI I Buni Au oul ploy IH AU Binary Output Relays EN MRA4 04 09 Page 138 Binary Output Relays System Contact The System OK alarm relay SC is the devices LIFE CONTACT Its installation location depends on the housing type Please refer to the wiring diagram of the device WDC contact The System OK relay SC cannot be parameterized The system contact is an operating current contact that picks up when the device is free from internal faults While the device is booting up the System OK relay SC remains dropped off As soon as the system was duly started up the relay picks up and the assigned LED is activated accordingly please refer to chapter Self Supervision He I A Hr Pee EN MRA4 04 09 Page 139 Binary Output Relays Global Protection Parameters of the Binary Output Relays Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path t hold To clearly identify the 0 00 300 00s 0 03s Device Para state transition of a Binarv Outputs binary output relay isses the new state is BO Slot X2 being hold at least for the duration of BO 1 the hold time Latched Defines whether the in
399. uodu uueu du euieu ooo 1 euieu a sjeuBis Buryoojq eAnoe ou pue pajeArnoeep jou s eDejs f Jeuo4 C sBuroojg wepeq o 1 1 9J J esee d r L UlJe v eueu u i z euieu u 1 c1 1272 Protection Module Unbalanced Load Protection ANSI 46 EN MRA4 04 09 Page 324 1272 Protection Module Unbalanced Load Protection ANSI 46 Device Planning Parameters of the Unbalanced Load Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu path Mode Mode do not use use Device planning use Global Protection Parameters of the Unbalanced Load Module Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path ExBlo1 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a I Prot parameter set and if the state of the 2 1 assigned signal is true ExBlo2 External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the module if blocking is activated Global Prot Para allowed within a Prot parameter set and if the state of the 2 1 assigned signal is true ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of 1 n Assignment List Protection Para the Trip Command of the module the stage if blocking is activated allowed within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true Global Prot Para Prot 2 gt 1 EN MRA4 0
400. ur PC notebook is not provided with a serial interface this can be compensated by a special USB RS232 Adapter Zero Modem Cable N O T I C E Only an adapter accepted by Woodward SEG may be used First install the _ adapter with the related driver that you can find on the CD and then establish the connection Smart view gt Device The adapters must support very high speed Page 74 EN MRA4 04 09 Smart View Smart view Troubleshooting e Make sure whether the Windows service Telephony is started In Start gt System Control Administration gt Services the service Telephony must be visible and must have also been started If not the service has to be started e For establishing the connection you need to have sufficient rights administration rights e Ifa firewall is installed on your computer TCP IP port 52152 must have been released e f your computer is not provided with a serial interface you need a USB to serial adapter accepted by Woodward SEG This adapter has to be properly installed Ensure that a zero modem cable is used a standard serial cable without control wires does not enable communication N O TI C E If on a WINDOWS XP computer a serial interface for direct connection to another computer has not been established so far the following problem can arise If you have selected a serial interface in the connection assistant it may happen that this is not entered correctly in the dial up netwo
401. ut state Acknowledgment signal for the binary output relay If latching is set to active the binary output relay can only be acknowledged if those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back and the hold time is expired Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 1 BO2 1 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 Page 154 EN MRA4 04 09 Binary Output Relays Name Description Assignment via BO2 2 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 BO2 3 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 BO2 4 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 BO2 5 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 BO2 6 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 BO2 7 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 Ack signal BO 2 Module input state Acknowledgment signal for the binary output relay If latching is set to active the binary output relay can only be acknowledged if those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back and the hold time is expired Device Para Binary Outputs BO Slot X2 BO 2 BO3 1 Module input state Assignment Device Para Binary
402. utput Relay Signals Name Description BO 1 Signal Binary Output Relay BO2 Signal Binary Output Relay BO3 Signal Binary Output Relay BO 4 Signal Binary Output Relay BO 5 Signal Binary Output Relay BO6 Signal Binary Output Relay Page 160 EN MRA4 04 09 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs Light Emitting Diodes LEDs LEDs group A LEDs group B Attention must be paid that there are no overlapping functions due to double or multiple LED assignment of colors and flashing codes If LEDs are parameterized Latchedzactive they will keep return into their blink code color even if there is a break within the power supply If LEDs are parameterized Latchedzactive The LED blink code will also retain if the LED is reprogrammed in another way This applies also if Latched is set to inactive Resetting a LED that has latched a signal will always require an acknowledgment N O TI CE This chapter contains information on the LEDs that are placed on the left hand of the display group A If your device is also equipped with LEDs on the right hand of the display group B the information in this chapter is valid analog The only difference is group A and group B within the menu paths Via push button INFO it is always possible to display the current alarms alarm texts that are assigned to an LED Please refer to chapter Navigation description of the INFO key Set the foll
403. v Interl Fc Activate allow or inactivate disallow blocking of the module stage This parameter is only effective if a signal is assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter If the signal becomes true those modules stages are blocked that are parameterized Ex rev Interl Fc active inactive active inactive Protection Para n SOTF The CB is in the OFF Position if the measured current is less than this parameter 0 01 1 00In 0 01In Protection Para lt n gt ISOTF t enable While this timer is running and while the module is not blocked the Switch Onto Fault Module is effective SOTF is armed 0 10 10 00s 2S Protection Para lt n gt ISOTF Page 336 EN MRA4 04 09 SOTF Protection Module Switch Onto Fault Switch Onto Fault Module Input States was switched on manually Name Description Assignment via ExBlo1 l Module input state External Protection Para DIOCKING Global Prot Para ISOTF ExBlo2 l Module input state External Protection Para SOS Global Prot Para ISOTF Ex rev Interl Module input state External reverse Protection Para DISCO Global Prot Para ISOTF Manual ON I Module input state Circuit breaker Protection Para Global Prot Para SOTF CB Pos Detect l Module input state Criterion by which the Circuit Breaker Switch Position is to be detected Protection Para
404. voltage measuring inputs and if VT con phase to neutral and EVT con calculated were set in the field parameters Procedure e Feed a three phase symmetrical voltage system Vn into the voltage measuring inputs of the relay e Set the limiting value of VE x to 90 Un e Disconnect the phase voltage at two measuring inputs symmetrical feeding at the secondary side has to be maintained Now the VE measuring value has to be about 100 of the value Vn e Ascertain that the signal VE ALarm or VE Tnie is generated now Successful test result The signal VE Atarm or VE TniP is generated mpm ss Page 368 EN MRA4 04 09 V 012 Protection Module Asymmetry V 012 Protection Module Asymmetry Available stages V 012 1 V 012 2 V 012 3 V 012 4 V 012 5 V 012 6 peu I A A Jn s NU MI eI EN MRA4 04 09 Page 369 pexooiq JO pejeAnoeep jou pueuuuoo Buiddu sBunolq du wesbeig o Jajay eseejd y i I Jeyl puuodu eujeu SUN I I a I Bes 1 ETA l I qp l labes l cl saa a Ses __ I ZTA pe I i x Et TCR I F L I _ zd LIA du eujeu 0 T ESSEN 2 Jeyy MN LA Sdd l I I E 1 I I eee eta U n sjeuBis Burjoojq eArjoe ou pue pejeAnoeep jou si eDejs C s6uiyoojg ueJBeig o 1343Y eseeld UUe v euieu lt ZA p
405. w configuration of the devices for Modbus connection some default values of the control system must be available EN MRA4 04 09 Page 203 Module Modbus Modbus Modbus RTU Part 1 Configuration of the Devices Call up Device parameter Modbus and set the following communication parameters there e Slave address to allow clear identification of the device e Baud Rate Also select below indicated RS485 interface related parameters from there such as Number of data bits e One ofthe following supported communication variants Number of data bits even odd parity or no parity number of stop bits t timeout communication errors are only identified after expiry of a supervision time t timeout e Response time defining the period within which an enquiry from the master has to be answered Part 2 Hardware Connection e For hardware connection to the control system there is an RS485 interface at the rear side of the device RS485 fiber optic or terminals e Connect bus and device wiring Error Handling Hardware Errors Information on physical communication errors such as Baudrate Error e Parity Error can be obtained from the event recorder Error Handling Errors on protocol level If for example an invalid memory address is enquired error codes will be returned by the device that need to be interpreted eme I Page 204 EN MRA4 04 09 Module Mo
406. wejy a weu 5419 y weu gt lt 9po N euieu Buiuuej d eoi eq Bae soseud PIJEA JO ON pexoojq 10 pejeAngoeep you puewwod Bulddis 1 sBuryoojg du weibeig OL Jajay se d E uone nojeo Aouenbel4 sjeuBis Buryoo q o oe ou pue pejeAnoeep jou si eDejs sBulyoojg wesbeig ol Jajay se q d i weu Page 403 EN MRA4 04 09 f Protection Module Frequency Protection ANSI 81O U gt A Aq o g euieu li SV puuodu j euieu du eujeu J duj eujeu 1q 3a 1p jp du j eueu ann 1Q 4G p p uuejy eueu j wey eweu P PI 1p Jp einjosqe IAP eAnebeu b JP JP pue gt 1p Jp pue lt J apo eweu Duiuuejd S5 A q l l L l l J J s sss 1 r l l pexoo q JO pejeAnoeep you pueuuuoo Huddi sBuryoojqg du uej6eiq o 1843Y se q 9018 A eled pI9t4 p Jp uoyeinojeo pp sjeuBis Buryoojq AlJ98 ou pue p eAl 98 p jou si apes Pee 577 a i DEC TO r i sBurjoolg uue1Beid o 19Jes esee d u Il euieu D Jp pue lt J JO 1p jp pue gt J u Tu 8 z EN MRA4 04 09 Page 404 f Protection Module Frequency Protection ANSI 81O U gt A Aq o g euieu O 8b puuodis tuueu du eujeu J du j eueu 1d 4q p p du j eueu 1d sq pp uue v uieu J uue v eueu Buiuuejd eoi eq J 908 A uone nojeo ASu nb ij Page 405
407. will be available in approximately 45 seconds After approximately 80 seconds the boot phase is completed HMI and Communication initialized em A Met Page 494 EN MRA4 04 09 Standards Generic standard Product standard Standards Design Standards EN 61000 6 2 EN 61000 6 3 IEC 60255 6 EN 50178 UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment CSA C22 2 No 14 95 Industrial Control Equipment ANSI C37 90 High frequency interference test IEC 60255 22 1 class 3 Insulation voltage test IEC 60255 5 EN 50178 Impulse voltage test IEC 60255 5 EN MRA4 04 09 Within one circuit Circuit to earth Circuit to circuit All circuits to other circuits and exposed conductive parts Except interfaces and Voltage measuring input High Voltage Tests IEC 60255 6 1 kV 2 s 2 5 kV 2 s 2 5 kV 2 s 2 5 kV eff 50Hz 1 min 1 5 kV DC 1 min 3 kV eff 50 Hz 1 min 5 kV 0 5J 1 2 50 us Page 495 Standards EMC Immunity Tests Fast transient disturbance immunity test Burst IEC 60255 22 4 IEC 61000 4 4 class 4 Surge immunity test IEC 61000 4 5 class 4 Page 496 Power supply mains inputs Other in and outputs Within one circuit Circuit to earth 4 kV 2 5 kHz 2 kV 5 kHz 2 kV 4 kV EN MRA4 04 09 Standards Electrical discharge immunity test IEC 60255 22 2 Air discharge 8 kV IEC 61000 4 2 d Contac
408. xBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 V 012 3 ExBlo TripCmd I Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command V 012 4 active Signal active V 012 4 ExBlo Signal External Blocking V 012 4 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked V 012 4 ExBlo TripCmd Signal External Blocking of the Trip Command V 012 4 Alarm Signal Alarm voltage asymmetry V 012 4 Trip Signal Trip V 012 4 TripCmd Signal Trip Command V 012 4 ExBlot I Module input state External blocking1 V 012 4 ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 V 012 4 ExBlo TripCmd I Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command V 012 5 active Signal active V 012 5 ExBlo Signal External Blocking V 012 5 Blo TripCmd Signal Trip Command blocked V 012 5 ExBlo TripCmd oignal External Blocking of the Trip Command V 012 5 Alarm Signal Alarm voltage asymmetry V 012 5 Trip Signal Trip V 012 5 TripCmd Signal Trip Command EN MRA4 04 09 Page 115 Assignment List Name Description V 012 b ExBlo1 I Module input state External blocking1 V 012 b ExBlo2 I Module input state External blocking2 V 012 5 ExBlo TripCmd l Module input state External Blocking of the Trip Command V 012 6 active Signal active V 012 6 ExBlo
409. y output relay contacts is related to the type of the device or type code The binary output relays are potential free change over contacts In chapter Assignment binary outputs the assignment of the binary output relays is specified The changeable signals are listed in the assignment list which can be found in the appendix A WARNING Make sure that the tightening torque is 0 55 Nm 4 9 Ib in Please duly consider the current carrying capacity of the binary output relays Please refer to the Technical Data Page 29 EN MRA4 04 09 Installation and Connection Terminal Marking X2 for device MRA4 Terminal Marking X5 for device MRA4 Electro mechanical assignment for device MRA4 0 HTL MK 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Page 30 EN MRA4 04 09 Installation and Connection Digital Inputs This module is provided with 8 grouped digital inputs In chapter Device parameter Digital Inputs the assignment of the digital inputs is specified Make sure that the tightening torque is 0 55 Nm 4 9 Ib in For each digital input group the related voltage input range has to be parameterized Wrong switching thresholds can result in malfunctions wrong signal transfer times Via the assignment list the states of the digital inputs are assigned to the N O TI CE modu
410. y touching and holding a grounded metal object pipes cabinets equipment etc 2 Avoid the build up of static electricity on your body by not wearing clothing made of synthetic materials Wear cotton or cotton blend materials as much as possible because these do not store static electric charges as much as synthetics 3 Keep plastic vinyl and Styrofoam materials such as plastic or Styrofoam cups cup holders cigarette packages cellophane wrappers vinyl books or folders plastic bottles and plastic ash trays away from the control the modules and the work area as much as possible 4 Do not remove any printed circuit board PCB from the control cabinet unless absolutely necessary If you must remove the PCB from the control cabinet follow these precautions Do not touch any part of the PCB except the edges Do not touch the electrical conductors the connectors or the components with conductive devices or with your hands When replacing a PCB keep the new PCB in the plastic antistatic protective bag it comes in until you are ready to install it Immediately after removing the old PCB from the control cabinet place it in the antistatic protective bag To prevent damage to electronic components caused by improper handling read and observe the precautions in Woodward manual 82715 Guide for Handling and Protection of Electronic Controls Printed Circuit Boards and Modules Woodward SEG reserves the right to u

MRA4 HighPROTEC

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents